Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - Hondatechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/WA1010/WA1010OM.pdf2010 CR-V Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) This document does not contain hyperlinks and may be

2010 CR-V

Owner’s Manual

(Unlinked)

This document does not contain hyperlinks and may be formatted for printing instead of web use. This is due to changes

in content and specifications of the vehicle that happen throughout the model year. This manual will be replaced with a

hyperlinked version at the end of the model year.

© 2009 Honda Motor Co., Ltd. P/N 00X31-SWA-6301

This owner’s manual should be considereda permanent part of the vehicle and shouldremain with the vehicle when it is sold.

This owner’s manual covers all models ofthe CR-V. You may find descriptions ofequipment and features that are not on yourparticular vehicle.

The information and specifications includedin this publication were in effect at the timeof approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specifications ordesign at any time without notice andwithout incurring any obligation whatsoever.

Owner’s Identif ication

POUR CLIENTS CANADIENAVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avezbesoin d’un Manuel du Conducteuren français, veuillez demander àvotre concessionnaire decommander le numéro de pièce33SWAC30

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE/TERRITORY ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE/TERRITORY ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

09/07/16 17:42:58 31SWA630_001

1

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is toread this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle soyou can refer to it at any time.

Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your vehicle, otherproperty, or the environment.

Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in theinstrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preservesyour investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind thatyour dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems uniqueto your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will bepleased to answer any questions and concerns.

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2010 Honda CR-V was a wiseinvestment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.

Introduction

i

09/07/16 17:43:05 31SWA630_002

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birthdefects or other reproductive harm.

Event Data Recorders

This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone elseexcept as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.

Service Diagnostic RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The datacan be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It mayalso be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.

WARNING:

This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. Thesedevices record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failureof any airbag system component.

Introduction

ii

09/07/16 17:43:10 31SWA630_003

－

－－

－

－－

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thisvehicle safely is an importantresponsibility.

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your vehicle. You mustuse your own good judgement.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.such as Driver and Passenger Safety.

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

These signal words mean:

preceded by a safety alert symbol and one ofthree signal words: , , or .

on the vehicle.

InstructionsSafety Section

Safety Headings

Safety MessagesSafety Labels

A Few Words About Safety

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

iii

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

09/07/16 17:43:24 31SWA630_004

Your CR-V has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use only on pavement. Higher groundclearance has many advantages for off-highway driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and roughterrain. It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier.

These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a highcenter of gravity. This means your vehicle can tip or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have asignificantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantlymore likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder, make sure you and your passengers always wearseat belts.

For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read ‘‘Driving Guidelines’’ on page of this manual and thesection on page . Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in loss of

control, a crash, or rollover.

312336Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

Important Handling Information

iv

09/07/16 17:43:29 31SWA630_005

(seat belts, SRS, and child protection)

(main controls)

(fluid capacities and tire pressures)

(indicators, gauges, information display, dashboard, and steering column)

(climate control, audio, steering wheel, security and cruise control)

(fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading)

(engine and transmission operation)

(minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage)

(flat tire, dead battery, overheating, and fuses)

(vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls)

(warranty and contact information)

(how to order)

Contents

............................................................Driver and Passenger Safety . 5

................................................................................................................................................Index . I

...............................................................................................Your Vehicle at a Glance . 3

..................................................Service Information Summary . last page

...............Instruments and Controls . 59

..............................................Features . 129

.......................................................................Before Driving . 293

.........................................................................................Driving . 311

.................................................Maintenance . 339

.........................................Taking Care of the Unexpected . 381

..............................................Technical Information . 405

..................Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada only) . 421

..................................................................................Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) . 425

IND

EX

1

09/07/16 17:43:42 31SWA630_006

A convenient reference to thesections in this manual.

A quick reference to the maincontrols in your vehicle.

Explains the purpose of eachinstrument panel indicator and gauge,and how to use the controls on thedashboard and steering column.

How to operate the heating and airconditioning system, the audiosystem, and other conveniencefeatures.

What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to loadluggage and other cargo.

The proper way to start the engine,shift the transmission, and park; pluswhat you need to know if you’replanning to tow a trailer.

How to order manuals and othertechnical literature.

A summary of the information youneed when you pull up to the fuelpump.

Important information about theproper use and care of your vehicle’sseat belts, an overview of thesupplemental restraint system, andvaluable information on how toprotect children with child restraints.

A summary of the warrantiescovering your new vehicle, and howto contact us for any reason. Refer toyour warranty manual for detailedinformation.

The maintenance minder shows youwhen you need to take your vehicleto the dealer for maintenance service.There is also a list of things to checkand instructions on how to checkthem.

ID numbers, dimensions, capaci-ties, and technical information.

This section covers several problemsmotorists sometimes experience,and details how to handle them.

Overview of Contents

Contents

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Driver and Passenger Safety

Instruments and Controls

Features

Driving

Maintenance

Warranty and CustomerRelations(U.S. and Canada only)

Authorized Manuals(U.S. only)

Index

Before Driving

Service Information Summary

Technical Information

Taking Care of the Unexpected

2

09/07/16 17:44:04 31SWA630_007

＊

＊

＊

＊ If equipped:


Your

Vehicle

ataG

lance

3

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

FUEL FILL DOORRELEASE HANDLE

PASSENGER’S FRONTAIRBAG

INSTRUMENT PANELINDICATORSGAUGES

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION

POWER DOOR LOCKMASTER SWITCHES

U.S. EX-L without navigation system is shown.

ACCESSORY POWERSOCKETS

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLS

CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

DRIVER’S FRONTAIRBAG

AUDIO SYSTEM

(P.10, 23)

(P.85)

(P.295)

(P.61)(P.68)

(P.145, 157, 194)USB ADAPTER CABLE (P.237, 245)

(P.10, 23)

(P.130)

(P.135)

(P.315)

(P.123)

(P.112)

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE(P.297)

MIRROR CONTROLS(P.115)

09/07/16 17:44:10 31SWA630_008

＊＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.If equipped.Refer to the navigation system manual.

1 :2 :3 :


4

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS

PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF INDICATOR

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON

WINDSHIELDWIPERS/WASHERS

SHIFT LEVER

CLOCK

HORN

CRUISE CONTROLBUTTONS

SEAT HEATER SWITCHES

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER BUTTON/HEATED MIRRORSBUTTON

BLUETOOTH HANDSFREELINK SYSTEMVOICE CONTROL BUTTONS

VEHICLE STABILITYASSIST (VSA) SYSTEMOFF SWITCH

(P.79) (P.79) (P.33)AUDIO SYSTEM (P.145, 157)

(P.259)

AUDIO SYSTEM(P.194)

(P.75)

(P.80/115)

(P.315)

(P.111)(P.266)

(P.269)

(P.325)

(P.81)

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS(P.76)

MIRROR CONTROLS

REMOTE AUDIO CONTROLS(P.255)

STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENTS

PARKING BRAKE PEDAL(P.81)

NAVIGATION SYSTEMVOICE CONTROL SWITCHES

(P.115)

1

2

2

2

2

2

2

3

09/07/16 17:44:21 31SWA630_009

－

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat belts. Itexplains how your airbags work. Andit tells you how to properly restraininfants and children in your vehicle.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 8

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 12.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 12

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 12............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 13

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 145. Fasten and Position the

.............................Seat Belts . 156. Maintain a Proper Sitting

................................Position . 16.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 17...Additional Safety Precautions . 18

Additional Information About.......................Your Seat Belts . 19

..Seat Belt System Components . 19......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 20

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 21

...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 22Additional Information About

...........................Your Airbags . 23......Airbag System Components . 23

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 26

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 29How Your Side Curtain

..........................Airbags Work . 31..How the SRS Indicator Works . 32

How the Side Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 32

How the Passenger Airbag...............Off Indicator Works . 33

.............................Airbag Service . 34...Additional Safety Precautions . 34

Protecting Children General................................Guidelines . 35

All Children Must Be...............................Restrained . 35

All Children Should Sit in a.................................Back Seat . 36

The Passenger’s Front Airbag.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 36

If You Must Drive with Several...................................Children . 38

If a Child Requires Close..................................Attention . 38

...Additional Safety Precautions . 38Protecting Infants and Small

...................................Children . 40.......................Protecting Infants . 40

.........Protecting Small Children . 41.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 42....................Installing a Child Seat . 43

...............................With LATCH . 44.........With a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 47

..............................With a Tether . 49...........Protecting Larger Children . 51

...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 51..................Using a Booster Seat . 52

When Can a Larger Child Sit in.........................................Front . 53

...Additional Safety Precautions . 54.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 55

...................................Safety Labels . 56

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

5

09/07/16 17:44:27 31SWA630_010

－

You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual.

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse withevery additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

Children age 12 and under shouldride properly restrained in a backseat, not the front seat. Infants andsmall children should be restrainedin a child seat. Larger childrenshould use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder belt until they can use thebelt properly without a booster seat(see pages ).

A seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbags aredesigned to supplement seat belts,not replace them. So even thoughyour vehicle is equipped with airbags,make sure you and your passengersalways wear your seat belts, andwear them properly (see page ).15

35 54

Important Safety Precautions

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards

Don’t Drink and Drive

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Restrain All Children

6

09/07/16 17:44:37 31SWA630_011

Engaging in mobile phoneconversation or other activities thatkeep you from paying close attentionto the road, other vehicles andpedestrians could lead to a crash.Remember, situations can changequickly, and only you can decidewhen it is safe to divert attentionaway from driving.

Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed, the greater therisk, but serious injuries can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.

Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance (see page ).341

Pay Appropriate Attention to theTask of Driving Safely

Control Your Speed

Keep Your Vehicle in SafeCondition


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

7

09/07/16 17:44:44 31SWA630_012

Your vehicle is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

However, you and your passengerscan’t take full advantage of thesefeatures unless you remain sitting inthe correct position and

. In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.

The following pages explain how youcan take an active role in protectingyourself and your passengers.

Some features do not require anyaction on your part. These include astrong steel framework that forms asafety cage around the passengercompartment, front and rear crushzones, a collapsible steering column,and tensioners that tighten the frontseat belts in a crash.

always wearyour seat belts

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

8

(5)

(7)

(10)

(2)

(2)

(9)

(11)

(4)(3)

(12)

(1)

(9)

(8) (6)

(1) Safety Cage(2) Crush Zones(3) Seats and Seat-Backs(4) Head Restraints(5) Collapsible Steering Column(6) Seat Belts(7) Front Airbags(8) Side Airbags(9) Side Curtain Airbags(10) Door Locks(11) Front Seat Belt Tensioners(12) Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners

09/07/29 20:29:30 31SWA630_013

－－－－

Your vehicle is equipped with seatbelts in all seating positions.

Seat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces and territoriesrequire you to wear seat belts.

When properly worn, seat belts:

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including:

frontal impactsside impactsrear impactsrollovers

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle’s built-in safety features.

Always wear your seat belt, andmake sure you wear it properly.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Keep you from being thrown outof the vehicle.

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.

Your seat belt system also includesan indicator on the instrument paneland a beeper to remind you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.

Seat Belts

Why Wear Seat Belts

What You Should Do:


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

9

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

09/07/16 17:45:07 31SWA630_014

Your vehicle has a supplementalrestraint system (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision (see page

for more information on howyour front airbags work).

Your vehicle also has side airbags tohelp protect the upper torso of thedriver or a front seat passengerduring a moderate to severe sideimpact (see page for moreinformation on how your side airbagswork).

In addition, your vehicle has sidecurtain airbags to help protect theheads of the driver, front passenger,and passengers in the outer rearseating positions during a moderateto severe side impact or rollover (seepage for more information on howyour side curtain airbags work).

26

29

31

Airbags


10

09/07/16 17:45:15 31SWA630_015

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back from thesteering wheel as possible whileallowing full control of the vehicle. Afront passenger should move theirseat as far back from the dashboardas possible.

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

Remember, however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injuries ordeaths that can occur in a severecrash, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.

To do their job, airbags mustinflate with tremendous force. Sowhile airbags help save lives, theycan cause minor injuries or moreserious or even fatal injuries ifoccupants are not properlyrestrained or sitting properly.

Airbags do not replace seat belts.

Airbags offer no protection in rearcollisions, or minor frontal or sidecollisions.

What you should do:

Airbags can pose serious hazards.


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

11

09/07/16 17:45:23 31SWA630_016

－

The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver, adult passengers,and teenage children who are largeenough and mature enough to driveor ride in the front.

See pages for importantguidelines on how to properlyprotect infants, small children, andlarger children who ride in yourvehicle.

Adjust the driver’s seat as far to therear as possible while allowing you tomaintain full control of the vehicle.Have a front passenger adjust theirseat as far to the rear as possible.

After everyone has entered thevehicle, be sure the doors and thetailgate are closed and locked.

Locking the doors reduces thechance of someone being thrown outof the vehicle during a crash, and ithelps prevent passengers fromaccidentally opening a door andfalling out.

Locking the doors also helps preventan outsider from unexpectedlyopening a door when you come to astop.

Your vehicle has the auto doorlocking/unlocking feature. For moreinformation, see page .

Your vehicle has a door andtailgate open indicator on

the instrument panel to indicatewhen a specific door or the tailgate isnot tightly closed.

See page for how to lock thedoors, and page for how the doorand tailgate open indicator works.

35 54

8565

86

Adjust the Front SeatsIntroduction

Close and Lock the Doors1.

2.

Protecting Adults and Teens

12

09/07/16 17:45:37 31SWA630_017

If you sit too close to the steeringwheel or dashboard, you can beseriously injured by an inflating frontairbag, or by striking the steeringwheel or dashboard.

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel.

Passengers with adjustable seat-backs should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, uprightposition.

If you cannot get far enough awayfrom the steering wheel and stillreach the controls, we recommendthat you investigate whether sometype of adaptive equipment may help.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that driversallow at least 10 inches (25 cm)between the center of the steeringwheel and the chest. In addition toadjusting the seat, you can adjust thesteering wheel up and down, and inand out (see page ).

Once your seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make surethe seat is locked in position.

See page for how to adjust afront seat (power adjustment) andpage for a manual adjustment.

81

97

98

On vehicles with manual adjustableseats

CONTINUED

Adjust the Seat-Backs3.


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

13

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

09/07/16 17:45:50 31SWA630_018

Adjust the driver’s head restraint sothe center of the back of your headrests against the center of therestraint.

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.

Have passengers adjust their headrestraints properly as well. Tallerpersons should adjust their restraintas high as possible.

See page for how to adjust themanual adjustable seat-back, andpage for the power adjustableseat-back.

See page for how to adjust thehead restraints and how the driver’sand front passenger’s active headrestraints work.

98

97

101

Adjust the Head Restraints4.


14

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position, and sit wellback in the seat.

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

09/07/16 17:46:01 31SWA630_019

This spreads the forces of a crashover the strongest bones in yourupper body.

If the seat belt touches or crossesyour neck, or if it crosses your arminstead of your shoulder, you need toadjust the seat belt anchor height.

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

If necessary, pull up on the belt againto remove any slack, then check thatthe belt rests across the center ofyour chest and over your shoulder.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Check thatthe belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

The seat belt in the center positionof the back seat can be unlatchedand retracted to allow the back seatto be folded up or down. This seatbelt should be latched whenever theseat-back is in an upright position.See page for how to unlatch andrelatch the seat belt.

109

CONTINUED

Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

5.


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

15

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

09/07/16 17:46:11 31SWA630_020

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and head restraints, andput on their seat belts, it is veryimportant that they continue to situpright, well back in their seats, withtheir feet on the floor, until thevehicle is safely parked and theengine is off.

The front seats have adjustable seatbelt anchors. To adjust the height ofan anchor, press and hold the releasebuttons, and slide the anchor up ordown as needed (it has fourpositions).

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsand how to take care of them.

Using a seatbelt that is not working properly canresult in serious injury or death.Have your dealer check the belt assoon as possible.

If a seat belt does not seem to workproperly, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

19

Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

6.Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

No one should sit in a seat with aninoperative seat belt.


16

RELEASE BUTTONS

09/07/16 17:46:21 31SWA630_021

If you are pregnant, the best way toprotect yourself and your unbornchild when driving or riding in avehicle is to always wear a seat belt,and keep the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across the hips.

When driving, remember to situpright and adjust the seat as farback as possible while allowing fullcontrol of the vehicle. When ridingas a front passenger, adjust the seatas far back as possible.

This will reduce the risk of injuriesto both you and your unborn childthat can be caused by a crash or aninflating front airbag.

Each time you have a checkup, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured in a crashby striking interior parts of thevehicle or being struck by aninflating front airbag.

Advice for Pregnant Women


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

17

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

09/07/16 17:46:31 31SWA630_022

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

A passenger who is notwearing a seat belt during a crashor emergency stop can be thrownagainst the inside of the vehicle,against other occupants, or out ofthe vehicle.


Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canreduce the protective capability ofthe belt and increase the chance ofserious injury in a crash.

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp object inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.

If yourhands or arms are close to anairbag cover, they could be injuredif the airbag inflates.

Objects onthe covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’could interfere with the properoperation of the airbags or bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone if the airbags inflate.

If a side airbag or aside curtain airbag inflates, a cupholder or other hard objectattached on or near the door couldbe propelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.

Improperly replacingor covering front seat-back coverscan prevent your side airbags frominflating during a side impact.

Additional Safety PrecautionsNever let passengers ride in thecargo area or on top of a folded-down back seat.

Passengers should not stand up orchange seats while the vehicle ismoving.

Two people should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a door.

Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consultingyour dealer.


18

09/07/16 17:46:41 31SWA630_023

Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all seating positions.The front seat belts are alsoequipped with automatic seat belttensioners.

This system uses the same sensorsas the front airbags to monitorwhether the front seat belts arelatched or unlatched, and how muchweight is on the front passenger’sseat (see pages and ).

If the indicator comes on or thebeeper sounds when the driver’s seatbelt is latched and there is no frontseat passenger and no items on thefront seat, something may beinterfering with the monitoringsystem. Look for and remove:

Any items under the frontpassenger’s seat.

Any object(s) hanging on the seator in the seat-back pocket.

This system monitors the front seatbelts. If you turn the ignition switchto the ON (II) position before yourseat belt is fastened, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flash. Ifyour seat belt is not fastened before

the beeper stops, the indicator willstop flashing but remain on.

If a front passenger does not fastentheir seat belt, the indicator willcome on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

If either the driver or a frontpassenger does not fasten their seatbelt while driving, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals.

When no one is sitting in the frontpassenger’s seat, or a child or smalladult is riding there, the indicatorshould not come on and the beepershould not sound.

The seat belt systemincludes an indicator on the

instrument panel and a beeper toremind you and your passengers tofasten your seat belts. If no obstructions are found, have

your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Any object(s), such as a folded-down back seat, that are touchingthe rear of the seat-back.

28 29

Seat Belt System Components

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

19

09/07/16 17:46:54 31SWA630_024

The lap/shoulder belt goes overyour shoulder, across your chest,and across your hips.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched (see page for how toproperly position the belt).

To unlock the belt, press the redPRESS button on the buckle. Guidethe belt across your body so that itretracts completely. After exiting thevehicle, be sure the belt is out of theway and will not get closed in thedoor.

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to helprestrain your body.

The seat belts in all positions exceptthe driver’s have a lockable retractorthat must be activated to secure achild seat (see page ).

The lap/shoulder belt in the centerseating position on the rear seat isequipped with a detachable seat beltthat has two parts: a small latch plateand an anchor buckle.

The detachable seat belt shouldnormally be latched whenever theseat-backs are in an upright position.For more information about thedetachable seat belt, see page .

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockableretractor will activate. The belt willretract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

To deactivate the lockable retractor,unlatch the buckle and let the seatbelt fully retract. To refasten theseat belt, pull it out only as far asneeded.

15

47

109

Lap/Shoulder Belt


20

DETACHABLE SEAT BELT

09/07/29 20:29:43 31SWA630_025

The tensioners are designed toactivate in any collision severeenough to cause the front airbags todeploy, or if a sensor detects yourvehicle is about to roll over (see page

).

The tensioners can also be activatedduring a collision in which the frontairbags . In this case, theairbags would not be needed, but theextra tension in the seat belt couldbe helpful.

When the tensioners are activated,the seat belts will remain tight untilthey are unbuckled.

For added protection, the front seatbelts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in position.

31

do not deploy

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

21

Using the seat belt with thedetachable anchor unlatchedincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Before using the seat belt,make sure the detachableanchor is correctly latched.

09/07/16 17:47:14 31SWA630_026

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by your dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.

The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed. If the automatic seatbelt tensioners activate during acrash, they must be replaced.

For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

Pull each belt out fully, and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthe belts retract easily. If a belt doesnot retract easily, cleaning the beltmay correct the problem (see page

). Any belt that is not in goodcondition or working properly willnot provide good protection andshould be replaced as soon aspossible.

Honda provides a limited warrantyon seat belts. See your

booklet fordetails.

365

HondaWarranty Information

Seat Belt Maintenance


22

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

09/07/16 17:47:23 31SWA630_027

CONTINUED

Airbag System Components

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

23

(1)(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(5)

(4)

(12)(8)

(11)(10)

(7)

(13)

(9)

(1) Driver’s Front Airbag(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag(3) Control Unit/Rollover Sensor(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners(5) Side Airbags(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors(8) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator(9) Side Impact Sensors (First)(10) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors(11) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensor Unit/OPDS Sensors Control Unit(12) SRS Indicator(13) Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners

09/07/16 17:47:30 31SWA630_028

Your airbag system includes:

Two SRS (supplemental restraintsystem) front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger’s airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side airbags, one for thedriver and one for a frontpassenger. The airbags are storedin the outer edges of the seat-backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDEAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side curtain airbags, one foreach side of the vehicle. Theairbags are stored in the ceiling,above the side windows. The frontand rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDECURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page

).

26

29

31


24

(14) (16)

(15)

(14) Front Crash Sensors(15) Side Impact Sensor (Second)(16) Side Curtain Airbags

09/07/16 17:47:38 31SWA630_029

Automatic front seat belttensioners (see page ).

A rollover sensor that can detect ifyour vehicle is about to roll overand signal the control unit todeploy both side curtain airbagsand front seat belt tensioners (seepage ).

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you that thepassenger’s side airbag has beenturned off (see page ).

An indicator on the dashboard thatalerts you that the passenger’sfront airbag has been turned off(see page ).

Emergency backup power in caseyour vehicle’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe front impact,side impact, or if your vehicle isabout to rollover.

Weight sensors that monitor theweight on the front passenger’sseat. If the weight is about 65 lbs(29 kg) or less (the weight of aninfant or small child), the

passenger’s front airbag will beturned off (see page ).

A driver’s seat position sensor thatmonitors the distance of the seatfrom the front airbag. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force (see page

).

Sensors that can detect whether achild is in the passenger’s sideairbag path and signal the controlunit to turn the airbag off (seepage ).

Sensors that can detect whetherthe driver’s seat belt and the frontpassenger’s seat belt are latchedor unlatched (see page ).

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, the seat belttensioners, and driver and frontpassenger seat belt use when theignition switch is in the ON (II)position.

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you to a possibleproblem with your airbags,sensors, or seat belt tensioners(see page ).

21

30

28

28

19

32

31

32

33


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

25

09/07/16 17:47:51 31SWA630_030

During a frontal crash, your seat beltrestrains your lower body and torso,and the front airbag helps protectyour head and chest.

Although both airbags normallyinflate within split second of eachother, it is possible for only oneairbag to deploy.

This can happen if the severity of acollision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, sensors willdetect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration.

If the rate of deceleration is highenough, the control unit will inflatethe driver’s and front passenger’sairbags, at the time and with theforce needed.

Only the driver’s airbag can deploy ifthere is no passenger in the frontseat, or if the advanced airbagsystem has turned the passenger’sairbag off (see page ).

After inflating, the front airbagsimmediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

28

How Your Front Airbags Work


26

09/07/16 17:48:01 31SWA630_031

Your front airbags are also dual-threshold airbags. Airbags with thisfeature have two deploymentthresholds that depend on whethersensors detect the occupant iswearing a seat belt or not.

If the occupant’s belt is ,the airbag will deploy at a slightlylower threshold, because theoccupant would need extraprotection.

If the occupant’s belt is , theairbag will inflate at a slightly higherthreshold, when the airbag would beneeded to supplement the protectionprovided by the seat belt.

Your front airbags are dual-stageairbags. This means they have twoinflation stages that can be ignitedsequentially or simultaneously,depending on crash severity.

In a crash, both stageswill ignite simultaneously to providethe quickest and greatest protection.

In a crash, one stage willignite first, then the second stagewill ignite a split second later. Thisprovides longer airbag inflation timewith a little less force.

The total time for inflation anddeflation is one-tenth of a second, sofast that most occupants are notaware that the airbags deployed untilthey see them lying in their laps.

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso.

CONTINUED

Dual-Threshold Airbags

not latched

latched

Dual-Stage Airbags

more severe

less severe


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

27

09/07/16 17:48:12 31SWA630_032

Your front airbags are also advancedairbags. The main purpose of thisfeature is to help prevent airbag-caused injuries to short drivers andchildren or small-statured adults whoride in front.

The driver’s advanced front airbagsystem includes a seat positionsensor under the seat. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force, regardless ofthe severity of the impact.

If there is a problem with the sensor,the SRS indicator will come on, andthe airbag will inflate in the normalmanner regardless of the driver’sseating position.

The passenger’s advanced frontairbag system has weight sensorsunder the seat. Although Hondadoes not encourage carrying aninfant or small child in front, if thesensors detect the weight of aninfant or small child (up to about 65lbs or 29 kg), the system willautomatically turn the passenger’sfront airbag off.

Do not spill any liquids on orunder the seats, cover the sensors,or put any objects or metal itemsunder the front seats.

Occupants must sit upright andwear their seat belts properly.

For both advanced airbags to workproperly:

Failure to follow these instructionscould damage the sensors or preventthem from working properly.

Advanced Airbags


28

DRIVER’SSEATPOSITIONSENSOR

PASSENGER’SSEAT WEIGHTSENSORS

09/07/16 17:48:23 31SWA630_033

Moving the front seat forciblyback against cargo on the seat orfloor behind it.

Hanging heavy items on the frontpassenger seat, or placing heavyitems in the seat-back pocket.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere side impact, sensors willdetect rapid acceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver’s or the passenger’sside airbag and activate the seat belttensioner on the affected side.

When the passenger airbag getsturned off by the weight sensors, a‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator inthe center of the dashboard comeson (see page ).

Be aware that objects placed on thepassenger’s seat can also cause theairbag to be turned off.

Moving the front seat or seat-backforcibly back against the foldedrear seat.

Back seat passengers should notwedge objects or intentionallyforce their feet under the frontpassenger seat.

A rear passenger pushing orpulling on the back of the frontpassenger’s seat.

To ensure that the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system willwork properly,

This includes:

If the weight sensors detect there isno passenger in the front seat, theairbag is automatically turned off.However, the passenger airbag offindicator in this situation will notcome on.

33

CONTINUED

How Your Side Airbags Work


do not do anythingthat would increase or decrease theweight on the front passenger’s seat.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

29

09/07/16 17:48:34 31SWA630_034

There will be some delay betweenthe moment the passenger movesinto or out of the airbag deploymentpath and when the indicator comeson or goes off.

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or another object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

If the side airbag off indicator comeson (see page ), have thepassenger sit upright. Once thepassenger is out of the airbag’sdeployment path, the system willturn the airbag back on, and theindicator will go out.

Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoffsystem designed primarily to protecta child riding in the front passenger’sseat.

Although Honda does not encouragechildren to ride in front, if theposition sensors detect a child hasleaned into the side airbag’sdeployment path, the airbag will shutoff.

The side airbag may also shut off if ashort adult leans sideways, or alarger adult slouches and leanssideways into the airbag’sdeployment path.

Objects placed on the frontpassenger seat can also cause theside airbag to be shut off.

32Side Airbag Cutoff System


30

09/07/16 17:48:44 31SWA630_035

If the impact is on the passenger’sside, the passenger’s side curtainairbag will inflate even if there are nooccupants on that side of the vehicle.

To get the best protection from theside curtain airbags, occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

If the rollover sensor detects yourvehicle is about to roll over, it signalsthe control unit, which immediatelydeploys both side curtain airbags andactivates both front seat belttensioners.

The airbag on the passenger’s sidewill deploy, and the seat belttensioner will activate, even if thereare no passengers on that side of thevehicle.

In a moderate to severe side impact,sensors will detect rapid accelerationand signal the control unit toinstantly inflate the side curtainairbag.

How Your Side Curtain AirbagsWork

In a Side Impact

In a Rollover


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

31

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

09/07/29 20:29:52 31SWA630_036

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, this indicatorcomes on briefly then goes off. Thistells you the system is workingproperly.

If the indicator comes on orflashes on and off while you drive.

If the indicator stays on after theengine starts.

If the SRS indicator does not comeon after you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

If the indicator comes on at anyother time, or does not come on at all,you should have the system checkedby your dealer. For example:

If you see any of these indications,the airbags and seat belt tensionersmay not work properly when youneed them.

The SRS indicator alerts you to apotential problem with your airbagsor seat belt tensioners.

This indicator alerts you that thepassenger’s side airbag has beenautomatically shut off. It doesmean there is a problem with yourside airbags.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the indicatorshould come on briefly and then gooff (see page ). If it doesn’t comeon, stays on, or comes on whiledriving without a passenger in thefront seat, have the system checked.

63

How the SRS IndicatorWorks

How the SideAirbag OffIndicator Works

not


32

U.S. Canada

Ignoring the SRS indicator canresult in serious injury or deathif the airbag systems ortensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS indicator alerts you toa possible problem.

09/07/16 17:49:09 31SWA630_037

This indicator alerts you that thepassenger’s front airbag has beenshut off because weight sensorsdetect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less(the weight of an infant or smallchild) on the front passenger’s seat.It does there is a problemwith the airbag.

Be aware that objects placed on thefront seat can cause the indicator tocome on.

If no weight is detected on the frontseat, the airbag will be automaticallyshut off. However, the indicator willnot come on.

The passenger airbag off indicatormay come on and off repeatedly ifthe total weight on the seat is nearthe airbag cutoff threshold.

If the indicator comes on with nofront seat passenger and no objectson the seat, or with an adult ridingthere, something may be interferingwith the weight sensors. Look forand remove:

Any items under the frontpassenger’s seat.

Any object(s), such as a folded-down back seat, that are touchingthe rear of the seat-back.

If no obstructions are found, haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer assoon as possible.

If an adult or teenage passenger isriding in front, move the seat as farto the rear as possible, and have thepassenger sit upright and wear theseat belt properly.

Any object(s) hanging on the seator in the seat-back pocket.

How the Passenger Airbag OffIndicator Works

not mean


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

33

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

CanadaU.S.

09/07/16 17:49:22 31SWA630_038

If water oranother liquid soaks into a seat-back, it can prevent the side airbagcutoff system from workingproperly.

Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Even if yourairbags do not inflate, your dealershould inspect the driver’s seatposition sensor, the frontpassenger’s weight sensors, thefront seat belt tensioners, and allseat belts and their anchors wornduring a crash to make sure theyare operating properly.

Your airbag systems are virtuallymaintenance free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have yourvehicle serviced if:

Any airbagthat has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit and other related parts. Anyseat belt tensioner that activatesmust also be replaced.

Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by an authorized dealer ora knowledgeable body shop.

Take your vehicle to anauthorized dealer as soon aspossible. If you ignore thisindication, your airbags may notoperate properly.

This could make thedriver’s seat position sensor or thefront passenger’s weight sensorsineffective. If it is necessary toremove or modify a front seat toaccommodate a person withdisabilities, first contact HondaAutomobile Customer Service at(800) 999-1009.

Do not expose the front passenger’sseat-back to liquid.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.

Do not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

If your vehicle has a moderate tosevere impact.

An airbag ever inflates.

The SRS indicator alerts you to aproblem.

Do not remove or modify a frontseat without consulting yourdealer.

Additional Safety Precautions

Airbag Service


34

09/07/16 17:49:33 31SWA630_039

－－

－

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many adults do not knowhow to protect childpassengers.

If you have children, or ever need todrive with a child in your vehicle, besure to read this section. It beginswith important general guidelines,then presents special information forinfants, small children, and largerchildren.

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state,Canadian province and territoryrequires that infants and children beproperly restrained when they ride ina vehicle.

(see pages ).(see pages ).

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof the death of children aged 12 andunder.

40 5051 54

properly

All Children Must Be Restrained

Infants and small children must berestrained in an approved child seatthat is properly secured to thevehicle

Larger children must be restrainedwith a lap/shoulder belt and ride ona booster seat until the seat belt f itsthem properly

Protecting Children General Guidelines

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

35

Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt anduse a booster seat if necessary.

09/07/16 17:49:43 31SWA630_040

－

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.

Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseat, on a booster seat if needed, andbe properly restrained with a seatbelt (see page for importantinformation about protecting largerchildren).

Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do this,the passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge, and it can inflate with enoughforce to cause very serious injuries.

Even though your vehicle has anadvanced front airbag system thatautomatically turns the passenger’sfront airbag off under certaincircumstances (see page ), pleasefollow these guidelines:

Children who ride in back are lesslikely to be injured by strikinginterior vehicle parts during acollision or hard braking. Also,children cannot be injured by aninflating front airbag when they ridein the back.

According to statistics, children of allages and sizes are safer when theyare restrained in a back seat.The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenaged 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat. Somestates have laws restricting wherechildren may ride.

Ifthe airbag inflates, it can hit the backof the child seat with enough forceto kill or very seriously injure aninfant.

33

51

All Children Should Sit in a BackSeat

The Passenger’s Front AirbagCan Pose Serious Risks

Small ChildrenPlacing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

Larger ChildrenChildren who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger’sfront airbag.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag.

Infants


36

09/07/16 17:49:55 31SWA630_041

－

To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin a back seat, your vehicle haswarning labels on the dashboard(U.S. models) and on the front visors.Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

U.S. Models

Canadian Models


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

37

DASHBOARD

SUN VISORS

SUN VISORS

09/07/16 17:50:12 31SWA630_042

－

Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or a small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.


Your vehicle has a back seat wherechildren can be properly restrained.If you ever have to carry a group ofchildren, and a child must ride infront:

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards in afrontal collision, and paying closeattention to a child distracts thedriver from the important tasks ofdriving, placing both of you at risk.

If a child requires close physicalattention or frequent visual contact,we strongly recommend that anotheradult ride with the child in a backseat. The back seat is far safer for achild than the front.

If you are not wearing aseat belt in a crash, you could bethrown forward and crush thechild against the dashboard or aseat-back. If you are wearing aseat belt, the child can be tornfrom your arms and be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear the lap/shoulderbelt properly (see page ).

During a crash, thebelt could press deep into the childand cause serious or fatal injuries.

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see pages

and ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

51

9897

15

16

If a Child Requires CloseAttention

Additional Safety PrecautionsIf You Must Drive with SeveralChildren

Never let two children use thesame seat belt.

Never hold an infant or child onyour lap.

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand a child.


38

09/07/16 17:50:26 31SWA630_043

－

Children who play in vehicles canaccidentally get trapped inside.Teach your children not to play inor around vehicles.

Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignitionswitch, and open the tailgate,which can lead to accidental injuryor death.

If a child wraps a looseseat belt around their neck, theycan be seriously or fatally injured.(See pages and for how toactivate and deactivate thelockable retractor.)

This can preventchildren from accidentally fallingout (see page ).

Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates, Canadian provinces andterritories, and can be veryhazardous.

For example, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Achild left alone with the key in theignition switch can accidentally setthe vehicle in motion, possiblyinjuring themselves or others.

47 48

91

Lock all doors and the tailgatewhen your vehicle is not in use.

Keep vehicle keys/remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren.

Make sure any unused seat beltthat a child can reach is buckled,the lockable retractor is activated,and the belt is fully retracted andlocked.

Use the childproof door locks toprevent children from opening therear doors.

Do not leave children alone in avehicle.


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

39

09/07/16 17:50:35 31SWA630_044

Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby’s head,neck, and back.

An infant must be properlyrestrained in a rear-facing, recliningchild seat until the child reaches theseat maker’s weight or height limitfor the seat, and the child is at leastone year old.

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

A rear-facing child seat can be placedin any seating position in the backseat, but not in the front.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates, it can hit the back of thechild seat with enough force to kill orseriously injure an infant.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front passenger frommoving their seat as far back asrecommended, or from locking theirseat-back in the desired position.

It could also interfere with properoperation of the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system.

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position.

Child Seat Type

Rear-facing Child Seat Placement

Never put arear-facing child seat in the frontseat.

Protecting Infants

Protecting Infants and Small Children

40

09/07/16 17:50:47 31SWA630_045

In any of these situations, westrongly recommend that you installthe child seat directly behind thefront passenger’s seat, move the seatas far forward as needed, and leave itunoccupied. Or, you may wish to geta smaller rear-facing child seat.

Many states, Canadian provinces andterritories allow a child one year ofage or older who also meets theminimum size and weightrequirements to transition from arear-facing child seat to a forwardfacing seat. Know the requirementswhere you are driving and follow thechild seat instructions. Many expertsrecommend use of a rear-facing seatup to age two, if the child’s height

and weight are appropriate for arear-facing seat.

If the vehicle seat is toofar forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating airbag can strike the childwith enough force to cause veryserious or fatal injuries.

We strongly recommend placing aforward-facing child seat in a backseat, not the front.

We also recommend that a smallchild use the child seat until the childreaches the weight or height limitfor the seat.

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

CONTINUED

Protecting Small Children

Child Seat Type

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s airbag can behazardous.

Child Seat Placement

Protecting Infants and Small Children

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

41

Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death during acrash.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

09/07/16 17:50:58 31SWA630_046

In seating positions and vehicles notequipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installedusing a seat belt.

Whatever type of seat you choose, toprovide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

Look for FMVSS 213 or CMVSS213 on the box.

Since LATCH-compatible child seatsare easier to install and reduce thepossibility of improper installation,we recommend selecting this style.

When buying a child seat, you needto choose either a conventional childseat, or one designed for use withthe Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren (LATCH) system.

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, and be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the vehicle and thechild is properly strapped in the seat.

Even with advanced front airbagsthat automatically turn thepassenger’s front airbag off (seepage ), a back seat is the safestplace for a small child.

Conventional child seats must besecured to a vehicle with a seat belt,whereas LATCH-compatible seatsare secured by attaching the seat tohardware built into each rear seatingposition in the back seat.

Rear-facing for infants, forward-facing for small children.

33

The child seat should meetFederal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213 or Canadian MotorVehicle Safety Standard 213.

The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

1.

2.

Selecting a Child Seat

Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat

42

Placing a forward-facing childseat in the front seat can resultin serious injury or death if thefront airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible, and properly restrainthe child.

09/07/16 17:51:10 31SWA630_047

After selecting a proper child seatand a good place to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

A child seat secured with a seat beltshould be installed as firmly aspossible. However, it does not needto be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side

movement can be expected andshould not reduce the child seat’seffectiveness.

If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly secured.

Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be seriously injured in a crash.

The following pages provideguidelines on how to properly installa child seat. A forward-facing childseat is used in all examples, but theinstructions are the same for rear-facing child seats.

All child seats must besecured to the vehicle with the lappart of a lap/shoulder belt or withthe LATCH (Lower Anchors andTethers for CHildren) system. Achild whose seat is not properlysecured to the vehicle can beendangered in a crash.

Before purchasing a conventionalchild seat, or using a previouslypurchased one, we recommend thatyou test the seat in the specificvehicle seating position or positionswhere the seat will be used.

Installing a Child Seat

Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.

Secure the child in the child seat.

Properly secure the child seat tothe vehicle.

The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

3.

1.

2.

3.

Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

43

09/07/16 17:51:20 31SWA630_048

Your vehicle is equipped withLATCH (Lower Anchors andTethers for CHildren) at the rearseats to secure a child seat in anyseating position: one in each outerseating position, or one in the center.

The five lower anchors are locatedbetween the seat-back and seatbottom, and are to be used only witha child seat designed for use withLATCH.

The location of each lower anchor isindicated by a small button above theanchor point.

When you install a child seat in therear center seating position, use thecenter lower anchors as shown in theillustration. To install a child seat ineither outer seating position, use theouter lower anchors. You can installup to two child seats at a time usingthe outer lower anchors.

Do not attach two child seatconnectors to a single lower anchorat a time.

Make sure there are no objectsnear the anchors that couldprevent a secure connectionbetween the child seat and theanchors.

Store the seat belt buckle ortongue in the storage pockets.

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat in either of the rear outer seats:

1.

2.

Installing a Child Seat withLATCH

Using the Outer LATCH


44

LOWER ANCHORS FOR OUTER LATCH

BUTTONLOWER ANCHORS FORCENTER LATCH

OUTER LOWER ANCHORS

09/07/29 20:30:05 31SWA630_049

Place the child seat on the vehicleseat, then attach the seat to thelower anchors according to thechild seat maker’s instructions.

Some LATCH-compatible seats havea rigid-type connector as shownabove.

Whatever type you have, followthe child seat maker’s instructionsfor adjusting or tightening the fit.

Remove the dual deck cargo shelf(see page ).

Other LATCH-compatible seats havea flexible-type connector as shownabove.

Route the tether strap over theseat-back and through the legs ofthe head restraint, then attach thetether strap hook to the anchor,making sure the tether strap is nottwisted.

5.

4.

3. 6.

117CONTINUED

If equipped


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

45

Flexible typeRigid type

TETHERANCHOR

TETHER STRAP HOOK

09/07/29 20:30:17 31SWA630_050

Follow step 1 through 5 asdescribed previously to secure thechild seat.

Pull down the cover to access thetether anchor.

Route the tether strap over theseat-back, then attach the tetherstrap hook to the tether anchor inthe ceiling, making sure the strapis not twisted. Tighten the strapaccording to the seat maker’sinstructions.

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat in the rear center seatingposition, use the center loweranchors as shown above.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

Tighten the strap according to theseat maker’s instructions.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

Reinstall the dual deck cargo shelf.

1.

2.

3.

4.

8.

9.

7. Using the Center LATCH


46

TETHER STRAP HOOK

TETHER ANCHOR

CENTER LOWER ANCHORS COVER

TETHER ANCHOR

09/07/29 20:30:28 31SWA630_051

When not using the LATCH system,all child seats must be secured to thevehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.

With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker’s instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle and remove any slack fromthe lap portion of the belt.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor.

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked, andyou will need to repeat these steps.

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts inall seating positions except thedriver’s have a lockable retractorthat must be activated to secure achild seat.

If you intend to install a child seat inthe center seating position of therear seat, make sure the detachableseat belt anchor is securely latched(see page ).

2.1.

3.

109

CONTINUED

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Belt


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

47

09/07/16 17:52:10 31SWA630_052

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle, and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

To deactivate the lockable retractorand remove a child seat, unlatch thebuckle, unroute the seat belt, and letthe belt fully retract.

To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat whilepulling up on the belt.

4. 5.


48

09/07/16 17:52:17 31SWA630_053

A child seat with a tether can beinstalled in any seating position inthe back seat.

Each rear outside seating positionhas an anchorage point on the seat-back, and the center seating positionhas an anchorage point in the ceilingnear the tailgate.

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity to the lap/shoulder beltinstallation, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable.

Attach the tether strap hook to theanchor, making sure the tetherstrap is not twisted.


Reinstall the dual deck cargo shelf.

On vehicles with the dual deckcargo shelf, remove it (see page

).

After properly securing the childseat with the lap/shoulder belt(see page ), route the tetherstrap over the top of the seat-backand through the legs of the headrestraint.

1. 3.

2. 4.

5.

117

47

CONTINUED

Installing a Child Seat with aTether

Using an Outer Anchor


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

49

TETHER STRAP HOOK

ANCHORANCHOR

09/07/29 20:30:42 31SWA630_054

Route the tether strap over theseat-back, then attach the tetherstrap hook to the anchor, makingsure the tether strap is not twisted.


After properly securing the childseat (see page ), open theanchor cover.

Remove the rear center headrestraint, and store it in the cargoarea.

1.

2.

3.

4.47

Using the Center Anchor


50

TETHER STRAP HOOKCOVER

ANCHOR ANCHOR

09/07/29 20:30:51 31SWA630_055

When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in a back seat on abooster seat and wear the lap/shoulder belt.

The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in front.

To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt, then askyourself:

Does the child sit all the way backagainst the seat?

Do the child’s knees bendcomfortably over the edge of theseat?

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Checking Seat Belt Fit

Protecting Larger Children

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

51

Allowing a child age 12 or underto sit in front can result in injuryor death if the passenger’s frontairbag inflates.

If a child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat as farback as possible, use a boosterseat if needed, have the childsit up properly and wear theseat belt properly.

09/07/16 17:52:49 31SWA630_056

Does the shoulder belt crossbetween the child’s neck and arm?

Is the lap part of the belt as low aspossible, touching the child’sthighs?

Will the child be able to stayseated like this for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all thesequestions, the child is ready to wearthe lap/shoulder belt correctly. Ifyou answer no to any question, thechild needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-

facing child seat should ride in aback seat and use a booster seatuntil the lap/shoulder belt fits themproperly without the booster.

Booster seats can be high-back orlow-back. Whichever style you select,make sure the booster seat meetsfederal safety standards (see page

) and that you follow the boosterseat maker’s instructions.

If a child who uses a booster seatmust ride in front, move the vehicleseat as far back as possible and besure the child is wearing the seatbelt properly.

Some states, Canadian provinces andterritories also require children touse a booster seat until they reach agiven age or weight (e.g., 6 years or60 lbs). Be sure to check currentlaws in the states, provinces orterritories where you intend to drive.

3.

4.

5.

42

Using a Booster Seat


52

09/07/16 17:52:59 31SWA630_057

A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of their ears areeven with the top of the vehicle’s orbooster’s seat-back. A child of thisheight should be tall enough to usethe lap/shoulder belt without abooster seat.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenaged 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates in a moderate to severefrontal collision, the airbag can causeserious injuries to a child who isunrestrained, improperly restrained,sitting too close to the airbag, or outof position.

A side airbag also poses risks. If anypart of a larger child’s body is in thepath of a deploying side airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in front,there are other important factors youshould consider.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit (see pages and ). Ifthe seat belt does not fit properly,with or without the child sitting on abooster seat, the child should not sitin front.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly, and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.

If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manual,and make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly and securely positioned.

Supervise the child. Even a maturechild sometimes needs to bereminded to fasten the seat belt orsit properly.

15 51

When Can a Larger Child Sit inFront

Physical Size

Maturity


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

53

09/07/16 17:53:14 31SWA630_058

This could resultin serious neck injuries during acrash.

This couldcause very serious injuries duringa crash. It also increases thechance that the child will slideunder the belt in a crash and beinjured.


Devices intended toimprove a child’s comfort orreposition the shoulder part of aseat belt can make the belt lesseffective and increase the chanceof serious injury in a crash.

Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not let a child wear a seat beltacross the neck.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the backor under the arm.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on aseat belt.


54

09/07/16 17:53:21 31SWA630_059

Your vehicle’s exhaust containscarbon monoxide gas. Carbonmonoxide should not enter thevehicle in normal driving if youmaintain your vehicle properly andfollow the information on this page.

Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

The vehicle is raised for an oilchange.

You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.

The vehicle was in a crash thatmay have damaged the underside.

With the tailgate open, airflow canpull exhaust gas into your vehicle’sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thetailgate open, open all the windowsand set the heating and coolingsystem as shown below.

If you must sit in your parked vehiclewith the engine running, even in anunconfined area, adjust the heatingand cooling system as follows:

Select the fresh air mode.Select the mode.Turn the fan on high speed.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

1.2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

55

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

09/07/16 17:53:32 31SWA630_060

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury or death. Read these labelscarefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hardto read (except for the U.S.dashboard label which may beremoved by the owner), contact yourdealer for a replacement.

U.S. models only

U.S. models Canadian models

U.S. models only

Safety Labels

56

SUN VISOR

DASHBOARD

RADIATOR CAP

SUN VISOR

09/07/16 17:53:52 31SWA630_061

＊

＊

Symbols on labelsattached to your vehicle are toremind you to read this owner’smanual for proper and safeoperation of your vehicle.

Canadian modelsU.S. models U.S. models

Canadian models

Safety Labels

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

57

DOORJAMBS DUAL DECK CARGO SHELF

09/07/16 17:54:10 31SWA630_062

58

09/07/16 17:54:12 31SWA630_063

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour vehicle. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 60............................Instrument Panel . 61

..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 62.............................................Gauges . 68

....................Information Display . 69...................................Trip Meter . 69

................Instant Fuel Economy . 70..............Average Fuel Economy . 70

...........................................Range . 70.....................................Odometer . 71

..................................Fuel Gauge . 71...................Temperature Gauge . 71

Outside Temperature..................................Indicator . 71

..........Check Fuel Cap Message . 73..................Maintenance Minder . 73

Controls Near the Steering...........................................Wheel . 74

.Windshield Wipers and Washers . 75.........Turn Signals and Headlights . 76........Instrument Panel Brightness . 79

.................Hazard Warning Button . 79

.................Rear Window Defogger . 80.................................Parking Brake . 81

..........Steering Wheel Adjustment . 81...............................Keys and Locks . 82

........................Immobilizer System . 83................................Ignition Switch . 84

......................................Door Locks . 85......................Power Door Locks . 85

.Auto Door Locking/Unlocking . 86..............Childproof Door Locks . 91

.......................Remote Transmitter . 92............................................Tailgate . 95

.................................................Seats . 97..................................Seat Heaters . 111

............................Power Windows . 112.......................................Moonroof . 113

...........................................Mirrors . 114.........Interior Convenience Items . 116

............Dual Deck Cargo Shelf . 117.....................Beverage Holders . 119

.............................Center Table . 120......................Lower Glove Box . 120......................Upper Glove Box . 121

............................Vanity Mirror . 121...................................Sun Visor . 122

....................Sunglasses Holder . 122................Conversation Mirror . 123

........Accessory Power Sockets . 123.............Console Compartment . 124

..................................Coat Hook . 125.......................Seat Under Tray . 125

...............................Interior Lights . 126

Instruments and Controls

Instruments

andC

ontrols

59

09/07/16 17:54:17 31SWA630_064

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊ If equipped:

Control Locations

60

MIRROR CONTROLS

GAUGES

INSTRUMENT PANELINDICATORS

MOONROOF SWITCH

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS

POWER DOOR LOCKMASTER SWITCH

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

FUEL FILL DOORRELEASE HANDLE

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

PARKING BRAKE PEDAL

(P.61)(P.68)

(P.113)

(P.123)

(P.81)

(P.297)

(P.295)

(P.112)

(P.85)

(P.111)

SEAT HEATERSWITCHES

(P.135)

CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

(P.130)

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLS

(P.315)

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION

(P.237, 245)USB ADAPTER CABLE

(P.259)CLOCK(P.145, 157, 194)AUDIO SYSTEM


(P.33)


(P.79)

EX-L without navigation system is shown.

(P.115)

09/07/16 17:54:28 31SWA630_065

＊

＊

＊ The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.:

Instrument Panel

Instruments

andC

ontrols

61

IMMOBILIZERSYSTEMINDICATOR

TPMSINDICATOR

SUPPLEMENTALRESTRAINTSYSTEMINDICATOR

LOW TIREPRESSUREINDICATOR

PARKING BRAKEAND BRAKESYSTEMINDICATOR

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEMINDICATOR

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTSINDICATOR

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST(VSA) SYSTEM INDICATOR

SECURITYSYSTEMINDICATOR

SIDE AIRBAGOFF INDICATOR

MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR

CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR

LIGHTS ON INDICATOR

MALFUNCTIONINDICATOR LAMP

HIGH BEAMINDICATOR

LOW FUELINDICATOR

LOW OILPRESSUREINDICATOR

CHARGINGSYSTEMINDICATOR

SEAT BELTREMINDERINDICATOR

CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR

DOOR ANDTAILGATEOPENINDICATOR

VSA OFF INDICATOR

(P.67)

(P.64)

(P.64)

(P.66)

(P.62, 395)

(P.65)

(P.65)

(P.62, 394)

(P.62, 394)

(P.62, 396)(P.67, 264)

(P.65)(P.63)

(P.66)

(P.66)

(P.63)

(P.62)

(P.64)

(P.63)

(P.65)

(P.64)

(P.63)

09/07/16 17:54:39 31SWA630_066

The instrument panel has manyindicators that give you importantinformation about your vehicle.

See page .

If this indicator comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For more information,see page .

The engine can be severely damagedif this indicator flashes or stays onwhen the engine is running. Formore information, see page .

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. It reminds you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.A beeper also sounds if you have notfastened your seat belt.

If you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position before fasteningyour seat belt, the beeper sounds,and the indicator flashes. If you donot fasten your seat belt before thebeeper stops, the indicator stopsflashing but remains on.

If your front passenger does notfasten their seat belt, the indicatorcomes on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

This indicator has two functions:

It comes on when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. It is a reminder to checkthe parking brake. A beepersounds if you drive with theparking brake not fully released.Driving with the parking brake notfully released can damage thebrakes and tires.

If it stays on after you have fullyreleased the parking brake whilethe engine is running, or if itcomes on while driving, therecould be a problem with the brakesystem. For more information, seepage .

2.

1.395

394

394396

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Charging SystemIndicator

Seat Belt ReminderIndicator

Parking Brake andBrake SystemIndicator

Instrument Panel Indicators

62

U.S. Canada

09/07/16 17:54:54 31SWA630_067

If either of you do not fasten yourseat belt while driving, the beeperwill sound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. If it comes on atany other time, it indicates apotential problem with your frontairbags. This indicator will also alertyou to a potential problem with yourside airbags, passenger’s side airbagcutoff system, side curtain airbags,automatic seat belt tensioners,driver’s seat position sensor, or thefront passenger’s weight sensors.For more information, see page .

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position, and when the ignitionswitch is turned to the START (III)position. If it comes on at any othertime, there is a problem in the ABS.If this happens, have your vehiclechecked by your dealer. With theindicator on, your vehicle still hasnormal braking ability but no anti-lock. For more information, see page

.

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. If it comes on atany other time, it indicates that thepassenger’s side airbag hasautomatically shut off. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. It will then go off ifyou have inserted a properly codedignition key. If it is not a properlycoded key, the indicator will blink,and the engine’s fuel system will bedisabled (see page ).

19

32

32

83

322


Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator

Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) Indicator

Immobilizer SystemIndicator

Side Airbag OffIndicator

Instruments

andC

ontrols

63

CanadaU.S.

09/07/16 17:55:08 31SWA630_068

This indicator comes on when youset the cruise control. See page

for information on operating thecruise control.

This indicator comes on when youturn on the cruise control system bypressing the CRUISE button (seepage ).

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position, and when the ignitionswitch is turned to the START (III)position.It flashes when VSA is active (seepage ).

It comes on as a reminder that youhave turned off the vehicle stabilityassist (VSA) system.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position, and when the ignitionswitch is turned to the START (III)position. For more information, seepage .

If it comes on and stays on at anyother time, or if it does not come onwhen you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, there is aproblem with the VSA system. Takeyour vehicle to a dealer to have itchecked. Without VSA, your vehiclestill has normal driving ability, butwill not have VSA traction andstability enhancement. See page

for more information on theVSA system.

324

324

266

266

324

Vehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

Cruise Control Indicator

Cruise Main Indicator

VSA Off Indicator


64

09/07/16 17:55:21 31SWA630_069

This indicator comes on with thehigh beam headlights. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator comes on as areminder that you must refuel soon.

This indicator also comes on withreduced brightness when thedaytime running lights (DRL) are on(see page ).

If this indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position and release the parkingbrake, it means there is a problemwith the DRL. There may also be aproblem with the high beamheadlights. Have your vehiclechecked by your dealer.

When you press the hazard warningbutton, both turn signal indicatorsand all turn signals on the outside ofthe vehicle flash.

When the indicator comes on, thereare about 2.3 U.S. gal (8.6 ) of fuelremaining in the tank.

When the needle reaches E, there isa very small amount of fuel in thetank.

The appropriate indicator comes onin this display if the tailgate or anydoor is not closed tightly.

The left or right turn signal indicatorblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If an indicator does not blinkor blinks rapidly, it usually meansone of the turn signal bulbs isburned out (see pages and ).Replace the bulb as soon as possible,since other drivers cannot see thatyou are signaling.

77

78361 363

High Beam Indicator Low Fuel Indicator

Daytime Running LightsIndicator

Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators

Door and Tailgate Open Indicator


Instruments

andC

ontrols

65

09/07/16 17:55:36 31SWA630_070

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it comes on while driving,it indicates that one or more of yourvehicle’s tires are significantly lowon pressure.

If this happens, pull to the side of theroad when it is safe, check which tirehas lost the pressure, and determinethe cause. If it is because of a flat tire,replace the flat tire with the compactspare (see page ), and have theflat tire repaired as soon as possible.If two or more tires are underinflated,call a professional towing service(see page ). For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

This indicator reminds you that theexterior lights are on. It comes onwhen the light switch is in either the

or position. If you turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or LOCK (0) position withoutturning off the light switch, thisindicator will stay on. A reminderchime will also sound when you openthe driver’s door.

If this indicator comes on and stayson at any other time, or if it does notcome on when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position, thereis a problem with the TPMS. Withthis indicator on, the low tirepressure indicator will not come onwhen a tire loses pressure. Take thevehicle to your dealer to have thesystem checked.

382

403326

Low Tire PressureIndicator

Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) Indicator

Lights On Indicator


66

09/07/16 17:55:47 31SWA630_071

If equippedCanadian models onlyThis indicator comes on when thesecurity system is set. See page

for more information on thesecurity system.

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. Itreminds you that it is time to takeyour vehicle in for scheduledmaintenance. The maintenance mainitems and sub items will be displayedin the information display. See page

for more information on themaintenance minder.

This indicator goes off when yourdealer resets it after completing therequired maintenance service. This indicator comes on when the

washer fluid level is low. Add washerfluid when you see this indicator(see page ).

341

354264

Security System IndicatorMaintenance MinderIndicator

Washer Level Indicator


Instruments

andC

ontrols

67

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

WASHER LEVEL INDICATOR

09/07/16 17:56:00 31SWA630_072

Gauges

68

SELECT/RESET KNOB

TACHOMETER

OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE INDICATOR

INFORMATION DISPLAY

SPEEDOMETER

TRIP METER

TEMPERATURE GAUGEFUEL GAUGEU.S. model is shown.

INSTANT FUEL ECONOMY

ODOMETER/AVERAGE FUEL ECONOMY/CHECK FUEL CAP MESSAGE

09/07/16 17:56:08 31SWA630_073

This meter shows the number ofmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)driven since you last reset it.

The information display consists ofthree segments. The upper segmentdisplays current fuel mileage, thesecond segment displays theodometer, average fuel mileage,range (estimated distance), engineoil life, and the lower segmentdisplays the trip meter, andmaintenance item code(s).

There are two trip meters: Trip Aand Trip B. Switch between thesedisplays by pressing the select/resetknob repeatedly.

Each trip meter works independently,so you can keep track of twodifferent distances.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the lastselection is displayed.

To reset a trip meter, display it, andthen press and hold the select/resetknob until the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’.

To switch the display, press andrelease the select/reset knobrepeatedly. When you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position the last selection isdisplayed.

Trip Meter

Information Display

Gauges

Instruments

andC

ontrols

69

Press the SELECT/RESET knob.

INFORMATION DISPLAY

09/07/16 17:56:20 31SWA630_074

This display shows the instant fueleconomy you are getting.

When either of the trip meters (tripA or B) is displayed, your vehicle’saverage fuel economy since you lastreset that trip meter can be shownon the information display (mpg onU.S. models and l/100 km onCanadian models). This number isupdated once per 10 seconds. To seethe average fuel economy, press andrelease the select/reset knobrepeatedly.

When you reset a trip meter, theaverage fuel economy for that tripmeter also resets.

This display shows the estimateddistance you can travel on the fuelremaining in the tank.

This distance is estimated from thefuel economy you have achievedover the last few miles (kilometers),so it will vary with changes in speed,traffic condition, etc.

It shows the number of mpg (U.S.)or l/100 km (Canada).

Range (Estimated Distance)Instant Fuel Economy Average Fuel Economy

Gauges

70

U.S. model is shown

INSTANT FUEL ECONOMY

09/07/16 17:56:31 31SWA630_075

The odometer shows the totaldistance your vehicle has beendriven. It measures miles in U.S.models and kilometers in Canadianmodels. It is illegal under U.S.federal law and Canadian provincial/territorial regulations to disconnect,reset, or alter the odometer with theintent to change the number of milesor kilometers indicated.

This indicator displays the outsidetemperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.models) or Celsius (Canadianmodels).

This shows how much fuel you have.It may show slightly more or lessthan the actual amount.

This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the reading should be inthe middle of the gauge. In severedriving conditions, such as very hotweather or a long period of uphilldriving, the reading may reach nearthe red mark. If it reaches the red(Hot) mark, pull safely to the side ofthe road. See page forinstructions and precautions onchecking the engine’s coolingsystem.

392

If equipped

CONTINUED

Outside Temperature IndicatorTemperature GaugeOdometer

Fuel Gauge

Gauges

Instruments

andC

ontrols

71

OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE INDICATOR

Avoid driving with an extremely lowf uel level. Running out of f uel couldcause the engine to misf ire, damagingthe catalytic converter.

09/07/16 17:56:43 31SWA630_076

± ±

－－－－－－－－

The temperature sensor is in thefront bumper. Therefore, thetemperature reading can be affectedby heat reflection from the roadsurface, engine heat, and theexhaust from surrounding traffic.This can cause an incorrecttemperature reading when yourspeed is under 19 mph (30 km/h).

If the outside temperature isincorrectly displayed, you can adjustit up to 5°F in U.S. models ( 3°Cin Canadian models) warmer orcooler.

The sensor delays the display updateuntil it reaches the correct outsidetemperature. This may take severalminutes.

In certain weather conditions,temperature readings near freezing(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice isforming on the road surface.

To adjust the outside temperaturedisplay, press and hold the select/reset knob for 10 seconds. Thedisplay changes as shown above.Select the outside temperatureindicator by turning the select/resetknob. The display begins to blink.Push the same knob to enter thissetting, then turn it to adjust thetemperature. The followingsequence will appear for each: 0, 1, 2,3, 4, 5, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0 (U.S.)or 0, 1, 2, 3, 3, 2, 1, 0 (Canada).

When it reaches the desired value,push the select/reset knob to enterthe setting. You should see the newoutside temperature displayed.

The temperature must bestabilized before doing thisprocedure.

Gauges

72

NOTE:

09/07/16 17:56:52 31SWA630_077

If your fuel fill cap is loose ormissing, a ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’message appears on the informationdisplay after you start the engine.For more information, see page .

The information display in theinstrument panel shows you theengine oil life and maintenanceservice items when the ignitionswitch is in the ON (II) position. Thisinformation helps to keep you awareof the periodic maintenance yourvehicle needs for continued trouble-free driving. Refer to page formore information.

296

341

Gauges

Maintenance MinderCheck Fuel Cap MessageInstrum

entsand

Controls

73

09/07/16 17:57:00 31SWA630_078

＊＊＊

＊

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.If equipped.Refer to the navigation system manual.

1 :2 :3 :

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

74

CRUISE CONTROL BUTTON

PARKING BRAKE PEDAL

HORN


SHIFT LEVER

REMOTE AUDIO CONTROLS

STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENTS


REAR WINDOW DEFOGGERBUTTONHEATED MIRROR BUTTON

NAVIGATION SYSTEMVOICE CONTROL BUTTONS

BLUETOOTH HANDSFREELINK SYSTEMVOICE CONTROL BUTTONS

(P.325)

(P.255)

(P.81)

(P.269) (P.81)

(P.123)

(P.266)

(P.115)

(P.80)

(P.315)

(P.194)AUDIO SYSTEM

(P.79)

(P.33)

(P.145, 157)AUDIO SYSTEM

VEHICLE STABILITYASSIST (VSA) SYSTEMOFF SWITCH

HEADLIGHTS/TURNSIGNALS(P.76)

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS (P.79)

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS (P.75)

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

SEAT HEATERSWITCHES (P.111)

MIRROR CONTROLS (P.115)

1

22

3

2

2

2

2

09/07/16 17:57:10 31SWA630_079

－－－

－

－

－

－

－

－

MISTOFFINT IntermittentLO Low speedHI High speedWindshield washers

Pull thewiper control lever toward you, andhold it. The washers spray until yourelease the lever. The wipers run atlow speed, then complete one moresweep after you release the lever.

The wipers run at high speed.

The wipers run at low speed.

Vary the delay by turning theadjustment ring. If you turn it to theshortest delay ( position), thewipers change to low speedoperation when the vehicle speedexceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).

The length of the wiper interval isvaried automatically according to thevehicle’s speed.

The wipers operate everyfew seconds. At low speed and highspeed, the wipers run continuously.

The wipers are not activated.

Push the right lever up or down toselect a position.

The wipers run at highspeed until you release the lever.

1.2.3.4.5.6.

On all models except LX

Windshield Wiper Windshield Washers

HI

LO

INT

OFF

MIST

Windshield Wipers and Washers

Instruments

andC

ontrols

75

ADJUSTMENT RING

EX-L model is shown.

09/07/16 17:57:22 31SWA630_080

＊

＊

When you turn the wiper switch tothe ‘‘OFF’’ position, the wiper willreturn to its parked position.

OFF Turn SignalOFFParking and interior lightsAUTOHeadlights onHigh BeamsFlash high beams

Rotate the switchcounterclockwise also to spray thewindow washer and turn the wiperon.

When you shift the transmission tothe reverse position with the frontwindshield wiper activated, the rearwiper operates automatically even ifthe rear wiper switch is off.

The rear window washer uses thesame fluid reservoir as the wind-shield washer.

Hold past ON to activate the rearwindow wiper a few times and tospray the rear window washer.

The wiper operates every 7seconds after completing twosweeps.

Rotate the switch clockwise toturn the rear window wiper ON.

If equipped

4.

3.

1.

2.

1.2.3.4.5.6.7.

:

Turn Signal and HeadlightsRear Window Wiper and Washer

Windshield Wipers and Washers, Turn Signal and Headlights

76

EX-L model is shown.

09/07/16 17:57:36 31SWA630_081

－

－－

－Push down on the

lever to signal a left turn and up tosignal a right turn. To signal a lanechange, push lightly on the lever,and hold it. The lever will return tocenter when you release it orcomplete a turn.

Turning the switch tothe ‘‘ ’’ position turns on theparking lights, taillights, instrumentpanel lights, side-marker lights, andrear license plate light.

Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’position turns on the headlights. Ifyou leave the lights on with the keyremoved from the ignition switch,you will hear a reminder chime whenyou open the driver’s door.

When the light switch is in either ofthese positions, the lights onindicator comes on as a reminder.

This indicator stays on if you leavethe lights on and turn the ignitionswitch to the ACCESSORY (I) orLOCK (0) position.

Push the leverforward and the high beam indicatorwill come on (see page ). Pull itback to return to low beams.

To flash the high beams, pull thelever back lightly, then release it.The high beams will stay on as longas you hold the lever back.

The automatic lightingfeature turns on the headlights andall other exterior lights, when itsenses low ambient light.

To turn on automatic lighting, turnthe light switch to AUTO. The lightswill come on automatically when theoutside light level becomes low (atdusk, for example). The lights onindicator comes on as a reminder.The lights and indicator will turn offautomatically when the systemsenses high ambient light.

The lights will remain on when youturn off the ignition switch. They willturn off automatically when youremove the key and open the driver’sdoor. To turn them on again, eitherturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position or turn the light switchto the position.

65

CONTINUED

EX-L models onlyTurn Signal

HeadlightsHigh Beams

AUTO

Turn Signals and Headlights

Instruments

andC

ontrols

77

09/07/16 17:57:47 31SWA630_082

With the headlight switch in the offor position, the high beamheadlights and the high beamindicator come on with reducedbrightness when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position and release the parkingbrake. They remain on until you turnthe ignition switch off, even if youset the parking brake.The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn them onwith the switch.

Even with the automatic lightingfeature turned on, we recommendthat you turn on the lights manuallywhen driving at night or in a densefog, or when you enter dark areassuch as long tunnels or parkingfacilities.

Do not leave the light switch inAUTO if you will not be driving thevehicle for an extended period (aweek or more). You should also turnoff the lights if you plan to leave theengine idling or off for a long time. The automatic lighting feature is

controlled by a sensor located on topof the dashboard. Do not cover thissensor or spill liquids on it.

Turn Signals and Headlights

Daytime Running Lights

78

LIGHT SENSOR

09/07/16 17:57:55 31SWA630_083

Push the button between the centervents to turn on the hazard warninglights (four-way flashers). Thiscauses all four outside turn signalsand both indicators in the instrumentpanel to flash. Use the hazardwarning lights if you need to park ina dangerous area near heavy traffic,or if your vehicle is disabled.

To reduce glare at night, theinstrument panel illumination dimswhen you turn the light switch to

or . Turning the select/reset knob fully to the right until youhear a beep will cancel the reducedbrightness.

You can change the instrument panelbrightness only when the lightswitch is on.Turn the knob on the lower part ofthe instrument panel to adjust thebrightness.You will hear a beep when maximumor minimum brightness is reached.

Hazard Warning ButtonInstrument Panel Brightness

Instrument Panel Brightness, Hazard Warning Button

Instruments

andC

ontrols

79

HAZARD WARNING BUTTON

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESSCONTROL KNOB

09/07/16 17:58:08 31SWA630_084

Pushing this button also turns themirror heaters on or off. For moreinformation, see page .

The defogger wires on the inside ofthe rear window can be accidentallydamaged. When cleaning the glass,always wipe side-to-side.

Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

The defogger will shut itself offwithin about 10 to 30 minutesaccording to the outside temperature.

The rear window defogger will clearfog, frost, and thin ice from thewindow. Push the defogger button toturn it on and off. The indicator inthe button comes on to show thedefogger is on. It also shuts off whenyou turn off the ignition switch. Youhave to turn the defogger on againwhen you restart the vehicle.

115

If equipped

On vehicles with automatic airconditioning system

Rear Window Defogger

80

Manual A/C type is shown.

09/07/16 17:58:16 31SWA630_085

Push the lever under the steeringcolumn all the way down.

Make any steering wheel adjustmentbefore you start driving.

To apply the parking brake, push thepedal down with your foot. Torelease it, push on the pedal again.The parking brake indicator on theinstrument panel should go out whenthe parking brake is fully released(see page ).

Move the steering wheel up ordown, and in or out, so it pointstoward your chest, not towardyour face. Make sure you can seethe instrument panel gauges andindicators.

1.

2.62

CONTINUED

Parking Brake Steering Wheel Adjustment

Parking Brake, Steering Wheel Adjustment

Instruments

andC

ontrols

81

PARKING BRAKE PEDAL

Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thevehicle and be seriously injuredin a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the vehicle is stopped.

Driving the vehicle with the parkingbrake applied can damage the rearbrakes and hubs. A beeper will sound ifthe vehicle is driven with the parkingbrake on.

09/07/16 17:58:27 31SWA630_086

You should have received a keynumber tag with your keys. You willneed this key number if you everhave to get a lost key replaced. Useonly Honda-approved key blanks.

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theimmobilizer system. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry themimmediately with a soft cloth.

Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in position.

Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up, down, in,and out.

The master key fits all the locks onyour vehicle. The valet key worksonly in the ignition and the driver’sdoor lock. You can keep the glovebox locked when you leave yourvehicle and the valet key at a parkingfacility.

The valet key does not contain abattery. Do not try to take it apart.

3.

4.

Keys and Locks

Steering Wheel Adjustment, Keys and Locks

82

LEVER

KEYNUMBERTAG

MASTER KEYWITH REMOTETRANSMITTER

VALETKEY(Gray)

09/07/16 17:58:39 31SWA630_087

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour vehicle inoperable.

If you have lost your key and cannotstart your engine, contact yourdealer.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the immobilizersystem indicator should come onbriefly, then go off. If the indicatorstarts to blink, it means the systemdoes not recognize the coding of thekey. Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position, remove the key,reinsert it, and turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position again.

The immobilizer system protectsyour vehicle from theft. If animproperly coded key (or otherdevice) is used, the engine’s fuelsystem is disabled.

The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object (i.e. keychain) is near the ignition switchwhen you insert the key.

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Immobilizer System

Instruments

andC

ontrols

83

Always take the ignition key with youwhenever you leave the vehicle alone.

09/07/16 17:58:49 31SWA630_088

－

－

－

－

The ignition switch has fourpositions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY(I), ON (II), and START (III).

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may make it difficultto turn the key. Firmly turn thesteering wheel to the left or right asyou turn the key.

This is the normal keyposition when driving. Several of theindicators on the instrument panelcome on as a test when you turn theignition switch from theACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)position.

You canoperate the audio system and theaccessory power sockets in thisposition.

Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to the ON (II) position whenyou let go of the key.

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the LOCK (0) orthe ACCESSORY (I) position andopen the driver’s door. Remove thekey to turn off the beeper.

The shift lever must be in Parkbefore you can remove the key fromthe ignition switch.

You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To turn the key, the shift lever mustbe in Park, and you must push thekey in slightly.

ON (II)

ACCESSORY (I)

START (III)

LOCK (0)

Ignition Switch

84

09/07/16 17:58:59 31SWA630_089

To lock all doors and the tailgate,push the top of the master door lockswitch on either front door, pull thelock tab rearward on the driver’sdoor, or use the key on the outsidelock on the driver’s door.

All doors and the tailgate can belocked from the outside by using thekey in the driver’s door lock. Tounlock only the driver’s door, insertthe key, turn the key, and release it.The remaining doors and the tailgateunlock when you turn the key asecond time within a few seconds.

Pushing the rear of either masterdoor lock switch will unlock all doorsand the tailgate. Pushing forward thelock tab on the driver’s doorsunlocks only that door.

The lock tab on any passenger’s doorlocks and unlocks that door.

When the door is unlocked, you cansee the red indicator on the lock tababove the inner door handle.

To lock any passenger’s door whengetting out of the vehicle, pull thelock tab rearward and close the door.To lock the driver’s door, remove thekey from the ignition switch, pull thelock tab rearward or push the top ofthe master switch, then close thedoor.

CONTINUED

Power Door Locks

Door Locks

Instruments

andC

ontrols

85

MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

Unlock

Lock Lock

Unlock RED INDICATOR

09/07/16 17:59:10 31SWA630_090

With any door and the tailgate openand the key in the ignition, lockingwith master door lock switches isdisabled. The lock tab on the driver’sdoor is not disabled if the driver’sdoor is closed. Pulling the driver’slock tab rearward will lock all doorsand the tailgate. If you try to lock anopen driver’s door by pulling the locktab rearward, the lock tab on thedriver’s door pops out and unlocksthe driver’s door.

When you customize the setting,make sure your vehicle is parkedsafely, the engine is off, and theparking brake is applied. Make allsettings before you start driving.

The auto door locking feature hasthree possible settings:

The auto door locking isdeactivated all the time.

The doors and tailgate lock whenthe vehicle speed reaches 9 mph(15 km/h).

Your vehicle has customizablesettings for the doors and tailgate toautomatically lock and unlock. Thereare default settings for each of thesefeatures. You can turn off or changethe settings for these features asdescribed on the following pages. The doors and tailgate lock

whenever you move the shift leverout of the Park (P) position.

This is the default setting.

Lockout Prevention Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Auto Door Locking

Door Locks

86

09/07/16 17:59:21 31SWA630_091

Locks all doors and tailgate when theshift lever is moved out of the Park (P)position.

Make sure the shift lever is in thePark (P) position.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and make sure toclose the driver’s door.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and open the driver’sdoor.

Push and hold the front of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door until you hear a click(after about 5 seconds).


Release the switch, and within 20seconds, turn the ignition switchto the LOCK (0) position.

1.

2.

1.

2.

4.

3.

CONTINUED

To program the Park Lock mode:To turn off the Auto Door Lockmodes:

Door Locks

Instruments

andC

ontrols

87

09/07/16 17:59:32 31SWA630_092

Push and hold the front of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear a click.Keep holding the switch until youhear another click (after about 5seconds).



Push and hold the brake pedal,and move the shift lever out of thePark (P) position.

Push and hold the front of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear a click.Keep holding the switch until youhear another click (after about 5seconds).

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position.


Release the switch, and within 20seconds, turn the ignition switchto the ACCESSORY (I) position.Move the shift lever to the Park(P) position.

1.

3.

2.

3.

4.

4.

5.

6.

Locks all doors and tailgate when thevehicle’s speed reaches about 9 mph(15 km/h).

To program the Drive Lock mode:

Door Locks

88

09/07/16 17:59:43 31SWA630_093

The auto door unlocking feature hasfive possible settings:


Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and open the driver’sdoor.

Push and hold the rear of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear a click,and after about 5 seconds, you willhear another click.


All doors and tailgate unlock whenyou move the shift lever to thePark (P) position with the brakepedal depressed.

All doors and tailgate unlockwhenever you turn the ignitionswitch to the ACCESSORY (I)position.

The driver’s door unlockswhenever you turn the ignitionswitch to the ACCESSORY (I)position.

The auto door unlocking isdeactivated all the time.

The driver’s door unlocks whenyou move the shift lever to thePark (P) position with the brakepedal depressed.This is the default setting.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Auto Door Unlocking To turn off the Auto Door Unlockmodes:

Door Locks

Instruments

andC

ontrols

89

09/07/16 17:59:56 31SWA630_094

Unlocks the driver’s door or all doorsand tailgate when the ignition switch ismoved out of the ON (II) position.

driver’s door unlockfeature.

all doors and tailgateunlock feature

Unlocks the driver’s door or all doorsand tailgate when the shift lever ismoved into the Park (P) position withthe brake pedal depressed.



Push and hold the rear of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear a click.Continue to hold down the switch:

Until you hear another click(after about 5 seconds) toactivate

Or, until you hear two moreclicks (after about 10 seconds)to activate

.




1.

2.

1.

2.

3.

4.

To program the Ignition SwitchUnlock mode:

To program the Park Unlock mode:

Door Locks

90

09/07/16 18:00:09 31SWA630_095

The childproof door locks aredesigned to prevent children seatedin the rear from accidentally openingthe rear doors. Each rear door has alock lever near the edge. With thelever in the LOCK position (lever isdown), the door cannot be openedfrom the inside regardless of theposition of the lock tab. To open thedoor, push the lock tab forward anduse the outside door handle.

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position.

Push and hold the brake pedal,then move the shift lever out ofthe Park (P) position.

Push and hold the rear of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear a click.Continue to hold down the switch:

Until you hear another click(after about 5 seconds) toactivate

Or, until you hear two moreclicks (after about 10 seconds)to activate

.

Release the switch, and within 20seconds, turn the ignition switchto the ACCESSORY (I) position.Move the shift lever to the Park(P) position.

3.

4.

5.

6.

driver’s door unlockfeature.

all doors and tailgateunlock feature

Childproof Door Locks

Door Locks

Instruments

andC

ontrols

91

LEVER

Lock

Unlock

09/07/16 18:00:20 31SWA630_096

－

－

－Press this button onceto unlock the driver’s door. Push ittwice to unlock the remaining doorsand the tailgate. Some exterior lightswill flash twice each time you pressthe button.

Press this button once tolock all doors and the tailgate. Someexterior lights will flash once. Whenyou push LOCK twice within 5seconds, you will hear a beep toverify that the doors and the tailgateare locked and the security system(if equipped) has set. You cannotlock the doors and the tailgate if anydoor or the tailgate is not fully closedor the key is in the ignition switch.

The ceiling light and the spot light (ifequipped) comes on when you pressthe UNLOCK button if the lights arein the door activated position. If youdo not open any door or the tailgatewithin 30 seconds, the light fades out.If you relock the doors and thetailgate with the remote transmitterbefore 30 seconds have elapsed, thelight(s) will go off immediately.

If you do not open any door or thetailgate within 30 seconds, they willautomatically relock, and thesecurity system (if equipped) willreset.

Press this button forabout 2 seconds to attract attention:the horn will sound, and the exteriorlights will flash for about 30 seconds.To cancel panic mode, press anyother button on the remotetransmitter, or turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

UNLOCK

LOCK

PANIC

Remote Transmitter

92

LED

UNLOCKBUTTON

LOCKBUTTON

PANICBUTTON

09/07/16 18:00:28 31SWA630_097

Avoid dropping or throwing thetransmitter.

Protect the transmitter fromextreme temperature.

Do not immerse the transmitter inany liquid.

If you lose a transmitter, thereplacement needs to bereprogrammed by your dealer.

If it takes several pushes on thebutton to lock or unlock the doorsand the tailgate, replace the batteryas soon as possible.Battery type: CR1616

To replace the battery:

Remove the screw at the base ofthe transmitter with a smallPhillips-head screwdriver.

Be careful when removingthis screw as the head of the screwcan strip out.

Separate the transmitter by pryingits middle seam with yourfingernail.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Remote Transmitter Care Replacing the TransmitterBattery

Remote Transmitter

Instruments

andC

ontrols

93

NOTE:

SCREW

09/07/16 18:00:41 31SWA630_098

＋




An improperly disposed of batterycan hurt the environment.Always confirm local regulationsfor battery disposal.

Install the parts in reverse order.

Inside the transmitter, separatethe inner cover from the keypadby carefully prying on the edgewith a coin.

Remove the old battery and notethe polarity. Make sure thepolarity of the new battery is thesame ( side facing down), theninsert it in the keypad.

5.

3. 4.

Remote Transmitter

94

BATTERY

COIN

09/07/16 18:00:51 31SWA630_099

To open the tailgate, push therelease, and lift up. To close thetailgate, use the tailgate handle tolower it, then press down on theback edge.

Keep the tailgate closed at all timeswhile driving to avoid damaging thetailgate and to prevent exhaust gasfrom getting into the interior. See

on page.

The tailgate will lock when you lockthe driver’s door with the key, theremote transmitter, the master doorlock switch, or the lock tab on thedriver’s door.

To unlock the tailgate, turn the keyclockwise twice, push the rear of themaster door lock switch, or push theUNLOCK button twice on theremote transmitter.

55Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Tailgate

Instruments

andC

ontrols

95

HANDLERELEASE

09/07/29 20:30:59 31SWA630_100

If the power door lock system cannotunlock the tailgate, unlock itmanually.

Push the release lever to the lowerright as shown.

If you need to unlock the tailgatemanually, it means there is aproblem with the tailgate. Have thevehicle checked by your dealer.

Place a cloth on the top side of thecover to prevent scratches, then usea small flat-tip screwdriver to removethe cover on the back of the tailgate.

Unlocking the Tailgate

Tailgate

96

RELEASE LEVER

09/07/16 18:01:06 31SWA630_101

－See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position the seats and seat-backs.

EX-L and Canadian EX models

12 14

The controls for the poweradjustable driver’s seat are on theoutside edge of the seat bottom. Youcan adjust the seat with the ignitionswitch in any position. Make all seatadjustments before you start driving.

The front passenger’s seat can beadjusted manually (see the nextpage).

Moves the seat forwardand backward.

Moves the front of theseat up or down.

Raises or lowers the seat.

Moves the whole seat upand forward, or downand backward. The frontof the seat also tilts up ordown at the same time.

Adjusts the seat-backangle forward orbackward.

Increases or decreasesthe lumbar support.

Driver’s Seat Power Adjustments

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

97

09/07/16 18:01:19 31SWA630_102

－

The height of your driver’s seat isadjustable. To raise the seat,repeatedly pull up the lever on theoutside of the seat cushion. To lowerthe seat, push the lever downrepeatedly.

Make all seat adjustments beforeyou start driving.

To adjust the seat forward orbackward, pull up on the bar underthe seat cushion’s front edge. Movethe seat to the desired position, and

release the bar. Try to move the seatto make sure it is locked in position.

To change the seat-back angle of thefront seat, pull up the lever on theoutside of the seat bottom.

Once a seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make sure itis locked in position.

See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position the seats and seat-backs.

LX and U.S. EX models

12 14Seat Adjustments

Seats

98

09/07/16 18:01:30 31SWA630_103

Each front seat has an armrest onthe side of the seat-back. To use it,pivot it down.

To adjust the seats forward andbackward, pull up on the lever underthe seat cushion. After moving theseat, make sure it is locked intoposition.

The angle of each rear seat-back canbe adjusted separately. To changethe seat-back angle of the rear seat-back, pull up on the release lever onthe top of the seat-back. Move theseat-back to the desired position,

then release the lever. Make surethe seat-back latches in the newposition.

Make sure all rear shoulder belts arepositioned in front of the rear seat-backs after you adjust the rear seats.

When using the center seatingposition, adjust the left and right sideof the rear seats to the same position.

CONTINUED

ArmrestsRear Seat Adjustments

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

99

FRONT

09/07/29 20:49:14 31SWA630_104

The rear seat armrest is in thecenter of the rear seat. Pivot it downto use it.

If your vehicle is equipped with adual deck cargo shelf, do not use theshelf when any seat-back is foldeddown. Objects placed on this shelfcan be thrown forward andoccupants can be injured duringsudden stops or a collision.

For more information on the dualdeck cargo shelf, see page .

The rear center seat-back has acargo area pass-through. To use thecargo area pass-through, pull up therelease on top of the center seat-back and fold it down.

117

Cargo Pass-through

Seats

100

REAR

09/07/30 12:20:23 31SWA630_105

See page for important safetyinformation and a warning aboutimproperly positioning head restraints.

14

Your vehicle is equipped with headrestraints in all seating positions tohelp protect you and yourpassengers from the likelihood ofwhiplash and other injuries.

They are most effective when youadjust them so the center of the backof the occupant’s head rests againstthe center of the restraint.

The head restraints adjust for height.You need both hands to adjust arestraint. Do not attempt to adjust itwhile driving. To raise it, pull upward.To lower the restraint, push therelease button sideways, and pushthe restraint down.

CONTINUED

Head Restraints

Adjusting the Head Restraint

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

101

RELEASE BUTTONLEGS

SEAT-BACK

CUSHIONFront Position

09/07/16 18:02:00 31SWA630_106

Make sure the removed headrestraints are securely stored.

Make sure the head restraint locksin position when you reinstall it.

When reinstalling a head restraint,put the legs back in place. Thenadjust it to the appropriate heightwhile pressing the release button.

When a passenger is seated in therear center seating position, makesure the center head restraint isproperly adjusted.

To remove a head restraint, pull it upas far as it will go. Push the releasebutton, then pull the restraint out ofthe seat-back.

To pivot the outer head restraintdown for better visibility, press thetilt button on the side of the headrestraint. It folds down forward. Toraise the head restraint, pivot it upby hand. Make sure the headrestraint locks in position.

Seats

Removing the Head Restraint

102

RELEASE BUTTON

Rear Outer Position Rear Center CUSHION

LEGS

SEAT-BACK

CUSHION

TILT BUTTON

Failure to reinstall the headrestraints can result in severeinjury during a crash.

Always replace the headrestraints before driving.

09/07/30 11:02:25 31SWA630_107

The driver’s and front passenger’sseats have active head restraints. Ifthe vehicle is struck severely fromthe rear, the occupant properlysecured with the seat belt will bepushed against the seat-back and thehead restraint will automaticallymove forward.

This reduces the distance betweenthe restraint and the occupant’s head.It also helps protect the occupants

against the likelihood of whiplashand injuries to the neck and upperspine.

For a head restraint system to workproperly:

Do not hang any items on the headrestraints, or from the restraintlegs.

Do not place any object betweenan occupant and the seat-back.

Install each restraint in its properlocation.

Only use genuine Hondareplacement head restraints.

If the restraints do not return to theirnormal position, or in the event of asevere collision, have the vehicleinspected by a Honda dealer.

After a collision, the activatedrestraint should return to its normalposition.

Active Head Restraints

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

103

09/07/17 14:47:34 31SWA630_108

You can recline the seat-backs on thefront seats so they are level with therear seat cushions, making a largecushioned area. To do this:

Adjust the rear seats as far backas possible.

Remove the front head restraints(see page ), and store themsecurely.

Only the passenger’s side can belevel as follows.

Adjust the front seats forward asfar as possible. Pull up the seat-back angle adjustment lever andpivot the seat-back backward untilit is level with the rear seatcushion.

The seat-back of the poweradjustable driver’s seat cannot belevel. Do not push the seat-backdown forcibly.

Adjust the rear seat-back to thedesired position.

Reverse this procedure to return thefront and rear seats to the uprightposition. Make sure you install thehead restraints and securely lock theseats before driving.

When you return the seat-back to itsupright position, hold the seat-backto keep it from going up too quickly.

1.

2.

4.

3.

101



Reclining the Front Seats

Seats

104

SLIDE BAR

SEAT-BACK ANGLEADJUSTMENT LEVER

09/07/29 20:49:46 31SWA630_109

Each rear seat-back can be foldeddown separately to give more cargoroom. With either of the outer seat-backs folded-down, you can stillcarry a passenger in the rear seat.With the center seat-back folded-down, either outer seating positioncan be used.

You can also fold up the left or rightside of the rear seats separately tocreate further cargo space (see page

).

Remove any items from the seatbefore folding down the seat-back.

Push the seat belt buckles into theseat cushion.

When you are folding the rear centerseat-back, use the latch plate torelease the center seat belt from thedetachable anchor (see page ).Allow the seat belt to retract into theholder on the ceiling and store thebuckles in it.

Make sure the rear seat armrest isstored.

1.107

109

CONTINUED

Folding the Rear Seats Down

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

105

LATCH PLATEBUCKLE

09/07/16 18:02:43 31SWA630_110

Reverse this procedure to return theseat-back to the upright position.Make sure the seat is secured andthe seat belt is in front of the seat-back before driving.

In the rear center seating position,be sure the detachable anchor islatched securely (see page ).

Make sure that the folded down rearseat does not interfere with the frontpassenger’s seat-back. This willcause the front passenger’s weightsensors and the front passenger’sseat belt reminder indicator to workimproperly (see page ). Alsocheck the passenger airbag offindicator to assure proper operationof the passenger’s front airbag (seepage ).

Push the button located next toeach rear head restraint to pivotthe head restraint down.

Do not put any heavy items on theseat-back when it is folded down.

Fold the seat-back forward.

Pull up the release lever on the topof the seat-back.

Lower the rear center headrestraint to its lowest position.

2.

3.

4.

109

19

33

Seats

106

RELEASE LEVER

09/07/30 11:02:35 31SWA630_111

When any seat-back is folded down,do not use the dual deck cargo shelf(if equipped).

Make sure all items in the cargo areaare secured. Loose items can flyforward and cause injury if you haveto brake hard (Seeon page ).

The left and right rear seats can befolded up separately to make roomfor cargo.

To fold the rear seat forward:

Remove any items from the seatbefore you fold up the seat cushion.

Pull up the bar under the seatcushion and slide the rear seatbackward. The rear seat will notfold forward unless it is as farback as it will go.

Lower the center seat-back beforefolding the passenger’s side seatforward.

Follow steps 1 through 4 on pagesand for folding down the

seat-back.

1.

2.

304

105 106

CONTINUED

Carrying Cargo

Folding the Rear Seat Forward

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

107

SLIDE BARS

09/07/30 11:02:47 31SWA630_112

Pull out the fastening strap fromthe slit on the seat-back. Thenattach the anchor on the fasteningstrap to the hook on the centerpillar.

Pull down on the anchor to engagethe upper part of the anchorsecurely on the hook, and makesure the seat is secure.

Unlock the seat from the floor bypulling the lock release straplocated at the rear of the seatcushion, under the seat back, thenlift the rear of the seat.You cannot fold up the rear seat ifit is not latched securely in therearmost position.

3. 4. 5.

Seats

108

LOCK RELEASE STRAP

ANCHOR

HOOK

FASTENINGSTRAP

ANCHORFASTENING STRAP

HOOK

09/07/30 11:02:56 31SWA630_113

Make sure that the folded up rightrear seat does not interfere with thefront passenger’s seat-back. This willcause the front passenger’s weightsensors and the front passenger’sseat belt reminder indicator to workimproperly (see page ). Alsocheck the passenger airbag offindicator to assure proper operationof the passenger’s advanced frontairbag.

Reverse this procedure to return theseat to the upright position.Make sure the seat is securelylatched before driving.When you are not using thefastening strap, store the strap intothe slit on the seat-back.

Make sure both outer seat belts arepositioned in side of the rear seat-backs.


Do not use the dual deck cargo shelf(if equipped) when the seats arefolded down or forward.

The seat belt in the rear center seatis equipped with a detachable anchor.

This allows the center seat belt to beunlatched when the rear center seatback is folded down or the right siderear seat is folded forward.

In the center seating position of therear seat, be sure the detachableanchor is latched securely beforeusing the seat belt (see next column).

33

304

CONTINUED

Carrying Cargo

Detachable Anchor

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

109

Using the seat belt with thedetachable anchor unlatchedincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Before using the seat belt,make sure the detachableanchor is correctly latched.

09/07/16 18:03:24 31SWA630_114

Pull out the small latch plate and thelatch plate from each holding slot inthe ceiling, and pull out the seat beltto extend it.

Line up the triangle marks on thesmall latch plate and anchor bucklewhen reattaching the belt and buckle.

Tug on the seat belt to verify thatthe detachable anchor is securelylatched. Make sure the seat belt isnot twisted.

To unlatch the detachable anchor,insert the latch plate into the slot onthe side of the anchor buckle. Storethe detachable anchor and seat beltlatch plates in the retractor housing.

Seats

110

TRIANGLEMARKS

ANCHOR BUCKLE

SMALL LATCH PLATE

LATCH PLATE LATCH PLATE

ANCHOR BUCKLE

09/07/16 18:03:33 31SWA630_115

If equippedBoth front seats are equipped withseat heaters. The passenger seatonly has heaters in the seat bottombecause of the side airbag cutoffsystem.

The ignition switch must be in theON (II) position to use the heaters.Push the top of the switch, HI, torapidly heat up the seat. After theseat reaches a comfortabletemperature, select LO by pushingthe bottom of the switch. This willkeep the seat warm.

In the HI setting, the heater turns offwhen the seat gets warm, and turnsback on after the seat’s temperaturedrops.

In the LO setting, the heater runscontinuously. It does not cycle withtemperature changes.

Follow these precautions when usingthe seat heaters:

Use the HI setting only to heat theseats quickly, because it drawslarge amounts of current from thebattery.

If the engine is left idling for anextended period, do not use theseat heaters, even on the LOsetting. It can weaken the battery,causing hard starting.

Seat Heaters

Instruments

andC

ontrols

111

DRIVER’S SEATHEATER SWITCH

PASSENGER’SSEAT HEATERSWITCH

Passenger’sseat

HEATERSDriver’sseat

09/07/16 18:03:43 31SWA630_116

－

－

When you push the MAIN switch in,the switch is off, and the passengerwindows cannot be raised or lowered.To cancel this feature, push on theswitch again to get it to pop out.Keep the MAIN switch off when you

have children in the vehicle so theydo not injure themselves byoperating the windowsunintentionally.

To open or close thedriver’s window, push or pull thewindow switch firmly down or up tothe second detent, and release it.The window will automatically go upor down all the way. To stop thewindow, pull or push the windowswitch briefly.

If the driver’swindow senses any obstacle while itis closing automatically, it willreverse direction, and then stop. Toclose the window, remove theobstacle, then use the window switchagain.

Auto reverse stops sensing when thewindow is almost closed. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the windowbefore closing it.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position to raise or lower anywindow. To open the window, pushthe switch down and hold it. Releasethe switch when you want to stop thewindow. To close the window, pullback on the switch and hold it.

The windows will operate for up to10 minutes after you turn off theignition switch. Opening either frontdoor cancels this function.

The driver’s window autoreverse function is disabled whenyou continuously pull up the switch.

AUTO

AUTO REVERSE

Power Windows

112

NOTE:

DRIVER’S WINDOW SWITCH

MAIN SWITCH

Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.

09/07/16 18:03:53 31SWA630_117

－ To open the moonrooffully, pull back the moonroof switchfirmly, then release it. The moonroofautomatically opens all the way. Tostop the moonroof from opening,push the switch briefly.

To close the moonroof fully, firmlypush the moonroof switch forward,then release it. The moonroofautomatically closes all the way. Tostop the moonroof from closing,push the switch briefly.

To open or close the moonroofpartially, lightly pull the switch backor push it forward and hold it. Themoonroof will stop when you releasethe switch.

To tilt up the moonroof, push on thecenter of the moonroof switch. Tostop the moonroof from tilting upfully, push the switch briefly.

To open the moonroof, pull back onthe switch and hold it. Release theswitch when the moonroof reachesthe desired position. To close themoonroof, push the switch forwardand hold it. Release the switch tostop the operation.

The moonroof can be tilted up in theback for ventilation, or it can be slidback into the roof. Use the switch onthe front ceiling to operate themoonroof. You must turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position to operate the moonroof.

If equipped

CONTINUED

AUTO

Moonroof

Instruments

andC

ontrols

113

TILT

MOONROOF SWITCH

Opening or closing themoonroof on someone’s handsor fingers can cause seriousinjury.

Make sure all hands and fingersare clear of the moonroofbefore opening or closing it.

09/07/16 18:04:04 31SWA630_118

－ If themoonroof runs into any obstaclewhile it is closing automatically, itwill reverse direction and then stop.To close the moonroof, remove theobstacle, then use the moonroofswitch again.

Auto reverse stops sensing when themoonroof is almost closed. Youshould always check that allpassengers and objects are awayfrom the moonroof before closing it.

The moonroof has a key-off delay.You can open and close themoonroof for up to 10 minutes afteryou turn off the ignition switch. Thekey-off delay cancels as soon as youopen either front door. You mustthen turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position for the moonroof tooperate.

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

The inside mirror has day and nightpositions. The night position reducesglare from headlights behind you.Flip the tab on the bottom edge ofthe mirror to select the day or nightposition.

AUTO REVERSE Mirrors

Moonroof, Mirrors

114

TAB

If you try to open the moonroof inbelow-f reezing temperatures, or whenit is covered with snow or ice, you candamage the moonroof panel or itsmotor.

09/07/16 18:04:12 31SWA630_119

Push the appropriate edge of theadjustment switch to move themirror right, left, up, or down.

When you finish, move theselector switch to the center (off)position. This turns theadjustment switch off to keep yoursettings.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

Move the selector switch to L(driver’s side) or R (passenger’sside).

The outside mirrors are heated toremove fog and frost. With theignition switch in the ON (II)position, turn on the heaters bypressing the button. The indicator inthe button comes on as a reminder.Press the button again to turn theheaters off. Pressing this button alsoturns the rear window defogger onand off.

2.

1.

3.

4.

If equipped

Adjusting the Power Mirrors Power Mirror Heaters

Mirrors

Instruments

andC

ontrols

115

SELECTOR SWITCH

ADJUSTMENT SWITCHREAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

09/07/16 18:04:23 31SWA630_120

＊

＊

＊＊

＊

＊

＊＊＊

Interior Convenience Items

116

COAT HOOK

SUN VISOR

VANITY MIRROR


UPPER GLOVE BOX

LOWER GLOVE BOX

CENTER POCKET

BEVERAGE HOLDERS inREAR SEAT ARMREST

SUNGLASSES HOLDERCONVERSATION MIRROR


DUAL DECK CARGO SHELF

AUXILIARY INPUTJACK

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETIf equippedOn some models, this is on the center tableThis is on the center table or on the front panel, depending on models

SEAT UNDER TRAY

DOOR BEVERAGE HOLDER

CENTER CONSOLE withBEVERAGE HOLDERS

1 :2 :3 :

USB ADAPTERCABLE

2

1

3

1

2

1

09/07/29 20:50:23 31SWA630_121

The dual deck cargo shelf willseparate the storage area into twostorage areas. On the upper area,you can store small and light items.You should place heavy items in thelower storage area. You can removethe dual deck cargo shelf and store iton the cargo area floor to make alarger cargo area.

To store the dual deck cargo shelf,lift up either side of it, then move itas shown above.

Make sure to use the dual deck

cargo shelf fully opened and securelylatched.

To remove the dual deck cargo shelf,fold up the rear half of the shelfforward onto the front half, push upon both sides, then pull it toward you.

Place the dual deck cargo shelf onthe far side of the cargo floor, thenslide it forward while folding out theupper half of the shelf.

If equipped

CONTINUED

Dual Deck Cargo Shelf


Instruments

andC

ontrols

117

09/07/30 11:03:07 31SWA630_122

The dual deck cargo shelf can beplaced on the floor as shown above.

Reverse this procedure to return thedual deck cargo shelf to the upperposition. Make sure the dual deckcargo shelf is latched securely.

The maximum load on the dual deckcargo shelf is 20 lbs on U.S. models,and 10kg on Canadian models. Thisis shown on a label on the driver’sside of the dual deck cargo shelf(see page ). To prevent damageto the dual deck cargo shelf, do notexceed the maximum load.


When any of the rear seats arefolded down or forward, do not placeany objects on the dual deck cargoshelf. Make sure to store the shelfon the cargo area floor. It could beunlatched during a crash.

57

304Carrying Cargo


118

Do not use this shelf if thesecond row seats are foldeddown.

Objects placed on the shelfcould be thrown forward duringa crash or sudden stop and hurtsomeone.

09/07/30 11:03:15 31SWA630_123

On vehicles with rear seat armrest

On Canadian models

On U.S. modelsThe rear seat also has a beverageholder in the center armrest. To useit, pivot the armrest down.

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holders. A spilled liquidthat is very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Liquid can also spillfrom the door pocket beverageholders when you open or close thedoors. Use only resealablecontainers in the door pockets.

Spilled liquids can damage theupholstery, carpeting, and electricalcomponents in the interior.

To prevent damage, do not placemore than 20 lbs (9 kg) on this shelf.

To prevent damage, do not placemore than 10 kg on this shelf.

Beverage Holders


Instruments

andC

ontrols

119

09/07/30 11:03:24 31SWA630_124

Open the lower glove box by pullingthe bottom of the handle. Close itwith a firm push. Lock or unlock theglove box with the master key.

The glove box light comes on whenthe parking lights are on.

Sitting on or getting under the table,or putting heavy objects on the table,may damage or deform it.

Do not put any items on the tablewhile driving. They may fall down orfly around when you go aroundcorners or brake hard.

To use the center table, pull up theoutside edge of the table until itlatches. To store it, pull the lever andlower the table.

On LX and EX models

Lower Glove BoxCenter Table


120

To lock

09/07/16 18:05:08 31SWA630_125

To use the vanity mirror on the backof the sun visor, pull up the cover.

Open the upper glove box bypushing up the lever. Close it bypulling down on the edge under thelever.

The vanity mirror lights come onwhen you pull up the cover.

Except LX model

Vanity MirrorUpper Glove Box


Instruments

andC

ontrols

121

EDGE

LEVER

An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

09/07/16 18:05:17 31SWA630_126

Some larger styles of sunglassesmay not fit in the holder.

You may also store small items inthis holder. Make sure they aresmall enough to let the holder closeand latch, and that they are notheavy enough to cause the holder topop open while driving.

To open the sunglasses holder, pushthen release the raised detent. It willunlatch and swing down. To close it,push it until it latches. Make sure theholder is closed while you are driving.

To use the sun visor, pull it down.When using the sun visor for theside window, remove the support rodfrom the clip, and swing it out.

Make sure you put the sun visorback in place when you are gettinginto or out of the vehicle.

Sunglasses HolderSun Visor


122

Push

SUNGLASSES HOLDERSUN VISOR

09/07/16 18:05:27 31SWA630_127

To use an accessory power socket,the ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

Each socket is intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps).

Your vehicle has two or threeaccessory power sockets dependingon the model.

The sunglasses holder uses a convexmirror for its bottom panel. You cansee all the vehicle passengers in thismirror. To use the mirror, open thesunglasses holder fully, push it to thefirst detent, and release it.

To switch back to the sunglassesholder, close the conversation mirrorand then open the sunglasses holder.

CONTINUED

Accessory Power SocketsConversation Mirror


Instruments

andC

ontrols

123

EX model

Center TableFront

09/07/16 18:05:37 31SWA630_128

Push the release knob to open orclose the console compartment, slidethe lid rearward.

Make sure to put the socket coverback in place to prevent any smallforeign objects from getting into thesocket.

None of the sockets will power anautomotive type cigarette lighterelement.

EX-L model

Console Compartment


124

Push

EX-L model

Console Compartment Rear

09/07/16 18:05:46 31SWA630_129

If equippedYour vehicle has a seat under traylocated under the front passengerseat. Use the tray by pulling on thefront center edge of the tray.

To use a coat hook, slide it outslightly, then pull it down.

Make sure the coat hook is folded upwhen you are not using it. This hookis not designed for large or heavyitems.

Seat Under TrayCoat Hook

Interior Convenience Item

Instruments

andC

ontrols

125

09/07/16 18:05:55 31SWA630_130

The spotlights have a two-positionswitch. In the DOOR position, thelights come on when you open anydoor. In the OFF position, the lightsdo not come on.

The spotlights (with the switch inthe DOOR position) also come onwhen you unlock the door with thekey or the remote transmitter, andwhen you remove the key from theignition switch.

After all doors and the tailgate areclosed tightly, the light fades out inabout 30 seconds.

The ceiling light (with the switch inthe center position) comes on whenyou remove the key from the ignitionswitch. If you do not open a door andthe tailgate, the light fades out inabout 30 seconds.

If you leave any door or the tailgateopen without the key in the ignitionswitch, the ceiling light goes off after3 minutes.The ceiling light has a three-position

switch: ON, Door Activated, andOFF. In the Door Activated (center)position, the light comes on whenyou:

Unlock the doors and the tailgatewith the key or remote transmitter.

Open any door.

Interior Lights

SpotlightsCeiling Light

126

Push

Push

ON

OFF

DOOR ACTIVATED

LX model

09/07/16 18:06:06 31SWA630_131

The cargo area light has a three-position switch. In the OFF position,the light does not come on. In thecenter position, it comes on whenyou open the tailgate. In the ONposition, it stays on continuously.

The ignition switch light comes onwhen you open the driver’s door. Itfades out in about 30 seconds afterthe door is closed.

Turn on the spotlight by pushing thelens. Push the lens again to turn itoff. You can use the spotlights at alltimes.

Interior Lights

Cargo Area LightIgnition Switch LightInstrum

entsand

Controls

127

OFF

ON

TAILGATE ACTIVATED

Push

Push

LX model

09/07/16 18:06:15 31SWA630_132

128

09/07/16 18:06:18 31SWA630_133

The heating and air conditioningsystem in your vehicle provides acomfortable driving environment inall weather conditions.

The standard audio system hasmany features. This sectiondescribes those features and how touse them.

Your vehicle has an anti-theft audiosystem that requires a code numberto enable it.

The security system helps todiscourage vandalism and theft ofyour vehicle.

.............Vents, Heating, and A/C . 130...............Climate Control System . 135

..........Dual Temperature Control . 140..............Climate Control Sensors . 142

................................Audio System . 143

..........Playing the AM/FM Radio . 145................................Playing a Disc . 149

.......Disc Player Error Messages . 156

..........Playing the AM/FM Radio . 157................Playing the XM Radio . 161

.................................Playing Discs . 166.......Disc Player Error Messages . 176

............................Playing an iPod . 177.................iPod Error Messages . 183

Playing a USB Flash Memory........................................Device . 184

USB Flash Memory Device Error...................................Messages . 193

..........Playing the AM/FM Radio . 194................Playing the XM Radio . 200

................................Playing a Disc . 206.......Disc Player Error Messages . 214

...................................CD Changer . 215.....CD Changer Error Messages . 221

..........................Playing a PC card . 222.............PC card Error Messages . 234

............................Playing an iPod . 235.................iPod Error Messages . 241

Playing a USB Flash Memory........................................Device . 242

USB Flash Memory Device Error...................................Messages . 249

............AM/FM Radio Reception . 250..................Protecting Your Discs . 252................Remote Audio Controls . 255

...Playing an Optional Audio Unit . 257.................Radio Theft Protection . 258

..........................Setting the Clock . 259.........................................Compass . 260

............................Security System . 264...Rearview Camera and Monitor . 265

...............................Cruise Control . 266........HandsFreeLink . 269

LX model

EX and EX-L models without navigationsystem

Canadian EX model and EX-L modelwithout navigation system

EX-L Models with navigation systemBluetooth

Features

Features

129

09/12/10 10:52:29 31SWA630_134

＊

＊ : Canadian models

Vents, Heating, and A/C

130

TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

AIR CONDITIONING(A/C) BUTTON

FAN CONTROL DIAL

MAX A/C BUTTON RECIRCULATIONBUTTON

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/HEATEDMIRRORS BUTTON

MODE CONTROL BUTTONS

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER

LX and EX models

09/07/16 18:06:30 31SWA630_135

Turn this dial to increase or decreasethe fan speed and airflow.

Turning this dial clockwise increasesthe temperature of the airflow.

When the recirculation indicator ison, air from the vehicle’s interior issent throughout the system again.When the indicator is off, air isbrought in from the outside of thevehicle (fresh air mode).

The outside air intakes for theheating and cooling system are atthe base of the windshield. Keep thisarea clear of leaves and other debris.

The system should be left in freshair mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.

Switch to recirculation mode whendriving through dusty or smokyconditions, then return to fresh airmode.

This button turns the airconditioning on and off. Theindicator in the button is on whenthe A/C is on.

The system automaticallyturns on the A/C and switches torecirculation mode (see page touse this setting). Air flows from thecenter and side vents in thedashboard. Pressing the , A/C,or any of the mode buttons cancelsMAX A/C, but the A/C stays on.

Airflow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

Air flows from the centerand corner vents in the dashboard.

Use the mode control buttons toselect the vents air flows from. Someair will flow from the dashboardcorner vents in all modes.

This button turns the rear windowdefogger off and on (see page ).

Pushing this button also turns thepower mirror heaters on and off.

/

80

133

CONTINUED

Canadian models only


Fan Control Dial

Temperature Control Dial

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

Recirculation Button

MAX A/C Button

Mode Control

Rear Window DefoggerButton

Features

131

09/07/16 18:06:52 31SWA630_136

Air flows from the floorvents.

When you select , the systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode. If you switch the mode from

or to , the systemkeeps the A/C on. The A/Cindicator will not come on if it wasoff to start with.

To turn off the A/C, press the A/Cbutton to illuminate the indicator,then press it again to turn off theA/C.

Airflow is divided betweenthe floor vents and defroster vents atthe base of the windshield.

Air flows from the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

When you select or ,the system automatically switches tofresh air mode and turns on the A/C.You cannot turn the A/C off in thismode.

Set the temperature to the lowerlimit.Make sure the A/C is off.Select and fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

The heater uses engine coolant towarm the air. If the engine is cold, itwill be several minutes before youfeel warm air coming from thesystem.

Select .When you select , the systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode. If you switch the modefrom or , the systemalso automatically turns on theA/C. This helps prevent thewindows from fogging upunintendedly. The A/C indicatorwill not come on if it was off tostart with (see the first column onthis page).Set the fan to the desired speed.Adjust the warmth of the air withthe temperature control dial.

When you switch to ormode from , the A/C

turns off. But if it was on to startwith, the A/C stays on.

The flow-through ventilation systemdraws in outside air, circulates itthrough the interior, then dischargesit through vents near the tailgate.

1.

2.3.4.

1.

2.3.


Ventilation

Using the Heater

132

09/07/16 18:07:12 31SWA630_137

Air conditioning places an extra loadon the engine. Watch the enginecoolant temperature gauge (see page

). If it moves near the red zone,turn off the A/C until the gaugereading returns to normal.

Turn on the A/C by pressing thebutton. The indicator in the buttoncomes on when a fan speed isselected.Make sure the temperature is setto maximum cool.Select .If the outside air is humid, selectrecirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

you cancool it down more rapidly by partiallyopening the windows, turning on theair conditioning, and setting the fanto maximum speed in fresh air mode.

To cool the interior with MAX A/C:Set the fan to the desired speed.Select MAX A/C.The system automatically turns onthe A/C, selects , andswitches to recirculation mode.Make sure the temperature is setto maximum cool.

Air conditioning, as it cools, removesmoisture from the air. When used incombination with the heater, itmakes the interior warm and dry andcan prevent the windows fromfogging up.

This setting is suitable for all drivingconditions whenever the outsidetemperature is above 32°F (0°C).

Turn the fan on.Turn on the air conditioning.Select and fresh air mode.Adjust the temperature to yourpreference.

1.

2.

3.4.

5.

1.2.3.4.

1.2.

3.

71

If the interior is very warm, Dehumidify the InteriorUsing the A/C


Features

133

09/07/16 18:07:25 31SWA630_138

To remove fog from the inside of thewindows:

Turning the fan speed control dial allthe way to the left shuts the systemoff.

Keep the system off for shortperiods only.

To keep stale air and mustinessfrom collecting, you should havethe fan running at all times.

When you switch to , fromor , the A/C stays on.

This helps prevent the windows fromrapidly fogging up when the air issuddenly routed away from thewindshield. If you want to turn theA/C off, press and release the A/Cbutton twice. The indicator in thebutton comes on and then goes off.

Select . The systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C.The A/C indicator does not comeon if it was off to start with.Select .Set the fan and temperaturecontrols to maximum level.

For your safety, make sure you havea clear view through all the windowsbefore driving.

To clear the windows faster, you canclose the dashboard corner vents byrotating the wheel below each vent.This sends more warm air to thewindshield defroster vents. Once thewindshield is clear, select fresh airmode to avoid fogging the windows.

Set the fan to the desired speed, orhigh for faster defrosting.Select . The systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C. TheA/C indicator will not come on if itwas off to start with.Adjust the temperature so theairflow feels warm.Select / to helpclear the rear window.To increase airflow to thewindshield, close the corner vents.

1.

2.3.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

To Defog and Defrost To Turn Everything OffTo Remove Exterior Frost or IceFrom the Windows


134

09/07/16 18:07:42 31SWA630_139

Climate Control System

Features

135

EX-L model

RECIRCULATIONBUTTON

MODE BUTTON

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

AUTOBUTTON

OFFBUTTON

FAN CONTROLBAR

AIR CONDITIONINGBUTTON

PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER/MIRRORSHEATER BUTTON

WINDSHIELDDEFROSTER BUTTON

DUAL BUTTON

09/07/16 18:07:46 31SWA630_140

On vehicles with navigation system The automatic climate controlsystem in your vehicle maintains theinterior temperature you select. Thesystem also adjusts the fan speedand airflow levels.

The driver’s side temperature andthe passenger’s side temperature canbe set separately. Turn the dial ofthe appropriate temperature controlclockwise to increase thetemperature of airflow. Turn the dialcounterclockwise to decrease it.Each set temperature is shown in thedisplay.

When you set the temperature to itslower limit ( ) or its upper limit( ), the system runs at fullcooling or heating only. It does notregulate the interior temperature.

When the indicator in the dualbutton is on, the driver’s side andpassenger’s side temperature can becontrolled independently (see page

).

The climate control system for yourvehicle can also be operated usingthe voice control system. See thenavigation system manual forcomplete details.

Press the AUTO button.

Set the desired temperature byturning the driver’s sidetemperature control dial. You willsee AUTO and the selectedtemperature in the display. Youcan also set the passenger’s sidetemperature by turning thepassenger’s side dial.

The system automatically selects theproper mix of conditioned and/orheated air that will, as quickly aspossible, raise or lower the interiortemperature to your preference.

1.

2.

140


Voice Control System Using Automatic Climate Control Temperature Control

136

09/07/16 18:07:59 31SWA630_141

▲ ▼

You can set the temperatures for thedriver’s side and the passenger’s sideseparately when this button ispressed (indicator is on). When theindicator in the DUAL button is off,the temperatures for both sides aresynchronized to the driver’s side settemperature. When defrost mode isselected, dual mode operation iscanceled.

If you press the OFF button, theclimate control system shuts offcompletely.

Keep the system completely offfor short periods only.

To keep stale air and mustinessfrom collecting, you should havethe fan running at all times.

You can manually select variousfunctions of the climate controlsystem when it is in fully automaticmode. All other features remainautomatically controlled. Making anymanual selection causes the wordAUTO in the display to go out.

Select the fan speed by pressingeither side of the fan speed controlbar ( or ). The fan speed isshown in vertical bars on the display.

This button turns the airconditioning on and off. You will seeA/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.

When you turn the A/C off, thesystem cannot regulate the insidetemperature if you set thetemperature control dial below theoutside temperature.

CONTINUED


Dual Button

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

To Turn Everything Off

Semi-automatic Operation

Fan ControlF

eatures

137

09/07/16 18:08:12 31SWA630_142

When the indicator in the button ison, air from the vehicle’s interior issent through the system again.When the indicator is off, air isbrought in from the outside of thevehicle (fresh air mode).

The outside air intakes for theclimate control system are at thebase of the windshield. Keep thisarea clear of leaves and other debris.

The system should be left in freshair mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.

Switch to recirculation mode whendriving through dusty or smokyconditions, then return to fresh airmode.

Pushing this button also turns thepower mirror heaters on and off.

This button turns the rear windowdefogger off and on (see page ).

Use the mode control button toselect the vents the air flows from.Some air will flow from thedashboard vents in all modes.

Air flows from the centerand corner vents in the dashboard.

Airflow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

Air flows from the floorvents.

Airflow is divided betweenthe floor and corner vents and thedefroster vents at the base of thewindshield.

80


Recirculation Button Rear Window DefoggerButton

Mode Control

138

09/07/16 18:08:27 31SWA630_143

Select . The systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C.Adjust the temperature with thedriver’s side temperature controlso the airflow feels warm.Select to help clear therear window.To increase airflow to thewindshield, close the corner vents.For faster defogging, manually setthe fan speed to high.

For your safety, make sure you havea clear view through all the windowsbefore driving.

This button directs the main airflowto the windshield for fasterdefrosting. It also overrides anymode selection you may have made.

When you select , the systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C. Forfaster defrosting, manually set thefan speed to high. You can alsoincrease airflow to the windshield byclosing the corner vents on thedashboard. To close the vents, rotatethe wheel under each corner vent.

When you turn off bypressing the button again, thesystem returns to its former settings.

1.

2.

3.

4.


Windshield Defroster ButtonF

eatures

139

09/07/16 18:08:35 31SWA630_144

The temperatures of the driver’s sideand the front passenger’s side can becontrolled independently when theindicator in the DUAL button is on.

To adjust the driver’s side, turn thedriver’s side temperature control dialon the climate control panel. Toadjust the passenger’s side, turn thepassenger’s side temperature controldial.

Push AUTO or . The selectedtemperatures appear in the display.When the indicator in the DUALbutton is off, you can adjust bothsides to the same temperature byadjusting the driver’s temperaturecontrol dial.

EX-L model only

Temperature Control

Dual Temperature Control

140

DRIVER’ S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

DUAL BUTTON PASSENGER’ S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

09/07/16 18:08:43 31SWA630_145

To set the driver’s side temperatureto a different value than thepassenger’s side, press the DUALbutton, then turn the temperaturecontrol dial on the control panel. Toset the passenger’s side to adifferent value than the driver’s side,turn the passenger’s sidetemperature control dial. You canadjust the passenger’s side withoutpressing the DUAL button first.

When you set the temperature to itslower limit or its upper limit, it will bedisplayed as ‘‘Lo’’ or ‘‘Hi’’.

Dual Temperature Control

Features

141

Driver’s Side Passenger’s Side

REAR POSITION FLOOR VENTS

09/07/16 18:08:49 31SWA630_146

The climate control system has twosensors: a sunlight sensor on top ofthe dashboard, and a temperatureand humidity sensor next to thesteering column. Do not cover thesensors or spill any liquid on them.

Sunlight and TemperatureSensors

Climate Control Sensors

142

SUNLIGHT SENSOR

TEMPERATURE SENSOR

09/07/16 18:08:55 31SWA630_147

An audio system is standard on allmodels. Read the appropriate pages(as shown below) to use yourvehicle’s audio system.

For LX models, see pagesthrough .

For EX and EX-L models withoutnavigation system, see pages

through .

For EX-L model with navigationsystem, see pages through .

145 156

157 193

194 249

Audio System

Features

143

LX model

EX-L models

EX models

09/07/16 18:09:07 31SWA630_148

Audio System

144

EX-L model with navigation system

09/07/16 18:09:12 31SWA630_149

Playing the AM/FM Radio (LX model)

Features

145

AMBUTTON

FMBUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

A.SEL/SCANBAR

TUNE KNOBPOWER/VOLUME KNOB

U.S. and Canadian LX models

SEEK/SKIP BAR

09/07/16 18:09:17 31SWA630_150

－

－

－

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: tune, seek, scan, the presetbuttons, and auto select.

Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the knob to the right to tune toa higher frequency, and turn it to theleft to tune to a lower frequency.

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on by pushing thepower/volume knob or the AM orFM button. Adjust the volume byturning the power/volume knob.

The scan function samplesall stations with strong signals on theselected band. To activate it, pressthe right side of the A. SEL/SCANbar, then release it. You will seeSCAN in the display. The system willscan for a station with a strong signal.When it finds one, it will stop andplay that station for about 10 seconds.

If you do nothing, the system willthen scan for the next strong stationand play it for 10 seconds. When itplays a station you want to listen to,press the SCAN side of the bar again.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM orFM button. On the FM band, ST willbe displayed if the station is broad-casting in stereo. Stereoreproduction on AM is not available.

The seek functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press the or side of theSEEK bar, then release it.

To Select a Station

TUNE

To Play the AM/FM Radio SCAN

SEEK/SKIP


146

09/07/16 18:09:27 31SWA630_151

－

－

－ If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons as previously described.

For information on AM/FM radiofrequencies and reception, see page

.

Each preset button canstore one frequency on AM and twofrequencies on FM.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. You can store one frequencyon FM1, and one frequency on FM2 with each preset button.

Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

, press theA. SEL side of the bar. This restoresthe presets you originally set.

Press the left side of theA. SEL/SCAN bar. You will seeA. SEL flashing in the display, andthe system goes into scan mode forseveral seconds. It stores thefrequencies of six AM, and twelveFM stations in the preset buttons.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed afterpressing a preset button if autoselect cannot find a strong station forevery preset button.

Pick a preset button (1 6), andhold it until you hear a beep.

If you aretraveling and can no longer receiveyour preset stations, you can use theauto select feature to find stations inthe local area.1.

2.

3.

4.

250

To turn off auto select

Preset AUTO SELECT


Features

147

09/07/16 18:09:38 31SWA630_152

－

－

－

－

－

Adjusts the volume levelbased on the vehicle speed.Press the SOUND (TUNE) knob

repeatedly to display the BASS,TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE, andSVC (speed-sensitive volumecompensation) settings.

Each mode is shown in the display asit changes. Turn the TUNE knob toadjust the setting to your liking.

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control knob to adjust theillumination of the audio system (seepage ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is turned off.

This function is set to MID as thedefault setting when the vehicleleaves the factory.

The SVC has four modes: SVC OFF,SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVCHIGH. Turn the TUNE knob to

adjust the setting to your liking. Ifyou feel the sound is too loud,choose low. If you feel the sound istoo quiet, choose high.

The SVC mode controls the volumebased on vehicle speed. The fasteryou go, the louder the audio volumebecomes. As you slow down, theaudio volume decreases.

The system will return to the audiodisplay about 5 seconds after youstop adjusting a mode.

When the level reaches the center,you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display.

Adjusts the bass.

Adjusts the treble.

Adjusts the front-to-backstrength of the sound.

Adjusts the side-to-side strength of the sound.

Except SVC adjustment

79

Adjusting the Sound SVC

Audio System Lighting

BASS

TREBLE

FADER

BALANCESpeed-sensitive VolumeCompensation (SVC)


148

09/07/16 18:09:54 31SWA630_153

Playing a Disc (LX model)

Features

149

REPEAT BUTTONEJECTBUTTON

RANDOM BUTTON

A.SEL/SCANBAR

CD/AUXBUTTON

TUNE KNOBPOWER/VOLUME KNOB

U.S. and Canadian LX model

LOADINDICATOR

SEEK/SKIP BAR DISP BUTTON

09/07/16 18:10:01 31SWA630_154

－

－

－

－

You operate the disc player with thesame controls used for the radio. Toselect the disc player, press the CD/AUX button. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in thedisplay.

To load or play a disc, the ignitionswitch must be in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position.

The specifications for compatibleMP3 files are:

Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)24/22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2)Bitrate:32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320 kbps(MPEG1)8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)Compatible with variable bitrateand multi-sessionMaximum layers(including ROOT): 8 layers

This audio system can also playCD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed inMP3 or WMA formats. Whenplaying a disc in MP3, you will see‘‘MP3’’ in the display. In WMAformat, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear in thedisplay. You can select up to 99folders, or up to 255 tracks/files.

If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc isprotected by digital rightsmanagement (DRM), the audio unitdisplays FORMAT, and then skips tothe next file.

Video CDs and DVDs do not work inthis unit.

To Play a Disc


150

NOTE:

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause thedisc to jam in the unit.

09/07/16 18:10:14 31SWA630_155

－

－

－

－

Each time you press the DISP button,the display shows you the text dataon a disc, if the disc was recordedwith text data.

You can see the album, artist, andtrack name in the display. If a disc isrecorded in MP3 or WMA, you cansee the folder and file name, and thealbum, artist, and track tag.

With the folder name, you will seethe FOLDER indicator in the display.The TRACK indicator is shown withthe file or track name.

Insert a disc about halfway into thedisc slot. The drive will pull the discin the rest of the way to play it. Youoperate the disc player with thesame controls used for the radio.The number of the current track isshown in the display. When playing adisc in MP3 or WMA, the numbersof the current folder and file areshown. The system will continuouslyplay a disc until you change modes.

You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this system.

The specifications for compatibleWMA files are:

Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHzBitrate:48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbpsCompatible with variable bitrateand multi-session.Maximum layers(including ROOT): 8 layers

CONTINUED

Text Data Display FunctionTo Load a Disc


Features

151

09/07/16 18:10:24 31SWA630_156

－＞

Each time youpress and release the side ofthe SEEK/SKIP bar, the player skipsforward to the beginning of the nexttrack (file in MP3 or WMA mode).Press and release the side, toskip backward to the beginning ofthe current track. Press it again toskip to the beginning of the previoustrack.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the or side of theSEEK/SKIP bar.

You can use the SEEK/SKIP barwhile a disc is playing to selectpassages and change tracks (files inMP3/WMA mode).

The display shows up to 10characters of selected text data (thefolder name, file name, etc.). If thetext data has more than 10characters, you will see the first 9characters and the indicator inthe display. Press and hold the DISPbutton until the next 10 charactersare shown.

You will also see some text dataunder these conditions:

When a new folder, file, or track isselected.

When you change the audio modeto play a disc with text data or inMP3 or WMA.

When you insert a disc, and thesystem begins to play.

When playing a CD-DA with textdata, the album and track name areshown in the display. With a disc inMP3 or WMA, the display shows thefolder and file name.

To Change or Select Tracks/Files

SEEK/SKIP


152

09/07/16 18:10:33 31SWA630_157

－

－

－－Toselect a different folder, turn theTUNE knob to move to thebeginning of the next folder. Turnthe knob to the right to skip to thenext folder, and to the left to move tothe beginning of the current folder.Turn it again to skip to the beginningof the previous folder. Turning theTUNE knob more than one clickskips several folders at a time.

To continuously replaya track (files in MP3 or WMA mode),press and release the RPT button.You will see ‘‘RPT’’ in the display.Press and hold the RPT button for 2seconds to turn it off.

This feature plays thetracks within a disc (the files in MP3or WMA mode) in random order. Toactivate random play, press andrelease the RDM button. In MP3 orWMA mode, press the RDM buttonrepeatedly to select RDM (within adisc random play). You will see‘‘RDM’’ in the display. Press theRDM button for 2 seconds to returnto normal play.

This feature,when activated, replays all files inthe selected folder in the order theyare compressed. To activate folderrepeat, press the RPT button twice.You will hear a beep and see F-RPTin the display. The systemcontinuously replays the currentfolder. Press the RPT button again toturn it off. Pressing the RDM button,or selecting a different folder withthe TUNE knob also turns off therepeat feature.

Each time you press and release theRPT button, the mode changes fromfile repeat to folder repeat, then tonormal play.

In MP3 or WMA mode In MP3 or WMA mode

CONTINUED

FOLDER SELECTION

REPEAT (TRACK/FILEREPEAT)

RANDOM (Random within adisc)FOLDER-REPEAT


Features

153

09/07/16 18:10:42 31SWA630_158

－－

－In MP3 or WMA modeIn MP3 or WMA mode

Thisfeature, when activated, samples thefirst file of each folder on the disc.To activate folder scan, press theSCAN bar twice. You will seeF-SCAN in the display.

The system plays the first file in thefirst folder for about 10 seconds. Ifyou do nothing, the system will thenplay the first files in the next foldersfor 10 seconds. After playing the firstfile in the last folder, the systemplays normally.

Pressing either side of the SEEK/SKIP bar, selecting a different folderwith the TUNE knob, or pressing theSCAN bar, also turns off folder scan.

The scan function samples all tracks(files in MP3 or WMA) on the disc inthe order they are recorded on thedisc. To activate scan, press andrelease the SCAN bar. You will seeSCAN in the display. You will get a10 second sampling of each track/file on the disc. Press and hold theSCAN button for about 2 seconds toget out of scan mode and play thelast track/file sampled.

Pressing either side of the SEEK/SKIP bar also turns off the scanfeature.

Thisfeature, when activated, plays allfiles on the selected folder in randomorder. To activate folder random,press the RDM button 2 times. Youwill hear a beep and see F-RDM inthe display. The system will thenselect and play files randomly. Thiscontinues until you deactivate folderrandom by pressing and holding theRDM button again, or by selecting adifferent folder with the TUNE knob.

Each time you press and release theRDM button, the mode changesfrom folder random play to randomplay (within a disc random play),then to normal play.

Each time you press and release theSCAN bar, the mode changes fromscan to folder scan, then to normalplay.

F-SCAN (FOLDER SCAN)SCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN)

FOLDER-RANDOM


154

09/07/16 18:10:53 31SWA630_159

If you turn the system off while adisc is playing, either with thepower/volume knob or by turningoff the ignition switch, the disc willstay in the drive. When you turn thesystem back on, the disc will beginplaying where it left off.

For information on how to handleand protect compact discs, see page

.

Press the eject button ( ) toremove the disc. If you eject the disc,but do not remove it from the slot,the system will automatically reloadthe disc after 10 seconds and put it inpause mode. To begin playing, pressthe CD/AUX button.

You can also eject the disc when theignition switch is off.

To play the radio when a disc isplaying, press the AM or FM button.Press the CD/AUX button again toswitch back to the disc player.

252

Protecting Discs

To Stop Playing a Disc


Features

155

09/07/16 18:11:01 31SWA630_160

The ejected disc will not be reloaded automatically.

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a disc, find thecause in the chart to the right. If youcannot clear the error message, takeyour vehicle to your dealer.The chart on the right explains theerror messages you may see in thedisplay while playing a disc.If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a disc, pressthe eject button. After ejecting thedisc, check it for damage ordeformation. If there is no damage,insert the disc again.For additional information ondamaged discs, see page .

The audio system will try to play thedisc. If there is still a problem, theerror message will reappear. Pressthe eject button, and pull out the disc.Insert a different disc. If the newdisc plays, there is a problem withthe first disc. If the error messagecycle repeats and you cannot clear it,take your vehicle to a dealer.

Cause SolutionError Message

253

Track/File format notsupported

Mechanical Error

Servo Error

Current track will be skipped. The nextsupported track or file plays automatically.Press the eject button and pull out the disc.Check the disc for serious damage, signs ofdeformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirtsee page 252 . Insert the disc again. If the codedoes not disappear, or the disc cannot beremoved, consult your dealer. Do not try toforce the disc out of the player.

Disc Player Error Messages (LX model)

156

CD FORMAT

BAD DISCCHECK MANUAL

PUSH EJECT

BAD DISCCHECK MANUAL

09/07/17 11:03:12 31SWA630_161

Playing the FM/AM Radio (EX and EX-L models without navigation system)

Features

157

BUTTON BUTTON

BUTTON

EX-L models EX models

AM BUTTON BUTTON

A.SELBUTTON

FMBUTTON

SCANBUTTON

VOL/SELECT KNOB VOL/SELECT KNOB

AM BUTTON

A.SELBUTTON

FMBUTTON

SCANBUTTON

SEEKBUTTON

SEEKBUTTON

SEEKBUTTON

SEEKBUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS PRESET BUTTONS PRESET BUTTONSPRESET BUTTONS

BUTTON BUTTON

09/07/16 18:11:26 31SWA630_162

－－

－


Use the SEEK button totune to a desired frequency. Pressthe button to tune to a higherfrequency, and the button totune to a lower frequency.

You can also operate the tunefunction by using the VOL/SELECTknob. Press the VOL/SELECT knoband you will see ‘‘SEL’’ in the display.Turn the knob right to tune to ahigher frequency, or left to tune to alower frequency. To turn it off, pressthe VOL/SELECT knob or

button, or button.The system will return to the normaldisplay about 10 seconds after youstop adjusting the tune mode.

The SEEK functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press and hold the or sideof the SEEK button until you hear abeep, then release it.

The scan function samplesall stations with strong signals on theselected band. To activate it, pressthe SCAN button, then release it.You will see SCAN in the display.When the system finds a strongsignal, it will stop and play thatstation for about 10 seconds.

If you do nothing, the system willthen scan for the next strong stationand play it for 10 seconds. When itplays a station you want to listen to,press the SCAN button again.

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on by pushing theFM or AM button. Adjust the volumeby turning the VOL/SELECT knob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to are displayed.To change bands, press the AM orFM button. On the FM band, ST willbe displayed if the station isbroadcasting in stereo. Stereoreproduction in AM is not available.

To Play the FM/AM Radio

To Select a Station

TUNE SEEK

SCAN


158

09/07/16 18:11:41 31SWA630_163

－－

－

If you aretraveling and can no longer receiveyour preset stations, you can use theauto select feature to find stations inthe local area.

Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A. SEL’’flashes in the display, and the systemgoes into scan mode for severalseconds. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM and twelve FM stations inthe preset buttons.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed afterpressing a preset button if autoselect cannot find a strong station forthat preset button.

If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons as previously described.

press theA. SEL button. This restores thepresets you originally set.

For information on FM/AM radiofrequencies and reception, see page

.


Select the desired band, AM orFM.


Pick a preset number (1 6), andhold it until you hear a beep.


1.

2.

3.

4.

250

To turn off auto select,

AUTO SELECTPreset


Features

159

09/07/16 18:11:53 31SWA630_164

－

－

－

－

－

－

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control knob to adjust theillumination of the audio system (seepage ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the system is turnedoff.

The SVC has four modes; SVC OFF,SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVCHIGH. Turn the VOL/SELECT knobto adjust the setting to your liking. Ifyou feel the sound is too loud,choose low. If you feel the sound istoo quiet, choose high.

This function is set to MID as thedefault setting when the vehicleleaves the factory.

The SVC mode controls the volumebased on vehicle speed. The fasteryou go, the louder the audio volumebecomes. As you slow down, theaudio volume decreases.


Adjusts the volume levelbased on the vehicle speed.

Each mode is shown in the display asit changes. Turn the VOL/SELECTknob to adjust the setting to yourliking. When the level reaches thecenter, you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display.

Press the sound ( ) button toselect an appropriate setting: bass,treble, fader, balance, subwoofer (ifequipped), and SVC (speed-sensitivevolume compensation). Turn theVOL/SELECT knob to adjust thesetting.

Adjusts the strength ofsound from the subwoofer speaker.

Adjusts the side-to-side strength of the sound.

Adjusts the front-to-backstrength of the sound.

Adjusts the treble.

Adjusts the bass.

79

If equipped

Adjusting the Sound

Audio System Lighting

SVC

SUBW

BALANCE

FADER

TREBLE

BAS

Speed-sensitive VolumeCompensation (SVC)


160

09/07/16 18:12:09 31SWA630_165

Your vehicle is capable of receivingXM Radio anywhere in Canada andthe United States, except Hawaii,Alaska, and Puerto Rico. XMCANADA is a registered businessname of Canadian Satellite Radio Inc.,and XM is a registered trademark ofSirius XM Radio, Inc.

XM Radio receives signals from twosatellites to produce clear, high-quality digital reception. It offersmany channels in several categories.Along with a large selection ofdifferent types of music, XM Radioallows you to view channel andcategory selections in the display.

Playing the XM Radio

Playing the XM Radio (EX-L model without navigation system)

Features

On EX-L without Navigation System

161

BUTTON

BUTTON

BUTTON

SEEKBUTTON

XMBUTTON

PRESET BUTTONSPRESET BUTTONS

SCANBUTTON

SEEKBUTTON

VOL/SELECT KNOB

09/07/16 18:12:21 31SWA630_166

－

－

▲ ▼ －

You may experience periods whenXM Radio does not transmit theartist’s name and song titleinformation. If this happens, there isnothing wrong with your system.In channel mode, you can select all

of the available channels. In categorymode, such as Jazz, Rock, Classical,etc., you can select all of thechannels within that category.

To listen to XM radio, turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or the ON (II) position. Push the

button to turn on the audiosystem, and press the ‘‘XM’’ button.Adjust the volume by turning theVOL/SELECT knob. The lastchannel you listened to will show inthe display.

To switch betweenchannel mode and category mode,press and hold the TITLE buttonuntil the mode changes.

Each time you press and release theTITLE button, the display changes inthe following sequence: channelname, channel number, category,artist name, and music title.

Press the SEEK button tochange channel selections. Press

for higher numbered channelsand for lower numberedchannels. In the category mode, youcan only select channels within thatcategory.

In thecategory mode, press either buttonto select another category.

Operating the XM Radio MODE

TUNE

CATEGORY ( or )


162

09/07/16 18:12:30 31SWA630_167

－

－

－

－

－

－

The scan function givesyou a sampling of all channels whilein the channel mode. In the categorymode, only the channels within thatcategory are scanned. To activatescan, press the SCAN button. Thesystem plays each channel innumerical order for a few seconds,then selects the next channel. Whenyou hear a channel you want tocontinue listening to, press thebutton again.

Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune to a desiredchannel.

In category mode, only channelswithin that category can be selected.In channel mode, all channels can beselected.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store thefirst six channels.

Press the XM button again. Storethe next six channels using steps 2and 3.

You can store up to 12preset channels using the six presetbuttons. Each button stores onechannel from the XM1 band and onechannel from the XM2 band.

To store a channel:

Press the XM button. Either XM1or XM2 will show in the display.

Pick the preset button you wantfor that channel. Press and holdthe button until you hear a beep.

Once a channel is stored, press andrelease the proper preset button totune to it.

XM is loading theaudio or program information.

The channelcurrently selected is no longerbroadcasting.

The encryptioncode is being updated. Wait until theencryption code is fully updated.Channels 0 and 1 should still worknormally.

The signal iscurrently too weak. Move the vehicleto an area away from tall buildings,and with an unobstructed view of thesouthern horizon.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

CONTINUED

SCAN XM Radio Display Messages

Preset

‘‘LOADING’’

‘‘OFF AIR’’

‘‘UPDATING’’

‘‘NO SIGNAL’’


Features

163

09/07/16 18:12:45 31SWA630_168

－

－

The XM satellites are in orbit overthe equator; therefore, objects southof the vehicle may cause satellitereception interruptions. To helpcompensate for this, ground-basedrepeaters are placed in majormetropolitan areas.

Satellite signals are more likely to beblocked by tall buildings andmountains the farther north youtravel from the equator. Carryinglarge items on a roof rack can alsoblock the signal.

The selected channelnumber does not exist, or is not partof your subscription, or this channelhas no artist or title information atthis time.

There is a problemwith the XM antenna. Please consultyour dealer.

‘‘ - - - - ’’

‘‘ANTENNA’’


164

Signal may be blocked bymountains or large obstacles tothe south.

Signal weaker inthese areas.

SATELLITE

GROUND REPEATER

09/07/16 18:12:53 31SWA630_169

Depending on where you drive, youmay experience reception problems.Interference can be caused by any ofthese conditions:

Driving on the north side of alarge commercial truck on aneast/west road.Driving in tunnels.Driving on a road beside a verticalwall, steep cliff, or hill to the southof you.Driving on the lower level of amulti-tiered road.Driving on a single lane roadalongside dense trees taller than50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.

Driving on the north side of aneast/west mountain road.

Large items carried on a roof rack.

There may be other geographicsituations that could affect XM Radioreception.

If your XM Radio service has expiredor you purchased your vehicle froma previous owner, you can listen to asampling of the broadcasts availableon XM Radio. With the ignitionswitch in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON(II) position, push the button toturn on the audio system and pressthe XM button. A variety of musictypes and styles will play.

After you’ve registered with XMRadio, keep your audio system in theXM radio mode while you wait foractivation. This should take about 30minutes.

If you decide to purchase XM Radioservice, contact XM Radio at

, or at1-800-852-9696. In Canada, contactXM CANADA at , orat 1-877-209-0079. You will need togive them your radio I.D. numberand your credit card number. To get

your radio I.D. number, press SEEKuntil ‘‘CH000’’ appears in the display.Your I.D. will appear in the display.

While waiting for activation, makesure your vehicle remains in an openarea with good reception. Once youraudio system is activated, you’ll beable to listen to XM Radio broadcasts.XM Radio will continue to send anactivation signal to your vehicle forat least 12 hours from the activationrequest. If the service has not beenactivated after 36 hours, contactXM Radio. In Canada, contact XMCANADA .

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

www.xmradio.com

www.xmradio.ca

Receiving XM Radio Service


Features

165

09/07/16 18:13:06 31SWA630_170

Playing Discs (EX and EX-L models without navigation system)

166

SCANBUTTON

SCANBUTTON

BUTTON

BUTTON BUTTON

EX-L models EX models

TITLE BUTTON

LOAD INDICATOR

SEEKBUTTON

SEEKBUTTON

REPEATBUTTON

DISCSLOT

LOADBUTTON

RANDOMBUTTON

LOADBUTTON

LOAD INDICATOR

DISCSLOT

RANDOMBUTTON

SEEKBUTTON

REPEATBUTTON

SEEKBUTTON

BUTTON

CD/AUX BUTTON

EJECT BUTTON EJECT BUTTON

CD BUTTON

TITLE BUTTON

BUTTONBUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

VOL/SELECT KNOB

PRESET BUTTONSPRESET BUTTONSPRESET BUTTONS

VOL/SELECT KNOB

09/07/16 18:13:18 31SWA630_171

To load or play discs, the ignitionswitch must be in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position.You operate the disc changer withthe same controls used for the radio.To select the disc changer, press theCD button (CD/AUX button onmodels with satellite radio), the discand track numbers are displayed.The system will continuously play adisc until you change modes.

When there are more than 99 foldersin a disc, the audio display onlyshows two digits.

This audio system can also playCD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed inMP3 or WMA formats. The numbersof the folder and track playing areshown in the display on the discplayer. A disc can support up to 255folders, and each folder can hold upto 255 playable files. A disc can holdup to 999 files in total.

CONTINUED

To Play a Disc


Features

167


09/07/16 18:13:26 31SWA630_172

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－－




Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)

Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHz

Number of layers (includingROOT): Over 8 layers

Supported standards:MPEG1 Audio Layer3MPEG2 Audio Layer3

Compatible with variable bitrateand multi-session

Bitrate:32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320 kbps(MPEG1)8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)

If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc isprotected by digital rightsmanagement (DRM), the audio unitdisplays UNSUPPORTED, and thenskips to the next file.

Bitrate:48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbpsCompatible with variable bitrateand multi-sessionSupported standards:WMA version 7/8/9Number of layers(including ROOT): Over 8 layers


168

NOTE:

09/07/16 18:13:38 31SWA630_173

Your vehicle’s in-dash disc changerholds up to six discs.

Press the LOAD button until youhear a beep and see ‘‘LOAD’’ onthe display.

To load only one CD, press andrelease the LOAD button.

The disc number for an emptyposition is highlighted and the reddisc load indicator starts blinking.

Insert the disc into the disc slotwhen the green disc load indicatorcomes on. Insert it only abouthalfway; the drive will pull it in therest of the way. You will see‘‘BUSY’’ in the display while thedisc load indicator turns red andblinks as the disc is loaded.


When the disc load indicator turnsgreen and ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in thedisplay again, insert the next discin the slot. Do not try to insert adisc until ‘‘LOAD’’ appears. Youcould damage the audio unit.

Repeat this until all six positionsare loaded. If you are not loadingall six positions, the system beginsplaying the last disc loaded.

You can also load a disc into anempty position while a disc is playingby pressing the appropriate presetbutton. The system stops playing thecurrent disc and starts the loadingsequence. It then plays the disc justloaded.

1.

2.

1.

3.

4.

5.

CONTINUED

Loading Discs in the In-dash DiscChanger


Features

169

09/07/16 18:13:48 31SWA630_174

＞

Each time you press the TITLEbutton, the display shows you thetext, if the disc was recorded withtext data.

You can see the album, artist, andtrack name in the display. If a disc isrecorded in MP3 or WMA, you cansee the folder and file name, and theartist, album, and track tag.

With the folder name, you will seethe FOLDER indicator in the display.The TRACK indicator is shown withthe file or track name.

The display shows up to 16characters of selected text data (thefolder name, file name, etc.).

If the text data has more than 16characters, you will see the first 15characters and the indicator onthe display. Press and hold theTITLE button until the next 16characters are shown. You can seeup to 31 characters of text data.

If you press and hold the TITLEbutton again, the display shows thefirst 15 characters again.

If any letter is not available, it isreplaced with ‘‘ . ’’ (dot) in the display.When the disc has no text data, youwill see ‘‘NO INFO’’ on the display.

Text Data Display Function


170

09/07/16 18:13:58 31SWA630_175

－

You will also see some text dataunder these conditions:

When a new folder, file, or track isselected.

When you change the audio modeto play a disc with text data or inMP3 or WMA.

When you insert a disc, and thesystem begins to play.

When playing a CD-DA with textdata, the album and track name areshown in the display. With a disc inMP3 or WMA, the display shows thefolder and file name.

You can use the SEEK button whilea disc is playing to change tracks(files in MP3/WMA mode).

In MP3/WMA mode, use theor button to select

folders in the disc, and use the SEEKbutton to change files.

To select a different disc, press theappropriate preset button (1 6). Ifyou select an empty position in thedisc changer, the system will try toload the disc in the next availableslot.

CONTINUED



Features

171

09/07/16 18:14:08 31SWA630_176

－－－

－

Each time youpress and release the side, theplayer skips forward to thebeginning of the next track (files inMP3/WMA mode). Press andrelease the side to skipbackward to the beginning of thecurrent track. Press it again to skipto the beginning of the previoustrack.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the , or the

button.

You can also operate the trackselection by using the VOL/SELECTknob. Press the VOL/SELECT knoband you will see ‘‘SEL’’ in the display.Turn the knob to switch the tracknumber. Press the VOL/SELECTknob or button to set yourselection. To turn it off, press the

button.

Toselect a different folder, press the

or button. Press thebutton to skip to the next

folder, and the button to skipto the previous folder.

You can also operate the folder andfile selection by using the VOL/SELECT knob. Press the VOL/SELECT knob and you will see SELin the display, Turn the knob toswitch the folder number and pressthe knob to set your selection. Toturn it off, press the buttonrepeatedly.

To continuously replaya track (file in MP3/WMA mode),press and release the RPT button.You will see RPT in the display.Press and hold the RPT button toturn it off.

This feature,when activated, replays all the filesin the selected folder in the orderthey are compressed in MP3/WMA.To activate folder repeat mode, pressthe RPT button repeatedly until yousee F-RPT in the display. The systemcontinuously replays the currentfolder. Press and hold the RPTbutton to turn it off.


In MP3 or WMA mode

In MP3 or WMA mode

SEEK/SKIPFOLDER SELECTION

REPEAT (TRACK/FILEREPEAT)

FOLDER-REPEAT


172

09/07/16 18:14:26 31SWA630_177

－－－

To continuouslyreplay the current disc, press andrelease the RPT button repeatedlyuntil you see D-RPT in the display.Press and hold the RPT button for 2seconds again to turn it off.

Each time you press and release theRPT button, the mode changes fromfile repeat to folder repeat, to discrepeat then to normal play.

This feature plays thetracks within a disc in random order.In MP3/WMA mode, all files in allfolders are played in random order.To activate random mode, press theRDM button repeatedly until you seeRDM in the display. Press and holdthe RDM button to turn it off.

Thisfeature, when activated, plays thefiles in the current folder in randomorder, rather than in the order theyare compressed in MP3/WMA. Toactivate folder random play, pressthe RDM button. You will seeF-RDM in the display. The systemwill then select and play filesrandomly. This continues until youdeactivate folder random play bypressing and holding the RDMbutton.

Each time you press and release theRDM button, the mode changesfrom folder random play, to within adisc random play, then to normalplay.

In MP3 or WMA mode

CONTINUED

DISC-REPEAT RANDOM (Random within adisc) FOLDER-RANDOM


Features

173

09/07/16 18:14:34 31SWA630_178

－－

－The SCAN functionsamples all the tracks on the disc inthe order they are recorded on thedisc (all files in the selected folder inMP3 or WMA mode). To activate thescan feature, press and release theSCAN button. You will see ‘‘SCAN’’in the display. You will get a 10second sampling of each track/file inthe disc/folder. Press and hold theSCAN button to get out of scanmode and play the last track sampled.

This feature,when activated, samples the first filein each folder on the disc in theorder they are recorded. To activatethe folder scan feature, press theSCAN button repeatedly. You willsee ‘‘F-SCAN’’ in the display. Thesystem will then play the first file inthe main folders for about 10seconds. When it plays a file that youwant to continue listening to, pressand hold the SCAN button. Whenthe system samples the first file ofall folders, F-SCAN is canceled, andthe system plays normally.

Each time you press and release theSCAN button, the mode changesfrom file scan, folder scan, disc scan,then to normal play.

This functionsamples the first track of each discin the in-dash disc changer in theorder they are stored. To activatedisc scan, press the SCAN buttonrepeatedly until you see D-SCAN inthe display. The system will thenplay the first track/file of the firstdisc for approximately 10 seconds.After playing the first track/file ofthe last disc, the system playsnormally.

In MP3 or WMA modeSCANFOLDER-SCAN

DISC-SCAN


174

09/07/16 18:14:41 31SWA630_179

＊

＊

Press the AM, FM, AUX button, orCD/AUX, XM button to switch tothe radio or satellite radio (U.S.models), while a disc is playing.Press the CD button again to playthe disc.

If you turn the system off while adisc is playing, either with the( ) button or by turning off theignition switch, the disc will stay inthe drive. When you turn the systemback on, the disc will begin playingwhere it left off.

To remove a different disc from thechanger, first select it with theappropriate preset button. When thatdisc begins playing, press the ejectbutton. Continue pressing the ejectbutton to remove all the discs fromthe changer.

You can also eject discs when theignition switch is off. The disc thatwas last selected is ejected first.

To remove the disc currently in play,press the eject button. When a disc isremoved from a slot, the systemautomatically begins the loadsequence so you can load anotherdisc in that position. If you do notremove the disc from the changerwithin 10 seconds, the disc willreload into the slot. Then the systemreturns to the previous mode (AM,FM, or XM Radio ).

: On U.S. EX-L model

To Stop Playing a Disc Removing Discs from the In-dashDisc Changer


Features

175

09/07/16 18:14:49 31SWA630_180

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a disc, find thecause in the chart to the right. If youcannot clear the error message, takeyour vehicle to your dealer.

The ejected disc will not be reloaded automatically.

The chart on the right explains theerror messages you may see in thedisplay while playing a disc.If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a disc, pressthe eject button. After ejecting thedisc, check it for damage ordeformation. If there is no damage,insert the disc again.For additional information ondamaged discs, see page .

CauseError Message

The audio system will try to play thedisc. If there is still a problem, theerror message will reappear. Pressthe eject button, and pull out the disc.Insert a different disc. If the newdisc plays, there is a problem withthe first disc. If the error messagecycle repeats and you cannot clear it,take your vehicle to a dealer.

Solution

253

Track/File format notsupported

Mechanical Error

Servo Error

Current track will be skipped. The nextsupported track or file plays automatically.Press the eject button and pull out the disc(s).Check the disc for serious damage, signs ofdeformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirtsee page 253 . Insert the disc again. If the codedoes not disappear, or the disc(s) cannot beremoved, consult your dealer. Do not try toforce the disc out of the player.

Disc Player Error Messages (EX and EX-L models without navigation system)

176

UNSUPPORTEDFORMATBAD DISC

PLEASE CHECKOWNERSMANUAL

PUSH EJECTBAD DISC


09/07/16 18:15:00 31SWA630_181

－＋－＋

Playing an iPod (Canadian EX model and EX-L model without navigation system)

Features

177

BUTTON

USB INDICATOR

BUTTON BUTTON

EX-L models

iPodINDICATOR

BUTTON

RANDOM BUTTON REPEAT BUTTON

CD/AUX BUTTON

TITLE BUTTON

USB INDICATOR

EX models

iPodINDICATOR

AUX BUTTON

TITLE BUTTON


SEEK (SKIP ) BUTTON SEEK (SKIP ) BUTTON SEEK (SKIP ) BUTTON SEEK (SKIP ) BUTTON

VOL/SELECT KNOBVOL/SELECT KNOB

BUTTONBUTTON

09/12/10 10:52:40 31SWA630_182

Do not connect your iPod using ahub.

Do not keep the iPod in thevehicle. Direct sunlight and highheat will damage it.

Do not use an extension cablebetween the USB adapter cableequipped with your vehicle andyour dock connector.

iPods compatible with your audiosystem using the USB adapter cableare:

This audio system can play the audiofiles on the iPod with the samecontrols used for the in-dash discchanger. To play an iPod, connect itto the USB adapter cable in theupper glove box by using your dockconnector, then press the CD/AUXor AUX button. The ignition switchmust be in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position. The iPod will alsobe recharged with the ignition switchin these positions.

The system will only play songsstored on the iPod with iTunes.

iPod and iTunes are registeredtrademarks owned by Apple Inc.

Use only compatible iPods with thelatest software. iPods that are notcompatible will not work in this audiounit.

Some devices cannot be poweredor charged via the USB adapter. Ifthis is the case, use the accessoryadapter to supply power to yourdevice.

We recommend backing up yourdata before playing it.

ModeliPod classiciPod with video(iPod 5thgeneration)iPod nanoiPod nano2nd generationiPod nano3rd generationiPod nano4th generationiPod touchiPod touch2nd generation

SoftwareVer. 1.0 or more

Ver. 1.2 or more

Ver. 1.2 or moreVer. 1.1.2 or more

Ver. 1.0 or more

Ver. 1.0.2 or more

Ver. 1.1.1 or moreVer. 2.1.1 or more

To Play an iPod


178

NOTE:

09/12/10 10:52:50 31SWA630_183

Connect your dock connector tothe iPod correctly and securely.

Install the dock connector to theUSB adapter cable securely.

If the iPod indicator does not appearin the audio display, check theconnections, and try to reconnect theiPod a few times.

If the audio system still does notrecognize the iPod, the iPod mayneed to be reset. Follow theinstructions that came with youriPod, or you can find resetinstructions online at

Push the release button to releasethe USB adapter cable.

Open the upper glove box.1.

2.

3.

4.

www.apple.com/itunes/

CONTINUED

Connecting an iPod


Features

179

DOCK CONNECTOR

USB ADAPTERCABLE

USB ADAPTER CABLE

RELEASE BUTTON

09/12/10 10:52:58 31SWA630_184

－＋

－

＞

Use the SKIP button while an iPod isplaying to change files.

Each time you press the(SKIP ) button, the system

skips forward to the beginning of thenext file. Press the (SKIP )button, to skip backward to thebeginning of the current file. Press itagain to skip to the beginning of theprevious file.

To move rapidly within a file, pressand hold either side ( or )of the SKIP button.

Each time you press the TITLEbutton the display mode switchesbetween the album name, the songname, the artist name, or name off(which turns off the text display).

The display shows up to 16characters of the selected data. If thetext data has more than 16characters, you will see the first 15characters and the indicator inthe display. Press and hold theTITLE button until the next 16characters are shown.

To Change or Select FilesText Data Display Function

SKIP


180

09/12/10 10:53:06 31SWA630_185

－

－

The display shows items on theselected list. Turn the VOL/SELECT knob to select an item, thenpress the VOL/SELECT knob to setyour selection.

If you select ‘‘ALL,’’ all available fileson the selected list are played.

Pressing the button goes backto the previous display and pressingthe TITLE button cancels thissetting mode.

You can select any type of repeat andshuffle mode by using the RPTbutton or the RDM button.

This featurecontinuously plays a file. To activatethe repeat feature, press the RPTbutton. You will see ‘‘RPT’’ in thedisplay. To turn it off, press the RPTbutton again.

This featureplays all available files in a selectedlist (playlists, artists, albums orsongs) in random order. To activatethe shuffle all feature, press theRDM button. You will see ‘‘RDM’’ inthe display. To turn it off, press andhold the RDM button.

You can also select a file from anylist on the iPod menu: playlists,artists, albums and songs, by usingthe VOL/SELECT knob. Push theVOL/SELECT knob to switch thedisplay to an iPod menu, then turnthe VOL/SELECT knob to select adesired list. Press the VOL/SELECTknob to set your selection.

CONTINUED

To Select Repeat or Shuffle Mode:

REPEAT

SHUFFLE ALL


Features

181

09/12/10 10:53:13 31SWA630_186

－

＊

＊

This featureplays all available albums in aselected list (playlists, artists, albumsor songs) in random order. The filesin each album are played in therecorded order. To activate theshuffle album feature, press theRDM button repeatedly. You will see‘‘F-RDM’’ in the display. To turn itoff, press and hold the RDM button.

Each time you press the RDMbutton, the mode changes fromshuffle all play to shuffle album play,then to normal play.

If you reconnect the same iPod, thesystem may begin playing where itleft off, depending on what mode theiPod is in when it is reconnected.

When you disconnect the iPod whileit is playing, the display shows ‘‘USBNO DATA.’’

If you see an error message in thedisplay, see page .

To play the radio when an iPod isplaying, press the FM, AM or XMbutton. If a disc is in the audio unit,press the CD/AUX or CD button toplay the disc.

You can disconnect the iPod at anytime when you see the ‘‘OK todisconnect’’ message in the iPoddisplay. Always make sure you seethe ‘‘OK to disconnect’’ message inthe iPod display before youdisconnect it. Make sure to followthe iPod’s instructions on how todisconnect the dock connector fromthe USB adapter cable.

The displayed message mayvary on models or versions. Onsome models, there is nomessage to disconnect.

:

183

SHUFFLE ALBUM To Stop Playing Your iPod

iPod Error Messages

Disconnecting an iPod


182

09/12/10 10:53:21 31SWA630_187

If you see an error message on theaudio display while playing an iPod,find the solution in the chart to theright. If you cannot clear the errormessage, take your vehicle to yourdealer.

CauseErrorMessage

Solution

USB ROM Error

Abnormal power source

No files in iPod

Use of unsupporteddevice

Use of unsupported iPod

Recognition failure ofiPod

There is problem with the USB adapter unit.Appears when the overcurrent protectionfeature of the system stops supplying power toUSB because an incompatible device isconnected. Disconnect the device. Then, turnthe audio system off, and turn it on again. Donot reconnect the device that caused the error.Appears when the iPod is empty. Store somefiles in the iPod.Appears when an unsupported device isconnected. Disconnect the device.Appears when an unsupported iPod isconnected. See page 178 for the specificationinformation for iPods. If it appears when asupported iPod is connected, update the iPodsoftware to the newer version.Appears when the system dose notacknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.

iPod Error Messages (Canadian EX model and EX-L model without navigation system)

Features

183

USB ERRORBAD USBDEVICE


NO SONG

UNSUPPORTED

UNSUPPORTEDVER.

CONNECTRETRY

09/12/10 10:53:26 31SWA630_188

＋－－＋

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Canadian EX model and EX-L model without navigation system)

184

BUTTON

USB INDICATOR

BUTTON BUTTON

EX-L models

BUTTON


CD/AUX BUTTON

TITLE BUTTON

USB INDICATOR

EX models

TITLE BUTTON


SCANBUTTON

SCANBUTTON

AUX BUTTON

SEEK (SKIP ) BUTTONSEEK (SKIP ) BUTTON SEEK (SKIP ) BUTTON SEEK (SKIP ) BUTTON

BUTTONBUTTON

VOL/SELECT KNOB VOL/SELECT KNOB

09/12/10 10:53:36 31SWA630_189

＊

＊

CONTINUED

This audio system can operate theaudio files on a USB flash memorydevice with the same controls usedfor the in-dash disc changer. To playa USB flash memory device, connectit to the USB adapter cable in theupper glove box, then press the CD/AUX or AUX button.

The audio system reads and playsthe audio files on the USB flashmemory device in MP3, WMA orAAC formats. Depending on theformat, the display shows MP3,WMA or AAC when a USB flashmemory device is playing. The USBflash memory device limit is up to700 folders or up to 65535 files.

Only AAC format files recordedwith iTunes are playable on thisaudio unit.

The recommended USB flashmemory devices are 256 MB orhigher, and formatted with the FATfile system. Some digital audioplayers may be compatible as well.

Do not use an extension cable tothe USB adapter cable equippedwith your vehicle.

Do not connect your USB flashmemory device using a hub.

Do not use a device such as a cardreader or hard drive as the deviceor your files may be damaged.

Some USB flash memory devices(such as devices with security lock-out features, etc.) will not work inthis audio unit.

Do not keep a USB flash memorydevice in the vehicle. Directsunlight and high heat will damageit.

We recommend backing up yourdata before playing a USB flashmemory device.


Depending on the software thefiles were made with, it may not bepossible to play some files, ordisplay some text data.

Depending on the type andnumber of files, it may take sometime before they begin to play.

:

To Play a USB Flash MemoryDevice


Features

185

NOTE:

09/12/10 10:53:47 31SWA630_190

－－

－

－

－

－

－

－－

－

－

－

－－

－

－－

The specifications for compatibleAAC files are:

Bitrate:8 320 kbpsSupported standards:MPEG4/AAC LCMPEG2/AAC LCPartition: Top partition onlyMaximum layers: 8


Bitrate:48 320/VBR kbps (Max 384)

Maximum layers: 8Partition: Top partition only


Supported standards:WMA version 7/8/9

Sampling frequency:8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48 kHz


Bitrate:32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320/VBR kbps(MPEG1)8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/144/160/VBR kbps(MPEG2)


Supported standards:MPEG1 Audio Layer3MPEG2 Audio LSF Layer3Partition: Top partition onlyMaximum layers: 8


186

Combining a low sampling f requencywith a low bitrate may result inextremely degraded sound quality.

09/12/10 10:54:01 31SWA630_191

CONTINUED

When the USB flash memory deviceis connected, the USB indicator isshown in the display.

Connect the USB flash memorydevice to the USB connectorcorrectly and securely.

Open the upper glove box.


In WMA or AAC format, DRM(digital rights management) filescannot be played. If the system findsa DRM file, the audio unit displaysUNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skipsto the next file.

1.

2.

3.

Connecting a USB Flash MemoryDevice


Features

187

NOTE:

USB ADAPTER CABLE

RELEASE BUTTON

USB ADAPTER CABLE

09/12/10 10:54:10 31SWA630_192

－＋

－

－

＞

Use the SKIP button while a USBflash memory device is playing tochange files.

Each time you press the(SKIP ) button, the system

skips forward to the beginning of thenext file. Press the (SKIP )button, to skip backward to thebeginning of the current file. Press itagain to skip to the beginning of theprevious file.

To move rapidly within a file, pressand hold either side ( or )of the SKIP button.

Each time you press the TITLEbutton, the display mode shows youin sequence, the folder name, the filename, the artist name, the albumname, the song name, or name off(which turns off the text display).

The display shows up to 16characters of the selected data. If thetext data has more than 16characters, you will see the first 15characters and the indicator inthe display. Press and hold theTITLE button until the next 16characters are shown.

Toselect a different folder, press the

button or button.Press the button to skip tothe next folder, and press the

button to skip to thebeginning of the previous folder.

To Change or Select FilesText Data Display Function

SKIP

FOLDER SELECTION


188

09/12/10 10:54:21 31SWA630_193

CONTINUED

You can select any type of repeat,random and scan modes by using theRPT button, RDM button, or SCANbutton.

Pressing the button goes backto the previous display and pressingthe TITLE button cancels thissetting mode.

You can also select a folder or file byusing the VOL/SELECT knob. Pushthe VOL/SELECT knob to switchthe display to the folder or file list,then turn the VOL/SELECT knob toselect a folder or file. Press theVOL/SELECT knob to set yourselection.

To Select a File from Folder and FileLists

To Select Repeat, Random or ScanMode:


Features

189

09/12/10 10:54:27 31SWA630_194

－－－This featurecontinuously plays a file. To activatethe repeat feature, press the RPTbutton. You will see ‘‘RPT’’ in thedisplay. To turn it off, press and holdthe RPT button.

This featurereplays all the files in the selectedfolder in the order they are stored.To activate the folder repeat feature,press the RPT button repeatedly.You will see ‘‘F-RPT’’ in the display.To turn it off, press and hold theRPT button.


This feature plays allthe files in random order. To activatethe track random feature, press theRDM button. You will see ‘‘RDM’’ inthe display. To turn it off, press andhold the RDM button.

REPEAT FOLDER REPEAT RANDOM


190

09/12/10 10:54:32 31SWA630_195

－－－

Each time you press and release theSCAN button, the mode changesfrom file scan to folder scan, then tonormal play.

This featuresamples the first file in each folder inthe order they are stored. Toactivate the folder scan feature,press the SCAN button repeatedly.You will see ‘‘F-SCAN’’ in the display.You will get a 10 second sampling ofthe first file in each folder. Press andhold the SCAN button to get out ofthe folder scan mode and play thelast file sampled.

This feature samples allfiles in the current folder in theorder they are stored. To activatethe scan feature, press the SCANbutton. You will see ‘‘SCAN’’ in thedisplay. You will get a 10 secondsampling of each file in the folder.Press and hold the SCAN button toget out of the scan mode and playthe last file sampled.

Thisfeature plays the files in the currentfolder in random order. To activatethe folder random feature, press theRDM button repeatedly. You will see‘‘F-RDM’’ in the display. To turn itoff, press and hold the RDM button.

Each time you press the RDMbutton, the mode changes from trackrandom, play to folder random play,then to normal play.

FOLDER SCANSCANFOLDER RANDOM


Features

191

09/12/10 10:54:37 31SWA630_196

If you see an error message in thedisplay, see page .

You can disconnect the USB flashmemory device at any time even ifthe USB mode is selected on theaudio system. Always follow the USBflash memory device’s instructionswhen you remove it.

If you reconnect the same USB flashmemory device, the system willbegin playing where it left off.

To play the radio when a USB flashmemory device is playing, press theFM, AM or XM button. If a disc is inthe audio unit, press the CD/AUX orCD button to play the disc.

When you disconnect the USB flashmemory device while it is playing,the display shows ‘‘NO DATA.’’

193

USB Flash Memory Device ErrorMessages

To Stop Playing a USB FlashMemory Device

Disconnecting a USB Flash MemoryDevice


192

09/12/10 10:54:44 31SWA630_197

If you see an error message on theaudio display while playing a USBflash memory device, find thesolution in the chart to the right. Ifyou cannot clear the error message,take your vehicle to your dealer.

CauseErrorMessage

Solution

USB ROM Error

Abnormal power source

Use of unsupported files

No files in USB flashmemory device

Use of unsupported USBflash memory device

There is problem with the USB adapter unit.Appears when the overcurrent protectionfeature of the system stops supplying power toUSB because an incompatible device isconnected. Disconnect the device. Then, turnthe audio system off, and turn it on again. Donot reconnect the device that caused the error.Appears when the files in the USB flashmemory device are DRM or an unsupportedformat. This error message appears for about 3seconds, then plays the next song.Appears when the USB flash memory device isempty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC filesin the USB flash memory device. Save someMP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flashmemory device.Appears when an unsupported device isconnected. See page 186 for the specificationinformation for the USB flash memory device.If it appears when the supported device isconnected, reconnect the device.

USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (Canadian EX model and EX-L model without navigation system)

Features

193

USB ERRORBAD USBDEVICE


UNPLAYABLEFILE

NO SONG

UNSUPPORTED

09/12/10 10:54:48 31SWA630_198

Playing the AM/FM Radio (EX-L model with navigation system)

194

SOUND ICON

TUNE BAR

AM/FM BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

FM2 ICON

AM ICONFM1 ICON

AUTO SELECT ICON

BACK GROUND ICON

PRESET BUTTONS

U.S. model is shown.

09/07/16 18:18:07 31SWA630_199

－

▲ ▼

▲

▼


Use the TUNE bar to tunethe radio to a desired frequency.Press the side of the bar to tuneto a higher frequency, and press the

side to tune to a lowerfrequency.

Press and hold the or side ofthe TUNE bar until you hear twobeeps to change the frequencyrapidly. Release the bar when thedisplay reaches the desiredfrequency.

The audio system can also beoperated by voice control. See thenavigation system manual forcomplete details.

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on by pushing thepower/volume knob or the AM/FMbutton. Adjust the volume by turningthe power/volume knob.

Pushing the AUDIO button will alsoturn on the system.

You can also operate the audiosystem without using the controlicons on the audio screen. Use thecontrol buttons on the left side of thescreen. The status bar appears onthe bottom of the screen each timeyou operate any of the controlbuttons. On the navigation screen,you can also see audio information

by touching the AUDIO INFO iconon the lower half of the screen.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to are displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton, or touch the desired bandicon (FM1, FM2, AM, XM1, or XM2).On the FM band, STEREO will bedisplayed if the station isbroadcasting in stereo. Stereoreproduction on AM is not available.

For information on XM Radio, seepage .200

CONTINUED

To Select a Station

TUNE

Voice Control System

To Play the AM/FM Radio


Features

195

09/07/16 18:18:20 31SWA630_200

－

－

▲ ▼

－

Each preset button’s frequency isshown on the bottom of the audiodisplay.

If you do nothing, the system willthen scan for the next strong stationand play it for 10 seconds. When itplays a station you want to listen to,press the SCAN button again.


Select the desired band, AM orFM. You can store one frequencyon FM1, and one frequency on FM2 with each preset button.


Pick a preset button, and hold ituntil you hear a beep.


The seek functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press and hold the or side ofthe TUNE bar until you hear a beep,then release it.

The scan function samplesall stations with strong signals on theselected band. To activate it, pressthe SCAN button, then release it.You will see SCAN in the display.When the system finds a strongsignal, it will stop and play thatstation for about 10 seconds.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Preset

SEEK

SCAN


196

09/07/16 18:18:29 31SWA630_201

－

Press the AUDIO button to view theaudio control icons, then touch theAUTO SEL icon. You will see AUTOSEL flashing in the display, and thesystem goes into scan mode forseveral seconds. It stores thefrequencies of six AM, and twelveFM stations in the preset buttons.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed afterpressing a preset button if autoselect cannot find a strong station forevery preset button.

If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons as previously described.

press theAUTO SEL icon. This restores thepresets you originally set.

For information on AM/FM radiofrequencies and reception, see page

.

If you aretraveling and can no longer receiveyour preset stations, you can use theauto select feature to find stations inthe local area.

250

To turn off auto select,


AUTO SELECTF

eatures

197

09/07/16 18:18:38 31SWA630_202

－

－

－

－

－

－

You can adjust the sound on thenavigation screen. To adjust thesound, push the AUDIO button, thenenter the sound grid by touching theSOUND icon on the display.

Adjusts the bass.

Adjusts the side-to-side strength of the sound.To adjust the left/right balance,touch the L or R icon.

Adjusts thestrength of sound from thesubwoofer speaker. To adjust thesound strength, touch or

on each side of the adjustmentbar.

The right upper display shows youthe current setting of the soundstrength coming from each speaker.

The SVC modecontrols the volume based on vehiclespeed. The faster you go, the louderthe audio volume becomes. As youslow down, the audio volumedecreases. Touch the appropriateicon (Low, Mid, Hi, Off) to select themode.

Adjusts the treble. Toadjust the treble and bass, toucheither or on the treble orbass adjustment bar. The adjustmentbar on the lower right display showsyou the current setting.

Adjusts the front-to-backstrength of the sound. To adjust thefront/rear fader, touch the FR or RRicon.

Adjusting the Sound

BASS

BALANCE

SUBWOOFER

SVC (speed-sensitive volumecompensation)

TREBLE

FADER


198

SPEAKER SETTING

BASS/TREBLE SETTINGSOUND ICON

09/07/16 18:18:53 31SWA630_203

You can select the backgroundscreen to display the sound level.There are three screen modes: level(the sound level is shown with thevertical bars), spectrum analysis (thesound level appears as ripples ofwater), and off. Each time you touchthe background icon, the displaychanges.


You can also select the icon with thejoystick. Move it up and down tomove the highlighting and scrollthrough lists. Select the icon, thenmove the joystick to left or right tochange the setting.

This function is set to MID as thedefault setting when the vehicleleaves the factory. If you feel thesound is too loud, choose low. If youfeel the sound is too quiet, choose Hi.

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control knob to adjust theillumination of the control panel (seepage ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is turned off.

79

Audio System LightingScreen Mode


Features

199

09/07/16 18:19:01 31SWA630_204

Playing the XM Radio (EX-L model with navigation system)

200

TUNE BAR

SCAN BUTTON

JOYSTICK

AUDIO BUTTON

XM RADIOBUTTON

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB

PRESET BUTTONS

PRESET CHANNELNUMBER

XM RADIO ICON MODE ICON

CATEGORYINDICATOR

AM/FM BUTTON

09/07/16 18:19:05 31SWA630_205

－To listen to XM Radio, turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or the ON (II) position. Push thepower/volume knob to turn on theaudio system, and press the CD/XMbutton. Adjust the volume by turningthe knob. The last channel youlistened to will show in the display.

To switch betweenchannel mode and category mode,touch the MODE icon. In channelmode, you can select all of theavailable channels. In category mode,such as Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.,you can select all of the channelswithin that category. Each time youtouch and release the MODE icon,the display changes between thechannel mode and the categorymode.

You can also change to the XMRadio while you are listening to anFM station, AM station, disc, PCcard, etc., by touching the XM1 orXM2 icon on the audio display.

You can also operate the radio usingthe control buttons on the left side ofthe screen. The status bar appearson the bottom of the screen eachtime you press any of the controlbuttons. On the navigation screen,you can also see the audioinformation by touching the AUDIOINFO icon on the lower part of thescreen.

Your vehicle is capable of receivingXM Radio anywhere in the UnitedStates and Canada, except Hawaii,Alaska, and Puerto Rico. XM is aregistered trademark of Sirius XMRadio , Inc. and XM CANADA is aregistered business name ofCanadian Satellite Radio Inc.

XM Radio receives signals from twosatellites to produce clear, high-quality digital reception. It offersmany channels in several categories.Along with a large selection ofdifferent types of music, XM Radioallows you to view channel andcategory selections in the display.When you press and hold theAUDIO button, the display alsoshows all XM information.

CONTINUED

Operating the XM Radio MODE


Features

201

09/07/16 18:19:14 31SWA630_206

－－

－

－

▼▲

Pick the preset button (icon) youwant for that channel. Press andhold the button (icon) until youhear a beep.

In category mode, only channelswithin that category can be selected.In channel mode, all channels can beselected.

Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune to a desiredchannel.

Press the XM button. Either XM1or XM2 will show in the display.

To store a channel:

You can store up to 12preset channels using each presetbutton or preset icons on the screen.Each preset button or icon storesone channel from the XM1 band andone channel from the XM2 band.

Press the TUNE bar tochange channel selections. Press

for higher numbered channelsand for lower numberedchannels. In the category mode, youcan only select channels within thatcategory.

Press and holdeither side of the TUNE bar( or ) until you hear a beepto select another category.

On the audio display, you will see theselected CHANNEL (number),CATEGORY, NAME (artist name),and TITLE (music title).

You may experience periods whenXM Radio does not transmit theartist’s name and song titleinformation. If this happens, there isnothing wrong with your system.

The scan function givesyou a sampling of all channels whilein the channel mode. In the categorymode, only the channels within thatcategory are scanned. To activatescan, press the SCAN button. Thesystem plays each channel innumerical order for a few seconds,then selects the next channel. Whenyou hear a channel you want to listento, press the button again.

1.

2.

3.

PresetTUNE

CATEGORY

SCAN


202

09/07/16 18:19:28 31SWA630_207

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

The signal iscurrently too weak. Move the vehicleto an area away from tall buildings,and with an unobstructed view of thesouthern horizon.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store thefirst six channels.

Press the XM button again ortouch the other XM icon (XM1 orXM2) on the audio display. Storethe next six channels using steps 2and 3.

Once a channel is stored, press andrelease the proper preset button(icon) to tune to it. Each presetbutton’s channel is shown on thebottom of the audio display.

The selected channelnumber does not exist or is not partof your subscription.

There is a problemwith the XM antenna. Please consultyour dealer.

This channel has noartist or title information at this time.

XM is loading theaudio or program information.

The channelcurrently selected is no longerbroadcasting.

The encryptioncode is being updated. Wait until theencryption code is fully updated.Channels 0 and 1 should still worknormally.

4.

5.

CONTINUED

‘‘NO SIGNAL’’XM Radio Display Messages

‘‘ - - - - ’’

‘‘ANTENNA’’

‘‘NO INFO’’

‘‘LOADING’’

‘‘OFF AIR’’

‘‘UPDATING’’


Features

203

09/07/16 18:19:40 31SWA630_208

The XM satellites are in orbit overthe equator; therefore, objects southof the vehicle may cause satellitereception interruptions. To helpcompensate for this, ground-basedrepeaters are placed in majormetropolitan areas.

Satellite signals are more likely to beblocked by tall buildings andmountains the farther north youtravel from the equator. Carryinglarge items on a roof rack can alsoblock the signal.


204

Signal may be blocked bymountains or large obstacles tothe south.

Signal weaker inthese areas.

SATELLITE

GROUNDREPEATER

09/07/16 18:19:46 31SWA630_209

Depending on where you drive, youmay experience reception problems.Interference can be caused by any ofthese conditions:

Driving on the north side of alarge commercial truck on aneast/west road.Driving in tunnels.Driving on a road beside a verticalwall, steep cliff, or hill to the southof you.Driving on the lower level of amulti-tiered road.Driving on a single lane roadalongside dense trees taller than50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.

Driving on the north side of aneast/west mountain road.

Large items carried on a roof rack.

There may be other geographicsituations that could affect XM Radioreception.

If your XM Radio service has expiredor you purchased your vehicle froma previous owner, you can listen to asampling of the broadcasts availableon XM Radio. With the ignitionswitch in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON(II) position, push the power/volumeknob to turn on the audio system andpress the CD/XM button. A varietyof music types and styles will play.

If you decide to purchase XM Radioservice, contact XM Radio at

, or at1-800-852-9696. In Canada, contactXM CANADA at , orat 1-877-209-0079. You will need togive them your radio I.D. numberand your credit card number. To get

your radio I.D. number, press theTUNE bar until ‘‘0’’ appears in thedisplay. Your I.D. will appear in thedisplay.

After you’ve registered with XMRadio, keep your audio system in theXM radio mode while you wait foractivation. This should take about 30minutes.

While waiting for activation, makesure your vehicle remains in an openarea with good reception. Once youraudio system is activated, you’ll beable to listen to XM Radio broadcasts.XM Radio will continue to send anactivation signal to your vehicle forat least 12 hours from the activationrequest. If the service has not beenactivated after 36 hours, contactXM Radio. In Canada, contact XMCANADA .


www.xmradio.com

www.xmradio.ca

Receiving XM Radio Service


Features

205

09/07/16 18:20:01 31SWA630_210

－

＋

Playing a Disc (EX-L model with navigation system)

206

SCAN BUTTON

JOYSTICK

AUDIO BUTTON

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB

OPEN BUTTON

CD BUTTON

RANDOMBUTTON

REPEAT BUTTON REWIND BUTTON

FAST FORWARDBUTTON

CD ICON

TUNE BAR

SKIP BUTTON

SKIP BUTTON


09/07/16 18:20:05 31SWA630_211

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－


Your vehicle also has a CD changerthat operates with the samefunctions as the in-dash disc player(see page ).



You operate the in-dash disc playerwith the same controls used for theradio. To load or play discs, theignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.


Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)24/22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2)Bitrate:32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320 kbps(MPEG1)8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)Compatible with variable bitrateand multi-sessionMaximum layers(including ROOT): 8 layers

This audio system can also play CD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed in MP3or WMA formats. When playing adisc in MP3, you will see ‘‘MP3’’ onthe screen. In WMA format, ‘‘WMA’’will appear on the screen. You canselect up to 255 folders and play up

to 999 tracks. If the disc has acomplex structure, it takes a while toread the disc before the systembegins to play it.

Bitrate:32/40/48/64/80/96/128/160/192kbps

If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc isprotected by digital rightsmanagement (DRM), the audio unitdisplays CD FORMAT, and thenskips to the next file.

Maximum layers(including ROOT): 8 layers

Compatible with variable bitrateand multi-session

215

CONTINUED

To Play a Disc(In-dash single player)


Features

207

NOTE:


09/07/16 18:20:23 31SWA630_212

Insert a disc about halfway into thedisc slot. The drive will pull the discin the rest of the way and begin toplay it.


To return the screen to the uprightposition, press the CLOSE button onthe edge of the screen panel. Do notuse the folded down screen as a tray.If you put a cup, for example, on thescreen, the liquid inside the cup mayspill on the screen when you go overa bump.

The in-dash disc player is behind thenavigation screen. To use the discplayer, press the OPEN buttonbeside the screen. The screen foldsback, and the disc slot appears.

To Load a Disc


208

OPEN BUTTON

DISC SLOT

CLOSE BUTTON

09/07/16 18:20:33 31SWA630_213

－

－

Push the AUDIO button beside thescreen to show the audio display andoperate the disc player.

You can also operate the audiosystem without using the controlicons on the audio screen. Press theCD button. The status bar appearson the bottom of the screen. On thenavigation screen, you can see theaudio information whenever youtouch the AUDIO INFO icon on thelower portion of the screen.

When playing a CD recorded withtext data, the track, album, and artistname are shown on the audio display.When playing a disc in MP3 or WMA,the folder number and name, the filenumber and name, the artist name,and the elapsed time are shown. Thesystem will continuously play a discuntil you change modes. If the discwas not recorded with text data, itwill not be displayed.

You can also select an icon with thejoystick. Move it to left, right, up, ordown to change the highlighting andscroll through lists. Then press ENTon the top of the joystick to selectthe icon.

Each time you press andrelease (preset 6), the playerskips forward to the beginning of thenext track (file in MP3 or WMAmode). Press and release

(preset 5), to skip backward tothe beginning of the current track.Press it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous track.

You can use the preset buttons whilea disc is playing to select passagesand change tracks (files in MP3 orWMA mode). Each preset button’sfunction is shown on the bottom ofthe screen.

To move rapidly withina track/file, press and hold

(preset 4) or (preset 3).

CONTINUED


SKIP

FF/REW


Features

209

PRESET BUTTON’S FUNCTION

PRESET BUTTONS

U.S. model is shown

09/07/16 18:20:45 31SWA630_214

－

▲▼

－

－

－

－Toselect a different folder, press eitherside of the TUNE bar to move to thebeginning of the next folder. Pressthe side of the TUNE bar to skipto the next folder, and the side tomove to the beginning of the currentfolder. Press it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous folder.

Thisfeature plays the tracks/files withina disc in random order. To activatetrack random, press and release theRDM button (preset 2). You will seeTRACK RANDOM in the display.Press the RDM button again toreturn to normal play.

Thisfeature, when activated, plays allfiles in the selected folder in randomorder, rather than in the order theyare compressed. To activate folderrandom, press and hold the RDMbutton. You will see FOLDERRANDOM in the display. Thesystem then selects and plays filesrandomly. This continues until youdeactivate folder random by pressingthe RDM button again, or if youselect a different folder with theTUNE bar.

To continuously replaya track (file in MP3 or WMA mode),press and release the RPT button(preset 1). You will see TRACKREPEAT in the display. Press theRPT button again to turn it off.

This feature,when activated, replays all files onthe selected folder in the order theyare compressed. To activate folderrepeat, press and hold the RPTbutton (preset 1) for 2 seconds. Youwill see FOLDER REPEAT in thedisplay. The system continuouslyreplays the current folder. Press theRPT button again to turn it off.Selecting a different folder with theTUNE bar also turns off folderrepeat.

In MP3 or WMA modeIn MP3 or WMA mode In MP3 or WMA modeFOLDER SELECTION

TRACK RANDOM (Randomwithin a disc/folder)

FOLDER RANDOM

TRACK REPEAT (FILEREPEAT)

FOLDER REPEAT


210

09/07/16 18:20:55 31SWA630_215

－－

You can also select a track/filedirectly from a track list on the audiodisplay. Press the AUDIO button toshow the audio display, then touchthe Track List icon. The track listmenu appears on the display.

The scan function samples all tracks(files in MP3 or WMA) in the orderthey were recorded. To activate scan,press and release the SCAN button.You will see TRACK SCAN in thedisplay. You will get a 10 secondsampling of each track/file on thedisc. Press the SCAN button to getout of scan mode and play the lasttrack/file sampled.

Pressing either SKIP button (preset5 or 6) also turns off scan.

This feature,when activated, samples the first filein each folder on the disc in order.To activate folder scan, press andhold the SCAN button for 2 seconds.You will see FOLDER SCAN in thedisplay.

The system plays the first file ineach folder for about 10 seconds. Ifyou do nothing, the system thenplays the first file in each folder for10 seconds each. After playing thefirst file of the last folder, the systemgoes to normal play.

Pressing either SKIP button (preset5 or 6), or selecting a different folderwith the TUNE bar, or pressing theSCAN button, also turns off folderscan.

In MP3 or WMA mode

CONTINUED

Using a Track ListSCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN)FOLDER SCAN


Features

211

FOLDER ICON TRACK/FILE ICON

FOLDER NUMBER RETURN ICON

09/07/16 18:21:05 31SWA630_216

▲ ▼

When playing a CD recorded withtext data, each track name is shownon the audio display. With a discrecorded in MP3 or WMA, the foldernumber and the location are alsodisplayed.

If the disc was not recorded with textdata, only the track number is shown.

To scroll through the display, touchthe or icon on the side of thescreen. To go back to the previousdisplay, touch the Return icon on thescreen.

If you turn the system off while adisc is playing, either with thepower/volume knob or by turningoff the ignition switch, the disc willstay in the drive. When you turn thesystem back on, the disc will beginplaying where it left off.

Select the desired track/file bytouching the icon on the display. Theselected icon will be highlighted inblue. The system begins to play theselected track/file. With a disc inMP3 or WMA, touch the folder iconon the upper left of the screen tomove to the parent folder. Thecurrent folder is highlighted in blue.

To play the radio when a disc isplaying, press the AM/FM button ortouch the FM1, FM2, AM, XM1, orXM2 icon. If a PC card is in the audiounit, touch the CARD icon to playthe PC card. If a CD or CDs areloaded in the CD changer, touch theCDC icon to play the CD changer.Press the CD button again or touchthe CD icon to switch back to thedisc player.

To Stop Playing a Disc


212

09/07/16 18:21:13 31SWA630_217

You cannot close the screen if a discis partially inserted into its slot.

To return the screen to the uprightposition, press the CLOSE button.

You can also eject the disc when theignition switch is off.

For information on how to handleand protect discs, see page .

To remove a disc from the audio unit,fold back the screen by pressing theOPEN button (see page ). Pressthe disc eject button ( ) toremove the disc. If you eject the disc,but do not remove it from the slot,the system will automatically reloadit after 10 seconds and put it in pausemode. To begin playing, press theCD/XM button.

252206

Removing a Disc Protecting Discs


Features

213

09/07/16 18:21:21 31SWA630_218


CauseError Message

Insert a different disc. If the newdisc plays, there is a problem withthe first disc. If the error messagecycle repeats and you cannot clear it,take your vehicle to a dealer.

The audio system will try to play thedisc. If there is still a problem, theerror message will reappear. Pressthe eject button, and pull out the disc.

Solution

253

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

TOC Error

High Temperature

Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.Check if it is inserted correctly in the discplayer.Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.For more information see page 253 .Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.Check the disc for damage or deformation. Formore information see page 253 .If the disc cannot be pulled out, or the errormessage does not disappear after the disc isejected, see your dealer.Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.Check the disc for damage or deformation.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

Disc Player Error Messages (EX-L model with navigation system)

214

DISC ERROR

MECH ERROR

DISC

HEAT ERROR

09/07/16 18:21:31 31SWA630_219

＋－

CD Changer (EX-L model with navigation system)

Features

215

CD ICON CD CHANGER ICONPOWER/VOLUME KNOB

JOYSTICK

OPEN BUTTON

CD BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

TUNE BAR

REWIND BUTTON

FAST FORWARD BUTTONRANDOM BUTTON

REPEAT BUTTON SKIP BUTTON

SKIP BUTTON


09/07/16 18:21:35 31SWA630_220

Open the center console cover,then slide open the CD changercover by pulling it rearward.

Push the EJECT button to removethe CD magazine. The magazinewill pop up automatically.

Your vehicle has the CD changer inthe center console.

CD-R, CD-RW disc, and CDcompressed in MP3 and WMA willnot work in this unit. Video CDs andDVD discs also will not work.

Do not spill any liquids on the centerconsole. Spilled liquids can damageelectrical components in the CDchanger.

1. 2.

Loading CDs in the Changer


216

EJECT BUTTON

09/07/16 18:21:43 31SWA630_221

To install a CD into the magazine,push the button while pulling outon the tab.

Store all six trays in the magazine,and reinstall the magazine in theCD changer as shown.

Put a CD on the tray with theprinted surface facing up as shown.

Reinstall the tray in the magazine.Repeat this procedure to open theother five trays.

Make sure to slide the CDchanger cover closed until it clicks.

To remove CDs from the CDchanger, refer to the loadingprocedure.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.


Features

217

09/07/16 18:21:53 31SWA630_222

－

＋▲

▼

To play CDs, the ignition switchmust be in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position.

You operate the CD changer withthe same controls used for the in-dash disc player or the radio. Toselect the CD changer, touch theCDC icon. The disc and tracknumbers are displayed. The systemwill continuously play a CD until youchange modes.

To select a different disc, use thepreset buttons (5 or 6). Press andrelease the Preset 5 (DISC )button to select the previous disc orPreset 6 (DISC ) to select the nextdisc in sequence. Pressing the or

side of the TUNE bar alsochanges the disc. If you select anempty position in the CD changer,the system will try to load the CD inthe next available slot.

You can use the preset buttons whilea disc is playing to select passagesand change tracks. Each presetbutton function is shown on thebottom of the screen.

To Play a CD


218

TUNEBAR PRESET BUTTONS

Do not use CDs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause the CDto jam in the unit.

09/07/16 18:22:03 31SWA630_223

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－Push the button(preset 6) to play the next track onthe disc. Push the button(preset 5) once to replay the track inplay; press it twice to replay theprevious track.

To move more rapidlywithin a track, press and hold the

(preset 4) or (preset 3)button.

Tocontinuously replay a track, pressand release the RPT button (preset1). You will see TRACK REPEAT inthe display. Press the RPT buttonagain to turn it off.

To continuouslyreplay the current CD, press andhold the RPT button (preset 1) untilyou see the DISC REPEAT in thedisplay. Press it again to turn it off.

Press and release the RDM button(preset 2) to play the tracks inrandom order. You will see TRACKRANDOM in the display. Press theRDM button again to return tonormal play.

To play alltracks in each CD in random order,press and hold the RDM button(preset 2) until you see DISCRANDOM in the display. Press theRDM button again to return tonormal play.

The SCANfunction samples all the tracks onthe selected disc in the order theyare recorded. To activate it, pressand release the SCAN button. Youwill see TRACK SCAN in the display,and you will get a 10 secondsampling of each track on theselected CD. Press the SCAN buttonagain to get out of scan mode.

Press and hold theSCAN button to get a 10 secondsampling of the first song of eachdisc in the CD changer. You will seeDISC SCAN in the display. Press andhold the button again to turn it off.

SKIP

FF/REW

REPEAT (Track Repeat)

DISC REPEAT

RANDOM (Track Random)

DISC RANDOM

SCAN (Track Scan)

DISC SCAN


Features

219

09/07/16 18:22:13 31SWA630_224

If there is a PC card in the audio unit,touch the CARD icon to switch tothe PC card while a CD is playing.

Touch the CDC icon again to playthe CD in the CD changer.

If you turn the system off while a CDin the CD changer is playing, the CDwill stay in the drive. When you turnthe system back on, the CD will be inpause mode. Touch the CDC icon onthe audio screen. The CD will beginplaying where it left off.

Press the AM/FM or CD/XMbutton to switch to the radio orsatellite radio while a CD is playing.

To Stop Playing a CD


220

09/07/16 18:22:20 31SWA630_225


Insert a different disc. If the newdisc plays, there is a problem withthe first disc. If the error messagecycle repeats and you cannot clear it,take your vehicle to a dealer.

The audio system will try to play thedisc. If there is still a problem, theerror message will reappear. Pressthe eject button, and pull out the disc.

CauseError Message Solution

253

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

The disc is pulled out.Check if it is inserted correctly in the discplayer.Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.For more information see page 253 .Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.Check the disc for damage or deformation. Formore information see page 253 .If the disc cannot be pulled out, or the errormessage does not disappear after the disc isejected, see your dealer.

CD Changer Error Messages (EX-L model with navigation system)

Features

221

DISC ERROR

MECH ERROR

09/07/16 18:22:29 31SWA630_226

－＋

Playing a PC card (EX-L model with navigation system)

222

TRACK LIST ICON

PC CARD ICON


JOYSTICK

PLAY MODE ICON


SKIP BUTTON


REWIND BUTTON

TUNE BAR

SCAN BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON

CD/XM BUTTON

OPEN BUTTON

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

09/07/16 18:22:35 31SWA630_227

－

－

－

－

You operate the PC card player withthe same controls used for the radioand the disc player. To load or play acard, the ignition switch must be inthe ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position.

Based on PCMCIA 2.1/JEIDA 4.2,the recommended PC cards for thePC card reader are:

Always use the recommendedmemory card with the appropriateadapter (if an adapter is needed).Some memory cards will not work inthis unit.

When you insert a PC card intothe slot, make sure you put it instraight. If you cannot insert it,remove it, and insert again.

Do not keep PC cards in thevehicle. Direct sunlight and highheat will damage them.

To avoid damaging the cardreader, do not insert hard discdrive cards into the PC card slot.

You cannot close the screen(move it to the upright position)until the PC card is inserted all theway into its slot or removed.

Never insert foreign objects intothe PC card slot.


SD memory card

CompactFlashFlash ATA

The PC card player reads and playscards in MP3 or WMA formats.Depending on the format, the screenwill indicate ‘‘MP3’’ or ‘‘WMA’’ whena card is playing. The card limit ofthe player is 255 folders and 999tracks. If the card has a complexstructure, it takes some time for thesystem to begin playing it.

Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)24/22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2)Bitrate: 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320kbps (MPEG1)8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)Compatible with variable bitrateand multi-sessionMaximum layers(including ROOT): 8 layers

CONTINUED

To Play a PC Card


Features

223

NOTE:

09/07/16 18:22:53 31SWA630_228

－

－

－

－

Compatible with variable bitrateand multi-sessionMaximum layers(including ROOT): 8 layers

In WMA format, DRM (digital rightsmanagement) files cannot be played.If the system finds a DRM file, itskips that file and plays the nextavailable folder or file.

The PC card slot is behind thenavigation screen. To use the PCcard player, press the OPEN buttonbeside the screen. The screen foldsback, and the PC card slot appears.

Insert a PC card straight into the slot.The drive will read the PC card andbegin to play it.

Return the screen to the uprightposition by pressing the CLOSEbutton on the edge of the screenpanel.

Push the AUDIO button beside thescreen to show the audio display andoperate the PC card player.

You can also operate the audiosystem without using the controlicons on the audio screen. Press anyof the appropriate control buttons.The status bar appears on thebottom of the screen. On thenavigation screen, you can see theaudio information whenever youtouch the AUDIO INFO icon on thescreen.


Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHzBitrate:48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps

Loading a PC Card


224

PC CARD SLOT

09/07/16 18:23:06 31SWA630_229

There are three play modes: Folder,Artist, and Album. Touch the PLAYMODE icon, then choose one of themodes by touching its icon. When amode is selected, it is highlighted inblue.

Folder mode plays tracks in theorder they were added to the card.

Artist mode plays tracks inalphabetical order, by artist andsong title.

Album mode plays albums(folders) in alphabetical order.

If play mode information was notincluded in the tracks/files whenthey were added to the card, it willnot be displayed on the screen.

CONTINUED

To Select a Play Mode


Features

225

FOLDER MODE

MODE INDICATOR

PLAY MODE ICON

PLAY MODE ICON PLAY MODE ICON

MODE INDICATOR

ARTIST MODE ALBUM MODE

MODE INDICATOR

09/07/16 18:23:20 31SWA630_230

To select a play mode, push theAUDIO button to show the audiodisplay, then touch the PLAY MODEicon on the display.

Select the desired mode by touchingthe appropriate icon, or move thejoystick, then press ENT.

After you select the play mode, thedisplay changes to the selectableplaying menu. If you select‘‘Continue playing the current song,’’the system goes into the selectedplay mode after playing the currentfile.


226

PLAY MODE ICON

09/07/16 18:23:29 31SWA630_231

To go back to the previous screen,press the CANCEL button on theright side of the screen. To exit theplay mode screens, press the AUDIObutton.

You can use the preset buttons whilea card is playing to select or changefiles. Each preset button’s function isshown on the bottom of the screen.

Icons on the screen can also beselected with the joystick. Move thejoystick left or right and up or downuntil the icon is highlighted, thenpress ENT on the top of the joystickto select the icon.

If you select ‘‘Play a new track list,’’the system goes into the selectedplay mode immediately and begins toplay the new track list.

CONTINUED



Features

227

PRESET BUTTON’S FUNCTION

PRESET BUTTONS

09/07/16 18:23:37 31SWA630_232

－

－

－

▲▼

－－

－

－

Each time you press andrelease (preset 6), the playerskips forward to the beginning of thenext file. Press and release

(preset 5), to skip backward tothe beginning of the current file.Press it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous file.

To move rapidly withina file, press and hold (preset 4)or (preset 3).

Toselect a different folder, press eitherside of the TUNE bar to move to thebeginning of the next folder. Pressthe side of the TUNE bar to skipthe next folder, and press the sideto move to the beginning of thecurrent folder. Press it again to skipto the beginning of the previousfolder.

To continuously replaya file, press and release the RPTbutton (preset 1). You will seeTRACK REPEAT in the display.Press the RPT button again to turn itoff.

This featureplays the files within a folder inrandom order. To activate randomplay, press and release the RDMbutton (preset 2). You will seeTRACK RANDOM in the display.Press the RDM button again toreturn to normal play.

This feature, whenactivated, plays all files in eachfolder/artist/album in random order,rather than in the order they arerecorded or listed. To activate eachrandom play, push and hold theRDM button (preset 2) for 2 seconds.You will see FOLDER RANDOM,ARTIST RANDOM or ALBUMRANDOM in the display.

This feature, whenactivated, replays all the files on theselected folder/artist/album in theorder they are recorded or listed. Toactivate each repeat mode, press andhold the RPT button (preset 1) for 2seconds. You will see FOLDERREPEAT, ARTIST REPEAT orALBUM REPEAT in the display.The system continuously replays thecurrent folder/artist/album. Pressand hold the RPT button again toturn it off. Pressing the RDM button,or selecting a different folder/artist/album with the TUNE bar also turnsoff the repeat feature.

SKIP

FF/REW

FOLDER SELECTION

TRACK REPEAT (FILEREPEAT)

TRACK RANDOM (Randomwithin a folder)

FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUMRANDOM

FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUMREPEAT


228

09/07/16 18:23:45 31SWA630_233

－

－

The system plays the first file in thefolder for about 10 seconds. If you donothing, the system plays the firstfile in each folder, in order, for 10seconds each. After playing the firstfile of the last folder/artist/album,the system returns to normal play.

Pressing either of the SKIP buttons(preset 5 or 6), selecting a differentfolder/artist/album with the TUNEbar, or pressing the SCAN button,also turns off the scan feature.

The system then selects and playsfiles randomly. This continues untilyou deactivate each random play bypressing the RDM button again.

The SCAN functionsamples all the files on the PC cardin the order they are recorded. Toactivate the scan feature, press andrelease the SCAN button. You willsee TRACK SCAN in the display.You will get a 10 second sampling ofeach file on the PC card. Press theSCAN button again to get out of scanmode and play the last file sampled.

Pressing either of the SKIP buttons(preset 5 or 6) also turns off the scanfeature.

This feature, whenactivated, samples the first file ineach folder/artist/album on the PCcard in order. To activate each scanfeature, press and hold the SCANbutton. You will see FOLDER SCAN,ARTIST SCAN or ALBUM SCAN inthe display.

CONTINUED

SCAN

FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUMSCAN


Features

229

09/07/16 18:23:54 31SWA630_234

▲ ▼You can also select a file directlyfrom a track list on the audio display.Press the AUDIO button to show theaudio display, then touch the TrackList icon. The track list menuappears on the display.

To scroll through the display, touchthe or icon on the side of thescreen. To go back to the previousdisplay, touch the Return icon.

To play a file, touch its icon on thescreen. In folder mode, touch thefolder icon on the upper left of thescreen to move to the parent folder.The current folder is highlighted inblue.

In artist mode, the artist name is alsodisplayed on the right side of eachselectable icon. Select the desiredfile.

Using a Track List


230

RETURN ICON

FOLDER ICON ARTIST NAME

TRACK LIST ICON

09/07/16 18:24:05 31SWA630_235

In album mode, the album name isalso displayed on the right side ofeach selectable icon. Select thedesired file.

When you select ‘‘Song Search’’ fromthe track list display, the song searchmenu appears.

You can then select any of threemodes to search a file: Title byKeyword, Artist, and Album.

CONTINUED

Song Search Function


Features

231

ARTIST ICON

TITLE BY KEYWORD ICON

RETURN ICON

SONG SEARCH ICON

ALBUM ICONFolder mode is shown.

ALBUM NAME

09/07/16 18:24:15 31SWA630_236

▲ ▼

Searching for a Song Title by Keyword Searching for a Song by Artist Name

After the system searches for a song,a file list is displayed. To scrollthrough the list, touch the oricon on the side of the screen. Selectthe desired file by touching theappropriate icon, or moving thejoystick and pressing ENT.

Select the Artist icon, and the artistlist appears. Select the desired artist,and the artist’s file list is displayed.

In Title by Keyword mode, enter thetitle name, or any keyword, bytouching the letter icons on thescreen. Press the List icon to beginthe song search. If you press theCANCEL button on the control panel,the display returns to the modemenu without doing a search.

To cancel the selected letter, touchthe Delete icon. To select morecharacters, touch the More icon.The other character list will beshown.


232

MORE ICON

DELETE ICON LIST ICON

FILE LIST

ARTIST LIST

09/07/16 18:24:29 31SWA630_237

Searching for a Song by Album Name

Select the Album icon, and thealbum list appears. Select the desiredalbum, and its song list is displayed.You can then select the desired songfrom the list.

To remove a PC card from the audiounit, fold back the screen bypressing the OPEN button (see page

). Press the eject button ( )to remove the card. If you do notremove it from the slot, you cannotreturn the screen to the uprightposition.

To return the screen to the uprightposition, press the CLOSE button.

You can also eject a card when theignition switch is off.

If there is a problem with the PCcard player, see your dealer.

To play the radio when a PC card isplaying, press the AM/FM button ortouch the FM1, FM2, AM, XM1, orXM2 icon. If a disc is in the audiounit, press the CD/XM button ortouch the CD icon to play the disc. Ifa CD or CDs are in the CD changer,touch the CDC icon to play thedisc(s). Touch the CARD icon toswitch back to the PC card player.

If you turn the system off while a PCcard is playing, either with thepower/volume knob or by turningoff the ignition switch, the card willstay in the drive. When you turn thesystem back on, the card will beginplaying where it left off.

When you leave the vehicle, alwaysremove the PC card from the audiounit.

222

To Stop Playing a PC Card

PC Card Player Malfunction

Removing a PC Card


Features

233

ALBUM LIST

09/07/16 18:24:42 31SWA630_238

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a PC card, findthe solution in the chart to the right.If you cannot clear the errormessage, take your vehicle to yourdealer.

Error Message Solution

The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the disc. There is apossibility that the files have been damaged.It appears when the PC card is empty or there are no MP3 or WMA files inthe PC card. Save the MP3 or WMA files in the PC card.It appears when an unsupported PC card is inserted. The system supportsCF card, Flash ATA card, and SanDisk 6-in-1 Card Adapter.

PC card Error Messages (EX-L model with navigation system)

234

FILE ERROR

NO MUSIC

MEDIA ERROR

09/07/16 18:24:47 31SWA630_239

＋

－

Playing an iPod (EX-L model with navigation system)

Features

235

SKIP BUTTON

FAST FORWARD BUTTON

REWIND BUTTON

RANDOM BUTTON

JOYSTICK


AUX ICON

SKIP BUTTON

REPEAT BUTTON

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

iPod INDICATOR

AUDIO BUTTON

CD/XM BUTTON

OPEN BUTTON

09/07/16 18:24:52 31SWA630_240

You can select the AUX mode byusing the navigation system voicecontrol buttons, but cannot operatethe play mode functions.

iPods compatible with your audiosystem using the USB adapter cableare:

This audio system can select andplay the audio files on the iPod withthe same controls used for the in-dash disc player. To play an iPod,connect it to the USB adapter cablein the upper glove box by using yourdock connector. Press the AUDIObutton beside the screen to show theaudio display and touch the AUXicon. The ignition switch must be inthe ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position. The iPod will also berecharged with the ignition switch inthese positions.

iPod and iTunes are registeredtrademarks owned by Apple Inc.

The audio system reads and playsplayable sound files on the iPod. Thesystem cannot operate an iPod as amass storage device. The system willonly play songs stored on the iPodwith iTunes.

Do not use an extension cablebetween the USB adapter cableequipped with your vehicle andyour dock connector.

Do not keep the iPod in thevehicle. Direct sunlight and highheat will damage it.

Do not connect your iPod using ahub.

Use only compatible iPods with thelatest software. iPods that are notcompatible will not work in this audiounit.

We recommend backing up yourdata before playing it.


ModeliPod classiciPod with video(iPod 5thgeneration)iPod nanoiPod nano2nd generationiPod nano3rd generationiPod nano4th generationiPod touchiPod touch2nd generation

SoftwareVer. 1.0 or more

Ver. 1.2 or more

Ver. 1.2 or moreVer. 1.1.2 or more

Ver. 1.0 or more

Ver. 1.0.2 or more

Ver. 1.1.1 or moreVer. 2.1.1 or more

To Play an iPod Voice Control System


236

NOTE:

09/07/16 18:25:07 31SWA630_241

CONTINUED

If the audio system still does notrecognize the iPod, the iPod mayneed to be reset. Follow theinstructions that came with youriPod, or you can find resetinstructions online at

Install the dock connector to theUSB adapter cable securely.

Connect your dock connector tothe iPod correctly and securely.



In AAC format, DRM (digital rightsmanagement) files cannot be played.If the system finds a DRM file, theaudio unit displays UNPLAYABLE,and then skips to the next file.

1.

2.

3.

4.

www.apple.com/ipod.


Connecting an iPodF

eatures

237

DOCK CONNECTOR

USB ADAPTER CABLE

USB CONNECTOR

RELEASE BUTTON

09/07/16 18:25:18 31SWA630_242

－

－

Select the desired mode by touchingthe appropriate icon, or move thejoystick, then press ENT.

Press the AUDIO button to go backto the normal audio playing display.Pressing the CANCEL button goesback to the previous screen, andpressing the MAP button cancels theaudio control display on the screen.

If you select ‘‘ALL’’ on either theartists or albums list, all availablefiles on the selected list are played.


You can also select a file from anylist on the iPod menu: playlists,artists, albums and songs. Press theAUDIO button to display the screen,then touch the iPod MENU icon.

The current file number and total ofthe selected playable files aredisplayed on the screen. It alsoshows the artist, album and track(file) names on the screen.

Use the SKIP button while an iPod isplaying to change files.



FF/REW

SKIP

To Select a File from iPod Menu

To Change or Select Files


238

09/07/16 18:25:29 31SWA630_243

▲ ▼

－

－

CONTINUED

You can also select a file directlyfrom a track list on the audio display.Press the AUDIO button to show theaudio display, then touch the TrackList icon. The track list menuappears on the display.


To play a file, touch its icon on thescreen. The current folder ishighlighted in blue.

You can select any type of repeat andrandom mode by using the RPTbutton or RDM button.

This featurecontinuously plays a file. To activatethe repeat feature, press the RPTbutton (Preset 1). You will see‘‘REPEAT’’ in the display. To turn itoff, press the RPT button (Preset 1)again.

This featureplays all available files from theselected items in the iPod menu list(playlists, artists, albums or songs)in random order. To activate thetrack random feature, press theRDM button (Preset 2). You will see‘‘TRACK RANDOM’’ in the display.To turn it off, press the RDM button(Preset 2).

Using a Track List To Select Repeat or Random Mode:

REPEAT

TRACK RANDOM


Features

239

TRACK LIST ICON RETURN ICON

09/07/16 18:25:43 31SWA630_244

－＊

＊

This featureplays all available albums from theselected items in the iPod menu list(playlists, artists, albums or songs)in random order. The files in eachalbum are played in the recordedorder. To activate the album randomfeature, press and hold the RDMbutton (Preset 2). You will see‘‘ALBUM RANDOM’’ in the display.To turn it off, press and hold theRDM button (Preset 2).

You can also select another list fromthe iPod menu while keeping therandom function.

Available operating functions vary onmodels or versions. Some functionsmay not be available on the vehicle’saudio system.

To play the radio, press the AM/FMbutton or touch the FM1, FM2, AM,XM1, or XM2 icon. Touch the CDicon to switch to the disc mode (if adisc is loaded). Each time you pressthe CD/XM button, the audio modeswitches between iPod, disc and XMRadio.

If a PC card is in the audio unit,touch the CARD icon to play the PCcard.

You can disconnect the iPod at anytime when you see ‘‘OK todisconnect’’ message in the iPoddisplay. Always make sure you see‘‘OK to disconnect’’ message in theiPod display before you disconnect it.Make sure to follow the iPod’sinstructions on how to disconnectthe dock connector from the USBadapter cable.

The displayed message mayvary on models or versions. Onsome models, there is nomessage to disconnect.

When you disconnect the iPod whileit is playing, the navigation screenshows ‘‘NO DATA.’’

If you reconnect the same iPod, thesystem may begin playing where itleft off, depending on what mode theiPod is in when it is reconnected.

If you see an error message in thescreen, see page .

:

241

ALBUM RANDOM To Stop Playing Your iPod

iPod Error Messages


Disconnecting an iPod

240

NOTE:

09/07/16 18:25:57 31SWA630_245

Error MessageIf you see an error message on thescreen while playing an iPod, findthe solution in the chart to the right.If you cannot clear the errormessage, take your vehicle to yourdealer.

Solution

Appears when an unsupported iPod is inserted.Appears when there is no music on the iPod.

iPod Error Messages (EX-L model with navigation system)

Features

241

UNSUPPORTEDNO SONG

09/07/16 18:26:02 31SWA630_246

－＋

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (EX-L model with navigation system)

242


JOYSTICK


SKIP BUTTON


REWIND BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON

CD/XM BUTTON

OPEN BUTTON

AUX ICON

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

MP3/WMA INDICATOR

09/07/16 18:26:09 31SWA630_247

＊

＊

The audio system reads and playsthe audio files on the USB flashmemory device in MP3, WMA orAAC formats. Depending on theformat, the display shows MP3,WMA or AAC when a USB flashmemory device is playing. The USBflash memory device limit is up to700 folders or up to 65535 files.

Only AAC format files recordedwith iTunes are playable on thisaudio unit.This audio system can select and

play the audio files from a USB flashmemory device with the samecontrols used for the in-dash discplayer. To play a USB flash memorydevice, connect it to the USB adaptercable in the upper glove box. Theignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Press the AUDIO button beside thescreen to show the audio display andtouch the AUX icon.

The recommended USB flashmemory devices are 256 MB orhigher, and formatted with the FATfile system. Some digital audioplayers may be compatible as well.

Do not use an extension cable tothe USB adapter cable equippedwith your vehicle.

Do not connect your USB flashmemory device using a hub.

Do not use a device such as a cardreader or hard drive as the deviceor your files may be damaged.

Some USB flash memory devices(such as devices with security lock-out features, etc.) will not work inthis audio unit.

Do not keep a USB flash memorydevice in the vehicle. Directsunlight and high heat will damageit.

We recommend backing up yourdata before playing a USB flashmemory device.

Depending on the type andnumber of files, it may take sometime before they begin to play.

Depending on the software thefiles were made with, it may not bepossible to play some files, ordisplay some text data.


:

CONTINUED

To Play a USB Flash MemoryDevice


Features

243

NOTE:

09/07/16 18:26:24 31SWA630_248

－－

－

－

－

－

－－

－

－－

－

－

－

－－

－

You can select the AUX mode byusing the navigation system voicecontrol buttons, but cannot operatethe play mode functions.


Bitrate:32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320/VBR kbps(MPEG1)


Supported standards:MPEG1 Audio Layer3MPEG2 Audio Layer3Partition: Top partition onlyMaximum layers: 8

Maximum layers: 8

Bitrate:48 320/VBR kbps (Max 384)

Partition: Top partition onlyMaximum layers: 8

The specifications for compatibleAAC files are:



Supported standards:WMA version 7/8/9

Partition: Top partition only

Supported standards:MPEG4/AAC LCMPEG2/AAC LC

Bitrate:48 320 kbps

Sampling frequency:8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48 kHz

Voice Control System


244

09/07/16 18:26:42 31SWA630_249

CONTINUED

Some versions of MP3, WMA, orAAC format may not be supported. Ifan unsupported file is found, theaudio unit displays UNSUPPORTED,then skips to the next file.

Connect the USB flash memorydevice to the USB connectorcorrectly and securely.

When the USB flash memory deviceis connected and the USB mode isselected on the audio system, theWMA or MP3 indicator is shown onthe navigation screen. It also showsthe folder and file numbers, and theelapsed time on the screen.



In WMA or AAC format, DRM(digital rights management) filescannot be played. If the system findsa DRM file, the audio unit displaysUNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skipsto the next file.

1.

2.

3.

Connecting a USB Flash MemoryDevice


Features

245

USB ADAPTER CABLE

USB CONNECTOR

RELEASE BUTTON

Combining a low sampling f requencywith a low bitrate may result inextremely degraded sound quality.

09/07/16 18:26:55 31SWA630_250

▲ ▼

－

－

－

▼▲

You can also select a file directlyfrom a track list on the audio display.Press the AUDIO button to show theaudio display, then touch the TrackList icon. The track list menuappears on the display.


To play a file, touch its icon on thescreen. The current folder ishighlighted in blue.




Toselect a different folder, press eitherside of the TUNE bar. Press the

side to skip to the next folder,and press the side to skip to thebeginning of the previous folder.

Use the SKIP button while a USBflash memory device is playing tochange files.

Using a Track ListTo Change or Select Files

SKIP

FF/REW

FOLDER SELECTION


246

FOLDER ICON

RETURN ICONTRACK LIST ICON

09/07/16 18:27:08 31SWA630_251

－

－

－

－

－

－

You can select any type of repeat,random and scan modes by using theRPT button, RDM button, or SCANbutton.

This featurecontinuously plays a file. To activatethe track repeat feature, press theRPT button (Preset 1). You will see‘‘TRACK REPEAT’’ in the display.To turn it off, press the RPT button(Preset 1).

This featurereplays all the files in the selectedfolder in the order they are stored.To activate the folder repeat feature,press and hold the RPT button(Preset 1). You will see ‘‘FOLDERREPEAT’’ in the display. To turn itoff, press and hold the RPT button(Preset 1).

This featureplays all the files in random order.To activate the track random feature,press the RDM button (Preset 2).You will see ‘‘TRACK RANDOM’’ inthe display. To turn it off, press theRDM button (Preset 2).

Thisfeature plays the files in the selectedfolder in random order. To activatethe folder random feature, press andhold the RDM button (Preset 2). Youwill see ‘‘FOLDER RANDOM’’ in thedisplay. To turn it off, press and holdthe RDM button (Preset 2).

This featuresamples all files in the selectedfolder in the order they are stored.To activate the scan feature, pressthe SCAN button. You will see‘‘TRACK SCAN’’ in the display. Youwill also see the file number blinking.You will get a 10 second sampling ofeach file in the folder. Press theSCAN button to get out of the scanmode. The system plays the last filesampled.

This featuresamples the first file in each folder inthe order they are stored. Toactivate the folder scan feature,press and hold the SCAN button.You will see ‘‘FOLDER SCAN’’ in thedisplay. You will also see the foldernumber blinking. You will get a 10second sampling of the first file ineach folder. Press the SCAN buttonto get out of the scan mode. Thesystem plays the last file sampled.

To Select Repeat, Random or ScanMode:

TRACK REPEAT

FOLDER REPEAT

TRACK RANDOM

FOLDER RANDOM

TRACK SCAN

FOLDER SCAN


Features

247

09/07/16 18:27:18 31SWA630_252

When you disconnect the USB flashmemory device while it is playing,the navigation screen shows ‘‘NODATA.’’

If you reconnect the same USB flashmemory device, the system willbegin playing where it left off.

If you see an error message in thescreen, see page .

You can disconnect the USB flashmemory device at any time even ifthe USB mode is selected on theaudio system. Always follow the USBflash memory device’s instructionswhen you remove it.

To play the radio, press the AM/FMbutton or touch the FM1, FM2, AM,XM1, or XM2 icon. Touch the CDicon to switch to the disc mode (if adisc is loaded). Each time you pressthe CD/XM button, the audio modeswitches between the USB, disc andXM Radio.

If a PC card is in the audio unit,touch the CARD icon to play the PCcard.

249

To Stop Playing a USB FlashMemory Device

USB Flash Memory Device ErrorMessages

Disconnecting a USB Flash MemoryDevice


248

09/07/16 18:27:28 31SWA630_253

If you see an error message on thescreen while playing a USB flashmemory device, find the solution inthe chart to the right. If you cannotclear the error message, take yourvehicle to your dealer.

Error Message Solution

The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the USB flashmemory device. There is a possibility that the files have beendamaged.Appears when an unsupported USB flash memory device is inserted.Appears when there is no music in the flash memory device.

USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (EX-L model with navigation system)

Features

249

UNPLAYABLE FILE

UNSUPPORTEDNO SONG

09/07/29 20:50:58 31SWA630_254

How well the radio receives stationsis dependent on many factors, suchas the distance from the station’stransmitter, nearby large objects,and atmospheric conditions.

The radio can receive the completeAM and FM bands.Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHzFM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker, and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator willgo off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least 10 kHzapart (530, 540, 550). Stations on theFM band are assigned frequencies atleast 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

Radio ReceptionRadio Frequencies

AM/FM Radio Reception

250

09/07/16 18:27:43 31SWA630_255

Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.


AM/FM Radio Reception

Features

251

09/07/16 18:27:51 31SWA630_256

Handle a disc by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the disc.These, along with contaminationfrom fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tippens, can cause the disc to not playproperly, or possibly jam in the drive.

When using CD-R or CD-RW discs,use only high quality discs labeledfor audio use.

When recording a CD-R orCD-RW, the recording must beclosed for it to be used by thesystem.

When a disc is not being played,store it in its case to protect it fromdust and other contamination. Toprevent warpage, keep discs out ofdirect sunlight and extreme heat.

To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the disc from the centerto the outside edge.

A new disc may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on therecording surface of the disc,causing skipping or other problems.Remove these pieces by rubbing theinner and outer edges with the sideof a pencil or pen.

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe system or the magazine.

Play only standard, round, 5-inch(12 cm) discs. Smaller or odd-shaped discs may jam in the driveor cause other problems.

Handle your discs properly toprevent damage and skipping.

General Information Protecting Discs

Protecting Your Discs

252

09/07/16 18:28:03 31SWA630_257

Examples of these discs are shownto the right:

Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and excessively thick discs

The disc player/changer has asophisticated and delicatemechanism. If you insert a damageddisc as indicated in this section, itmay become stuck inside anddamage the audio unit.

Damaged discs Poor quality discs

1.

2. 3.

CONTINUED

Additional Information onRecommended Discs


Features

253

Sealed

Warped BurrsChipped/Cracked

With Label/Sticker

With PlasticRing

Using PrinterLabel Kit

Bubbled/Wrinkled

09/07/16 18:28:18 31SWA630_258

Small, irregular shaped discs Discs with scratches, dirty discs

CD-R or CD-RW may not play dueto the recording conditions.

Scratches and fingerprints on thediscs may cause the sound to skip.

Recommended discs are printedwith the following logo.

Audio unit may not play thefollowing formats.

4. 5.


254

Fingerprints, scratches, etc.

3-inch (8-cm) CD Triangle Shape

Arrow ShapeCan Shape

09/07/16 18:28:32 31SWA630_259

▲ ▼＋

－

＋－

Three controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. These let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the wheel.

The VOL button adjusts the volumeup ( ) or down ( ). Press the topor bottom of the button and hold ituntil the desired volume is reached,then release it.

The MODE button changes themode.

Pressing the MODE buttonrepeatedly cycles through allpossible media sources whether theyare present or not.

Pressing the MODE buttonrepeatedly cycles through all present,connected media sources. Mediasources that are not present orconnected will not appear whencycling with the MODE button.

If you are listening to the radio, usethe CH button to change stations.Each time you press the top ( ) ofthe button, the system goes to thenext preset station on the band youare listening to. Press the bottom( ) to go back to the previousstation. If you press and hold the CHbutton ( ) or ( ), the system goesinto the seek mode. It finds a stationwith a strong signal.

If equipped

On models with Navigation System

On models without Navigation System

CONTINUED

Remote Audio Controls

Features

255

CH BUTTON

MODE BUTTON

VOL BUTTON

09/07/16 18:28:42 31SWA630_260

＋

－

＋

－

＋

－

＋

－

If you are playing a disc, the systemskips to the beginning of the nexttrack (file in MP3 or WMA format)each time you press the top ( ) ofthe CH button. Press the bottom( ) to return to the beginning of thecurrent track/file. Press it twice toreturn to the previous track/file.

You will see the track/file numberand the elapsed time. If the disc hastext data or is compressed in MP3 orWMA, you can also see any otherinformation (track title, file name,folder name, etc.).

If you are playing a USB flashmemory device or iPod with the USBadapter cable, press and release thetop ( ) of the CH button to skipforward to the beginning of the nextfile. Press the bottom ( ) to skipbackward to the beginning to thecurrent file. Press it twice to returnto the previous file.

In MP3 or WMA mode, you can usethe seek function to select folders.Press and hold the top ( ) of theCH button until you hear a beep toskip forward to the first file of thenext folder. Press the bottom ( ) toskip backward to the previous folder.

If you are playing a PC card, pressthe top ( ) of the CH button toadvance to the next file. Press thebottom ( ) to go back to theprevious file.

On Navigation model

Remote Audio Controls

256

09/07/16 18:28:49 31SWA630_261

Your vehicle has the auxiliary inputjack on the front panel, on the centertable, or in the console compartment,depending on models. The systemwill accept auxiliary input fromstandard audio accessories.

When a compatible audio unit isconnected to the jack, press the AUXbutton to select it.

Playing an Optional Audio Unit

Features

257

EX-L model LX modelEX model

09/07/16 18:28:56 31SWA630_262

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, or theradio fuse is removed, the audiosystem will disable itself. If thishappens, you will see ‘‘ENTERCODE’’ in the frequency display thenext time you turn on the system.Use the preset buttons to enter thecode. On vehicles with navigationsystem, touch the icon to enter thecode number, then touch the Doneicon to set the code. The code is onthe radio code card included in yourowner’s manual kit. When it isentered correctly, the radio will startplaying.

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over; complete thesequence, then enter the correctcode. You have 10 tries to enter thecorrect code. If you are unsuccessfulin 10 attempts, you must then leavethe system on for 1 hour beforetrying again.

You should have received a card thatlists your audio system’s code andserial numbers. It is best to store thiscard in a safe place at home. Inaddition, you should write the audiosystem’s serial number in this owner’smanual.

If you lose the card, you must obtainthe code number from a dealer. Todo this, you will need the system’sserial number.

Your vehicle’s audio system willdisable itself if it is disconnectedfrom electrical power for any reason.To make it work again, you mustenter a specific code using the presetbuttons (icon on vehicle’s withnavigation system). Because thereare hundreds of numbercombinations possible from specificdigits, making the system workwithout knowing the exact code isnearly impossible.

Radio Theft Protection

258

09/07/16 18:29:03 31SWA630_263

On models with navigation system

On models without navigation system

The navigation system receivessignals from the global positioningsystem (GPS), and the displayedtime is updated automatically by theGPS. Refer to the navigation systemmanual for how to adjust the time.

Change the hours by pressing the H(hour) button until the numbersadvance to the desired time. Changethe minutes by pressing the M(minute) button until the numbersadvance to the desired time.

Press the CLOCK button again toenter the set time.

For example: 1:06 will reset to 1:001:52 will reset to 2:00

You can quickly set the time to thenearest hour. If the displayed time isbefore the half hour, press and holdthe CLOCK button, then press the R(reset) button to set the time back tothe previous hour. If the displayedtime is after the half hour, the sameprocedure sets the time forward tothe beginning of the next hour.

To set the time, press the CLOCKbutton until you hear a beep. Thedisplayed time begins to blink.

Setting the Clock

Features

259

EX and EX-L models withoutnavigation system

CLOCK BUTTON(A.SEL side of the A.SEL/SCAN bar)

HOUR BUTTON(PRESET 4)

RESET BUTTON(PRESET 6)

LX model

MINUTE BUTTON(PRESET 5)

RESET BUTTON(PRESET 3)

HOUR BUTTON(PRESET 1)

MINUTE BUTTON(PRESET 2)

CLOCK BUTTON (FM)

09/07/16 18:29:17 31SWA630_264

Next to the outside temperatureindicator of the information display,a compass indicates which directionyour vehicle is pointed. It indicateseight directions.

N: NorthS: SouthE: EastW: WestNE: NortheastNW: NorthwestSE: SoutheastSW: Southwest

For example, when your vehicle istraveling in the north-east direction,the compass shows ‘‘NE’’ in thedisplay.

Compass operation can be affectedby driving near power lines orstations, across bridges, throughtunnels, over railroad crossings, pastlarge vehicles, or driving near largeobjects that can cause a magneticdisturbance. It can also be affectedby accessories such as antennas androof racks that are mounted bymagnets.

EX model and EX-L model withoutnavigation system

Compass

Compass Operation

260

DIRECTION DISPLAY

09/07/16 18:29:25 31SWA630_265

－－

－－

－－

If you see ‘‘ ’’ in the directiondisplay when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position, thecompass is self-calibrating.

The compass may need to bemanually calibrated after exposure toa strong magnetic field. If thecompass display changes to ‘‘ ’’and the calibrate indicator blinks, orthe display does not show anydirection and the compass is not self-calibrating, do the following.

Do this procedure in an openarea, away from buildings, powerlines, and other vehicles.

In most areas, there is a variationbetween magnetic north and truenorth. Zone selection is required sothe compass can compensate for thisvariation. To check and select thezone, do this:

Drive the vehicle slowly in threecomplete circles.

When the display goes from‘‘ ’’ or blank to an actualheading, the unit is calibrated andthe display returns to normal.

Press and hold the select/resetknob for 10 seconds to change thedisplay to the reset mode.

1.1.

2.

CONTINUED

Compass

Compass Calibration Compass Zone SelectionF

eatures

261

NOTE:CALIBRATE INDICATOR

SELF-CALIBRATINGDIRECTION DISPLAY

09/07/16 18:29:36 31SWA630_266

－－

When the system does not acceptthe selected compass zone, you see‘‘ ’’ in the direction display. Selectappropriate zone number again.

Select the zone indicator byturning the select/reset knob. Thedisplay begins to blink. Push thesame knob to enter this setting.

Find the zone for your area on thezone map (see page ). Eachzone number (1 through 15)corresponds to a compass zone.

Turn the select/reset knob toselect the appropriate zonenumber, and press the select/reset knob to enter the number.

2.

3.

4.

263

Compass

262

ZONE INDICATOR

09/07/16 18:29:43 31SWA630_267

Compass

Features

263

Zone Map

09/07/16 18:29:47 31SWA630_268

If equipped

Once the security system is set,opening any door without using thekey or the remote transmitter, thehood, or the tailgate will cause thesystem to alarm.

Use the remote transmitterto quickly check that the hood, thetailgate, and all doors are closed.Push the lock button twice within 5seconds. There should be an audibleconfirmation beep.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it.

The security system automaticallysets 15 seconds after you lock thedoors, hood, and the tailgate. For thesystem to activate, you must lock thedoors and the tailgate from theoutside with the key, driver’s locktab, door lock master switch, orremote transmitter. The securitysystem indicator on the instrumentpanel starts blinking immediately toshow you the system is setting itself.

The security system helps to protectyour vehicle and valuables from theft.The horn sounds and a combinationof headlights, parking lights, sidemarker lights and taillights flash ifsomeone attempts to break into yourvehicle or remove the audio unit.This alarm continues for 2 minutes,then the system resets. To reset anactivated system before the 2minutes have elapsed, unlock thedriver’s door with the key or use theremote transmitter.

The security system will not set ifthe hood, tailgate, or any of thedoors are not fully closed. If thesystem will not set, check the doorsand the tailgate. You can also checkthe open indicator on the instrumentpanel (see page ), to see if thedoors and the tailgate are fullyclosed. Since it is not part of themonitor display, manually check thehood.

65

Security System

264

NOTE:SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

09/07/16 18:29:56 31SWA630_269

▼▲

When in reverse, the touch screenand navigation system ‘‘hard’’buttons are locked out, except the‘‘ZOOM’’ button. Touching the ‘‘ ’’or ‘‘ ’’ button allows you to adjustthe brightness of the rearviewcamera image.

Whenever you shift to reverse (R)with the ignition switch in the ON(II) position, the rearview is shownon the navigation system screen.

For the best picture, always keep therearview camera clean, and do notcover the camera lens. To avoidscratching the lens when you clean it,use a moist, soft cloth.

Since the rearview camera displayarea is limited, you should alwaysback up slowly and carefully, andlook behind you for obstacles.

On EX-L model with navigation system

Rearview Camera and Monitor

Features

265

The camera brightness cannot beadjusted by voice control.

09/07/16 18:30:03 31SWA630_270

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forcity driving, winding roads, slipperyroads, heavy rain, or bad weather.

Push the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel. The CRUISEMAIN indicator on the instrumentpanel comes on.

Press and release the SET/DECEL button on the steeringwheel. The CRUISE CONTROLindicator on the instrument panelcomes on to show the system isnow activated.

The cruise control system can beleft on, even when it is not in use.

Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

1.

2.

3.Using the Cruise Control

Cruise Control

266

SET/DECELCANCEL

RES/ACCEL

CRUISEBUTTON

Improper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

09/07/16 18:30:12 31SWA630_271

You can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the RES/ACCELbutton. When you reach thedesired cruising speed, release thebutton.

To increase the speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RES/ACCEL button. Each time you dothis, your vehicle will speed upabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Cruise control may not hold the setspeed when you are going up anddown hills. If your vehicle speedincreases going down a hill, use thebrakes to slow down. This will cancelthe cruise control. To resume the setspeed, press the RES/ACCEL button.The CRUISE CONTROL indicatoron the instrument panel will comeback on.

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the SET/DECELbutton. Each time you do this,your vehicle will slow down about1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Press and hold the SET/DECELbutton. Release the button whenyou reach the desired speed.

If you need to decrease yourspeed quickly, use the brakes as younormally would.

Push on the accelerator pedal.Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed, then press the SET/DECEL button.

Tap the brake pedal lightly withyour foot. The CRUISECONTROL indicator on theinstrument panel goes out. Whenthe vehicle slows to the desiredspeed, press the SET/DECELbutton.

CONTINUED

Changing the Set Speed

Cruise Control

Features

267

NOTE:

09/07/16 18:30:25 31SWA630_272

Even with the cruise control turnedon, you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill return to the set cruising speed.

You can cancel cruise control in anyof these ways:

Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.Resting your foot on the brake pedal

causes cruise control to cancel.

Tap the brake pedal.

Push the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel.

Pressing the CRUISE button turnsthe system off and erases theprevious cruising speed.

When you push the CANCEL button,or tap the brake pedal, the systemremembers the previously set speed.To return to that speed, accelerate toabove 25 mph (40 km/h), and thenpress and release the RES/ACCELbutton. The CRUISE CONTROLindicator comes on. The vehicleaccelerates to the same speed asbefore.

Resuming the Set SpeedCanceling Cruise Control

Cruise Control

268

09/07/16 18:30:36 31SWA630_273

－

－

Bluetooth

handsfreelink.honda.com

www.honda.ca,

HandsFreeLink (HFL)allows you to place and receivephone calls using voice commands,without handling your cell phone.

Press andrelease to give a command or answera call.

Press andrelease to end a call, go back to theprevious command, or cancel thecommand.

To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell phone. For a list ofcompatible phones, pairingprocedures, and special featurecapabilities:

In the U.S., visitor call (888) 528-7876.

In Canada, visit or call(888) 9-HONDA-9.

CONTINUED

On models with navigation systemHFL Buttons

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

Using HFL

HFL Talk button

HFL Back button

Features

269

HFL BACK BUTTON

NAVI VOICECONTROLBUTTONS

HFL TALKBUTTON

09/07/16 18:30:47 31SWA630_274

＃＃＃＃

Try to reduce all backgroundnoise. If the microphone picks upvoices other than yours,commands may be misinterpreted.

Press and release the HFL Talkbutton each time you want tomake a command. After the beep,speak in a clear, natural tone.

Air or wind noise from thedashboard and side vents and allwindows may interfere with themicrophone. Adjust or close themas necessary.

Many commands can be spokentogether. For example, you cansay ‘‘Call 123-456- ’’ or‘‘Dial Peter.’’

When HFL is in use, navigationvoice commands cannot berecognized.

To change the volume level ofHFL, use the audio system volumeknob or the steering wheel volumecontrols.

For help at any time, including alist of available commands, say‘‘Hands free help.’’

To hear general HFL information,including help on using HFLbuttons, Voice control, or makinga call, say ‘‘Tutorial.’’


Voice Control Tips Help Features

270

MICROPHONE

09/07/16 18:30:57 31SWA630_275

When there is an incoming call, orHFL is in use, ‘‘HFL’’ will appear atthe bottom of the map screen.

A notification that there is anincoming call, or HFL is in use, willappear on the navigation screenwhen the audio system is on.

As an incoming call notification, youwill see the following display:

The Bluetooth icon will alsoappear on the display when a phoneis linked.

However, when the current street isshown, and AUDIO INFO icon isvisible, ‘‘HFL’’ will not appear whenthere is an incoming call.


Information DisplayF

eatures

271

HFL MESSAGE

BLUETOOTH INDICATOR

09/07/16 18:31:08 31SWA630_276

＃＃＃＃

How to Use HFL


272

‘‘Phone Setup’’

‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial’’

‘‘Pair’’

‘‘Edit’’

‘‘Delete’’

‘‘Jim Smith’’

‘‘Set PairingCode’’

The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

‘‘List’’

‘‘Status’’

‘‘Next Phone’’

‘‘123-555- ’’

Press HFLTalk button

Press and release the HFL Talk button each time you give a command.

Pair a phone to the system (See page 275)

Edit the name of a paired phone (See page 276)

Delete a paired phone from the system (See page 276)

Hear a list of all phones paired to the system (See page 276)

Hear which paired phone is currently linked to the system(See page 277)

Search for another previously paired phone to link to (See page 277)

Set the pairing code to a ‘‘Fixed’’ or ‘‘Random’’ number(See page 277)

Enter desired phone number (See page 278)

Once a phonebook entry is stored, you can say a name here.(See page 279)

09/07/16 18:31:18 31SWA630_277

CONTINUED


Features

273

‘‘Redial’’

‘‘Transfer’’

‘‘Mute’’

‘‘Send’’

‘‘Phonebook’’

‘‘Store’’

‘‘Edit’’

‘‘Delete’’

‘‘ReceiveContact’’

‘‘List’’



Redial the last number called (See page 279)

Transfer a call from HFL to your phone, or from your phone to HFL (See page 282)

Mute your voice to the person at the other end of the call (See page 282)

Send numbers or names during a call (See page 282)

Store a phonebook entry (See page 283)

Edit the number of an existing phonebook entry (See page 283)

Delete a phonebook entry (See page 284)

If your phone supports this function, use this to transfer contacts fromyour phone to HFL (See page 284)

Hear a list of all stored phonebook entries (See page 284)

09/07/16 18:31:26 31SWA630_278

＊

＊


274

‘‘Change Language’’

‘‘Hands Free Help’’

‘‘SystemSet up’’

‘‘Tutorial’’

‘‘Clear’’

‘‘Auto Transfer’’

‘‘Call Notification’’

‘‘Security’’

‘‘Change Passcode’’



: Canadian models

Apply a security passcode to the system that must be input at each keycycle to access the system (See page 289)

Change your security passcode (See page 290)

Set how you would like to be notified of an incoming call(See page 290)

Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when youenter the vehicle (See page 290)

Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries and securitypasscode (See page 291)

Hear a tutorial for general rules on using the system (See page 270)

Change language from English to French (See page 291)

Hear a list of available commands and additional information describing each command(See page 270)

09/07/16 18:31:34 31SWA630_279

To use HFL, you need to pair yourBluetooth-compatible cell phone tothe system.

This command group is available forpaired cell phones.

You cannot pair your phone whilethe vehicle is moving.

Your phone must be in discoveryor search mode to pair. Refer toyour phone’s manual.

Up to six phones can be paired.

Your phone’s battery may drainfaster when it is paired to HFL.

If after three minutes your phoneis not ready to pair or a phone isnot found, the system will time outand return to idle.

Press and release the HFL Talkbutton. If you are pairing a phonefor the first time, HFL will giveyou information about the pairingprocess. If it is not the first phoneyou are pairing, say ‘‘

’’ and say ‘‘ .’’

Follow the HFL prompts and putyour phone in discovery or searchmode. HFL will give you a 4-digitpairing code and begin searchingfor your phone.

When your phone finds aBluetooth device, select HFL fromthe options and enter the 4-digitcode from the previous step.

Follow the HFL prompts andname the newly paired phone.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Phone Setup

Phonesetup Pair

Phone pairing tips

To pair a cell phone:


Features

275

09/07/16 18:31:48 31SWA630_280

Say ‘‘ .’’

Say ‘‘ ’’ after the prompts.

If there is more than one phonepaired to the system, HFL will askyou which phone’s name you wantto change. Follow the HFLprompts and rename the phone.

Press and release the HFL Talkbutton before a command.


Say ‘‘ .’’


HFL will ask you which phone youwant to delete. Follow the HFLprompts to continue with thedeletion.


HFL will read out all the pairedphone’s names.


Say ‘‘ .’’1.

2.

3. 3.

1.

2.1.

2.

3.

Phone setup

Edit

Phone setup

DeleteList

Phone setup

To hear the names of all pairedphones:

To rename a paired phone: To delete a paired phone:


276

09/07/16 18:32:02 31SWA630_281


Say ‘‘ .’’


HFL will tell you which phone islinked to the system.


Say ‘‘ .’’Say ‘‘ .’’


Say ‘‘ ’’ after theprompts.

HFL disconnects the linked phoneand searches for another pairedphone.

Once another phone is found, it islinked to the system. HFL willinform you which phone is nowlinked.

If no other phones are found orpaired, HFL will inform you that theoriginal phone is linked again.


If you want HFL to create arandom code each time you pair aphone, say ‘‘ .’’ If you wantto choose your own 4-digit code tobe used each time, say ‘‘ ’’and follow the HFL prompts.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

4.

To hear which paired phone iscurrently linked:

To change from the currently linkedphone to another paired phone:

To change the pairing code setting:

Phone setup

Status

Phone setupPhone setup

Next phoneSet pairing code

Random

Fixed


Features

277

09/07/16 18:32:18 31SWA630_282

You can make calls using any phonenumber or a name in the HFLphonebook. You can also redial thelast number called.


Say ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ .’’

Follow the HFL prompts and saythe phone number you want to dial.

Follow the HFL prompts toconfirm the number and say‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ .’’

Once connected, you will hear theperson you called through the audiospeakers.

Bluetooth is the wireless technologythat links your phone to HFL. HFLuses a Class 2 Bluetooth, whichmeans the maximum range betweenyour phone and vehicle is 30 feet (10meters).

During a call, HFL allows you to talkup to 30 minutes after you removethe key from the ignition switch.However, this may weaken thevehicle’s battery.

Select ‘‘ .’’

Press the INFO button, then select‘‘ .’’

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

Making a Call

Call Dial

Call Dial

Dial

Cellular Phonebook


To make a call using a phone number(talk button):

To make a call using a phone number(navigation display):

278

09/07/16 18:32:29 31SWA630_283


Follow the HFL prompts and saythe name stored in the HFLphonebook that you want to call.

Follow the HFL prompts toconfirm the name and make thecall.

Say ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ .’’

Press and release the HFL Talkbutton and say ‘‘ .’’

Press the INFO button, then select‘‘ .’’

Select ‘‘.’’

The navigation display will changeas shown above. Enter a callnumber.

To make the call, select ‘‘ .’’

To end the call, select ‘‘ .’’

1.

2.

3.

3.

4.

5.

1.

2.

CONTINUED


To make a call using a name in theHFL phonebook:

To redial the last number called byHFL:

To make a call from an importedphonebook:

Call Dial

Redial

Cellular Phonebook

Search ImportedPhonebookCALL

Hang-up

Features

279

09/07/16 18:32:45 31SWA630_284

If the phonebook you select is PIN-protected, you will need to enter thePIN to access it. See page formore information.

Select a phonebook you want tochoose a phone number from.

To search for a specific name in thephonebook, enter the keyword foreither the first or last name.

To display all names in thephonebook, select the ‘‘ ’’ option.

Select the name. All the phonenumbers stored for that name willbe listed.

Select the phone number, andHFL begins dialing.

3. 4.

5.287


List

280

List ICON

09/07/16 18:32:56 31SWA630_285

If you choose ‘‘,’’ the phone

number will be stored in HFL, sothat you can call it using HFL’s nametag by voice.

When you receive a call, an incomingcall notification (if activated) willplay and interrupt the audio systemif it is on.

Press the HFL Talk button to answerthe call, or the HFL Back button tohang up.

If your phone has Call Waiting, pressand release the HFL Talk button toput the original call on hold andanswer the incoming call.

To return to the original call, pressthe HFL Talk button again. If youdon’t want to answer the incomingcall, disregard it and continue withyour original call. If you want to hangup the original call and answer thenew call, press the HFL Back button.

Store inHandsFreeLink

Receiving a Call


Call WaitingF

eatures

281

09/07/16 18:33:05 31SWA630_286

＃

You can transfer a call from HFL toyour phone, or from your phone toHFL.

Press and release the HFL Talkbutton and say ‘‘ .’’

You can mute your voice to theperson you are talking to during acall.

HFL allows you to send numbers ornames during a call. This is usefulwhen you call a menu-driven phonesystem.To mute your voice during a call,

press and release the HFL Talkbutton and say ‘‘ .’’

To unmute your voice, press andrelease the HFL Talk button and say‘‘ ’’ again.


To send a pound ( ), say‘‘pound.’’ To send a star (*), say ‘‘star.’’

Follow the HFL prompts to sendthe tones and continue the call.

Follow the HFL prompts and saythe name or number you want tosend.

Say ‘‘ .’’1.

2.

3.

Transferring a Call

Transfer

Muting a Call Send Numbers or Names Duringa Call

Mute

MuteSend

To send a name or number during acall:


282

NOTE:

09/07/16 18:33:19 31SWA630_287

You can store up to 50 names withtheir associated numbers in HFL.The numbers you store cannot onlybe phone numbers but other types,such as account numbers orpasswords, which can be sent duringa menu-driven call.


Say ‘‘ .’’


Say a name you want to list as yourphonebook entry.

Say the number you want to storefor the name entry.

Follow the HFL prompts and say‘‘ ’’ to store the entry.

Avoid using duplicate nameentries.

Avoid using ‘‘home’’ as a nameentry.

It is easier for HFL to recognize amultisyllabic or longer name. Forexample, use ‘‘Peter’’ instead of‘‘Pete,’’ or ‘‘John Smith’’ instead of‘‘John.’’


Say ‘‘ .’’


Follow the HFL prompts and saythe name entry you want to edit.

When asked, say the new numberfor that name.

Follow the HFL prompts tocomplete the edit.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

CONTINUED

To store a phonebook entry:

To edit the number stored in a name:

Phonebook

Store

Enter

Phonebook

Edit

Phonebook


Features

283

NOTE:

09/07/16 18:33:38 31SWA630_288



Say ‘‘ .’’


Say the name you want to deleteand follow the HFL prompts tocomplete the deletion.

Say ‘‘ .’’


HFL begins reading the names inthe order they were stored.

If you hear a name you want to call,immediately press the HFL Talkbutton and say ‘‘ .’’


Follow the HFL prompts, select anumber from your cell phone, andsend it to HFL.


Say ‘‘ .’’

Follow the HFL prompts andname the number, or say‘‘ ’’ if it is not the numberyou want to store.

Follow the HFL prompts if youwant to store another number.

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

3.

5.

Phonebook

Delete

Phonebook

List

Call

Receive contact

Phonebook

Discard

To delete a name: To list all names in the phonebook: To store a specific phone numberfrom your cell phone directly to theHFL phonebook (available on somephones):


284

09/07/16 18:33:55 31SWA630_289

(available on some phones)

handsfreelink.honda.com

www.honda.ca,

If you selectfrom the Information screen menu,you will see four HFL options.

In the U.S., visitor call (888) 528-7876.

In Canada, visit or call(888) 9-HONDA-9.

The entire phonebook data of thecell phone that is linked to HFL canbe imported to the navigation system.

Select ‘‘,’’ and HFL will begin

importing the phonebook. Select‘‘ ’’ after the import is completed.

Once a phonebook has beenimported, you can search the phonenumbers by the person’s name.

Select ‘‘,’’ and a list of imported

phonebooks will be displayed.

Select a phonebook from the list.

For a list of cell phones that arecompatible with this feature:

CONTINUED

Cellular Phonebook

Cellular Phonebook

Import CellularPhonebook

OK

Search ImportedPhonebook

Import Cellular Phonebook: Search Imported Phonebook:


Features

285

IMPORTED PHONEBOOK

IMPORTED DATE

PIN ICON

09/07/16 18:34:10 31SWA630_290

Select a person from the list. Up tothree category icons are displayed inthe left side of the list:

Select the person’s number you wantto call, and press the HFL Talkbutton.

These indicate how many numbersare stored for the name. If a namehas more than three category icons,‘‘…’’ is displayed.

If the phonebook is PIN-protected,you will need to enter the 4-digit PIN.

To search for a specific name in thephonebook, enter the keyword foreither the first or last name.

To display all names in thephonebook, select the ‘‘ ’’ option.List


286

Preference

Home

Mobile

Work

Pager

Fax

Car

Voice

Other

List ICON

09/07/16 18:34:27 31SWA630_291

Select ‘‘,’’ and a list of imported

phonebooks will be displayed.

After making a selection, thefollowing screen will appear.

Select ‘‘ ,’’ then ‘‘ ’’ to completethe deletion.

You can add, change, or remove aPIN number from any phonebook.

You can delete any importedphonebook.

Select a phonebook you want todelete. If the phonebook is PIN-protected, you will need to enter the4-digit PIN number.

If you have selected a phonebookwithout a PIN, you will see the abovedisplay.

Enter the new 4-digit PIN. You willhave to re-enter the PIN forconfirmation.

CONTINUED

Delete ImportedPhonebook

Yes OK

PIN NumberDelete Imported Phonebook:

To add a PIN:


Features

287

09/07/16 18:34:42 31SWA630_292

Select ‘‘ ,’’ then select‘‘ ’’ after you enterthe current PIN.

Enter the new 4-digit PIN number.You will be asked to re-enter the PINfor verification.

The display will change as shownabove.

Select the phonebook you want. Thedisplay will change as shown above.

Enter the current PIN for thisphonebook.

To remove a PIN:To change the PIN to a new number:PIN number

Do not use PIN


288

09/07/16 18:34:53 31SWA630_293

This command group allows you tochange or customize HFL basicsettings.


Say ‘‘ .’’

Once a passcode is set, youwill need to enter it to use HFL eachtime you start the vehicle. If youforget the code, your dealer will haveto reset it for you, or you will have toclear the entire system (see page

).

Follow the HFL prompts toconfirm the number.

Follow the HFL prompts and saythe 4-digit passcode you want toset.

Say ‘‘ ’’after the prompts.

1.

2.

3.

4.

291

CONTINUED

System Setup

System setup

Security

To set a 4-digit passcode to lock theHFL system for security purposes:


Features

289

NOTE:

09/07/16 18:35:02 31SWA630_294

＊

＊

If you get into the vehicle while youare on the phone, the call can beautomatically transferred to HFLwith the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) position.


Say ‘‘ .’’


Say ‘‘ .’’Press and release the HFL Talkbutton before a command.

Say ‘‘ .’’

Follow the HFL prompts toconfirm the number.

Follow the HFL prompts and saythe new 4-digit passcode.


The default setting is a ring tone.

Follow the HFL prompts and say‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ .’’ Youcan also say ‘‘ ’’ for no audibleincoming call notification.


HFL will let you know if autotransfer is on or off, depending onthe previous setting. Follow theHFL prompts to change thesetting.


2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3. 1.

:

System setup

System setup

System setupChange passcode

Ring tone PromptOff

Call notif ication

Auto transfer

To change your security passcode: To select either a ring tone or aprompt as the incoming callnotif ication :

To activate or deactivate the autotransfer function:


290

09/07/16 18:35:18 31SWA630_295

This operation clears the passcodes,paired phones, all names in the HFLphonebook, and all importedphonebook data.


Say ‘‘ .’’


Follow the HFL prompts tocontinue to complete the clearingprocedure.

You can also clear the system whenyou have forgotten the passcode andcannot access HFL. When HFL asksyou for the passcode, say ‘‘

.’’ Paired phones, all names inthe HFL phonebook and all importedphonebook data will be lost.


Follow the HFL prompts.

Say the language you want tochange to in that language.


Follow the HFL prompts tochange the language to English orFrench.

If you have not named your pairedphone in the language you justselected, HFL will ask you to name itin the current language.

When French is your currentlyselected language, you can give voicecommands in French.

Say ‘‘ .’’

1.

2.

3.

2.

1.1.

2.

Canadian models only Canadian models only

System setup

Clear

Systemclear

Quick Language Selection Change Language

Change language

To clear the system:

To quickly change the language: To change the system languagebetween English and French:


Features

291

09/07/16 18:35:36 31SWA630_296

The name and logos areregistered trademarks owned byBluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use ofsuch marks by Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. is under license. Othertrademarks and trade names arethose of their respective owners.

BluetoothAs required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.



Bluetooth Wireless Technology


292

09/07/16 18:35:43 31SWA630_297

Before you begin driving yourvehicle, you should know whatgasoline to use and how to check thelevels of important fluids. You alsoneed to know how to properly storeluggage or packages. Theinformation in this section will helpyou. If you plan to add anyaccessories to your vehicle, pleaseread the information in this sectionfirst.

.............................Break-in Period . 294.................Fuel Recommendation . 294

.........Service Station Procedures . 295....................................Refueling . 295

........Check Fuel Cap Message . 296Opening and Closing

................................the Hood . 297...................................Oil Check . 298

.............Engine Coolant Check . 298...............................Fuel Economy . 299

...Accessories and Modifications . 302.............................Carrying Cargo . 304

Before Driving

Before

Driving

293

09/07/16 18:35:48 31SWA630_298

Help assure your vehicle’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

Do not change the oil until thescheduled maintenance time.

Avoid hard braking for the first200 miles (300 km).

During this period:

You should also follow theserecommendations with anoverhauled or exchanged engine, orwhen the brakes are replaced.

Do not tow a trailer.

Your vehicle is designed to operateon unleaded gasoline with a pumpoctane number of 87 or higher. Useof a lower octane gasoline can causea persistent, heavy metallic rappingnoise that can lead to engine damage.

In addition, in order to maintain goodperformance, fuel economy, andemissions control, we stronglyrecommend, in areas where it isavailable, the use of gasoline thatdoes NOT contain manganese-basedfuel additives such as MMT.

Use of gasoline with these additivesmay adversely affect performance,and cause the malfunction indicatorlamp on your instrument panel tocome on. If this happens, contact

your authorized dealer for service.

Some gasoline today is blended withoxygenates such as ethanol orMTBE. Your vehicle is designed tooperate on oxygenated gasolinecontaining up to 10% ethanol byvolume and up to 15% MTBE byvolume. Do not use gasolinecontaining methanol.

If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

We recommended using a qualitygasoline containing detergentadditives that help prevent fuelsystem and engine deposits.

For further important fuel-relatedinformation for your vehicle, orinformation on gasoline that does notcontain MMT, visit Owner Link at

. In Canada, visitfor additional

information on gasoline.

owners.honda.comwww.honda.ca

Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation

294

09/07/16 18:36:03 31SWA630_299

Open the fuel fill door by pullingon the handle located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.

Park with the driver’s side closestto the service station pump.

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank equalizes.The fuel fill cap is attached to thefuel filler with a tether. Place thecap in the holder on the fuel filldoor.

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Thisleaves some room in the fuel tank

for the fuel to expand withtemperature changes.

even though the tank is not full,there may be a problem with yourvehicle’s fuel vapor recoverysystem. The system helps keepfuel vapor from going into theatmosphere. Try filling at anotherpump. If this does not fix theproblem, consult your dealer.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off

Service Station Procedures

RefuelingB

eforeD

riving

295

TETHER

FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE HANDLE FUEL FILL CAP

Stop the engine, and keepheat, sparks, and flame away.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

09/07/16 18:36:15 31SWA630_300

Screw the fuel fill cap back onuntil it clicks at least once. If youdo not properly tighten the cap,the malfunction indicator lampmay come on (see page ). Youwill also see a ‘‘CHECK FUELCAP’’ message on the informationdisplay.

Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

Your vehicle’s onboard diagnosticsystem will detect a loose or missingfuel fill cap as an evaporative systemleak. The first time a leak is detecteda ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ messageappears on the information display.

Turn the engine off, and confirm thefuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosenit, then retighten it until it clicks atleast once. The message should gooff after several days of normal

driving once you tighten or replacethe fuel fill cap. To scroll to anotherdisplay, press the select/reset knob.

The ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ messagewill appear each time you restart theengine until the system turns themessage off.

If the system still detects a leak inyour vehicle’s evaporative emissionssystem, the malfunction indicatorlamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fillcap was not already tightened, turnthe engine off, and check orretighten the fuel fill cap until itclicks at least once. The MIL shouldgo off after several days of normaldriving once the cap is tightened orreplaced. If the MIL does not go off,have your vehicle inspected by adealer. For more information, seepage .

5.

6.

395

395


Check Fuel Cap Message

296

09/07/16 18:36:25 31SWA630_301

To close the hood, lift it up slightly toremove the support rod from thehole. Put the support rod back intoits holding clip. Lower the hood toabout a foot (30 cm) above thefender, then let it drop. Make sure itis securely latched.

Park the vehicle, and set theparking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.The hood will pop up slightly.

Reach in between the hood andthe front grille with your fingers.The hood latch handle is abovethe ‘‘H’’ logo. Push this handle upuntil it releases the hood. Lift thehood.

If the hood latch handle movesstiffly, or if you can open the hoodwithout lifting the handle, themechanism should be cleaned andlubricated.

Holding the grip, pull the supportrod out of its clip. Insert the endinto the hole in the hooddesignated by an arrow.

2.1. 3.

Opening and Closing the Hood


Before

Driving

297

LATCH

CLIP

GRIP SUPPORT RODHOOD RELEASE HANDLE

09/07/16 18:36:35 31SWA630_302

Wait a few minutes after turning theengine off before you check the oil.

Remove the dipstick (orangehandle).

Wipe off the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto its hole.

Remove the dipstick again, andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page .

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

Refer toon page for information

about checking other items on yourvehicle.

1.

2.

3.

4.

349

352

346

Oil Check

Adding Engine Oil

Engine Coolant Check

AddingEngine Coolant

Owner’s MaintenanceChecks


298

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

MAX

MIN

RESERVE TANKDIPSTICK

09/07/16 18:36:51 31SWA630_303

－－

－－

Fuel economy is not a fixed number.It varies based on driving conditions,driving habits and vehicle condition.Therefore, it is not possible for oneset of estimates to predict fueleconomy precisely for all drivers inall environments.

Represents urbandriving in light traffic. A range ofmiles per gallon achieved is alsoprovided.

The EPA fuel economy estimatesshown in the example to the rightare a useful tool for comparisonwhen buying a vehicle. EPAestimates include:

Represents a combination of city andhighway driving. The scalerepresents the range of combinedfuel economy for other vehicles inthe class.

Represents amixture of rural and interstatedriving, in a warmed-up vehicle,typical of longer trips in free-flowingtraffic. A range of miles per gallon

achieved is also provided.

Provides an estimated annual fuelcost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000km) per year multiplied by the cost

per gallon (based on EPA fuel costdata) divided by the combined fueleconomy.

For more information on fueleconomy ratings and factors thataffect fuel economy, visit

(Canada: Visit)

www.fueleconomy.gov www.vehicles.gc.ca

Actual Mileage and EPA FuelEconomy Estimates Comparison.

City MPGCombined Fuel Economy

Highway MPGEstimated Annual Fuel Cost

Fuel Economy

Before

Driving

299

Combined FuelEconomy

(Sample U.S. EPA label shown)

Estimated AnnualFuel Cost

City MPG Highway MPG

09/07/16 18:37:04 31SWA630_304

－

－

－

－

－

－

Aggressive driving (hardacceleration and braking)Excessive idling, accelerating andbraking in stop-and-go trafficCold engine operation (enginesare more efficient when warmedup)Driving with a heavy load or theair conditioner runningImproperly inflated tires

The following factors can lower yourvehicle’s fuel economy:

A properly maintained vehiclemaximizes fuel economy. Poormaintenance can significantly reducefuel economy. Always maintain yourvehicle according to the maintenancemessages displayed on the multi-information display (see

on page ).For example:

An underinflated tire increases‘‘rolling resistance,’’ which reducesfuel economy.

It puts a heavierload on the engine, increasing fuelconsumption.

Inparticular, a build-up of snow ormud on your vehicle’s undersideadds weight and rolling resistance.Frequent cleaning helps your fueleconomy.

Aerodynamic drag has a big effecton fuel economy at speeds above45 mph (75 km/h). Reduce yourspeed and you reduce the drag.Trailers, car top carriers, roofracks and bike racks are also bigcontributors to increased drag.

Rapidacceleration, abrupt cornering,and hard braking increase fuelconsumption.

Idlingresults in 0 miles per gallon (0 kmsper liter).

346

Fuel Economy Factors Use the recommended viscositymotor oil, displaying the APICertif ication Seal (see page

).

Improving Fuel Economy

Owner’sMaintenance Checks

Maintain proper tire inflation

Avoid carrying excess weight inyour vehicle

Keep your vehicle clean

Observe the speed limit

Drive moderately

Avoid excessive idling

349

Vehicle Maintenance

Drive Efficiently

Fuel Economy

300

09/07/16 18:37:21 31SWA630_305

－

－

Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off.Reset trip counter to zero.Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill.Follow one of the simple calculations above.

The A/Cputs an extra load on the enginewhich makes it use more fuel. Usethe fresh-air ventilation whenpossible.

Direct calculation is therecommended source of informationabout your actual fuel economy.Using frequency of fill-ups or takingfuel gauge readings are NOTaccurate measures of fuel economy.Fuel economy may improve over thefirst several thousand miles(kilometers).

Combine several short trips intoone. A warmed-up engine is morefuel efficient than a cold one.

1)2)3)4)

Checking Your Fuel Economy

Measuring Techniques

Minimize the use of the airconditioning system

Calculating Fuel Economy

Plan and combine trips

Fuel Economy

Before

Driving

301

Milesdriven

Gallonsof fuel

Miles perGallon

100 KilometersL per

100 kmLiter

09/07/16 18:37:33 31SWA630_306

Modifying your vehicle, or installingsome non-Honda accessories, canmake it unsafe. Before you make anymodifications or add any accessories,be sure to read the followinginformation.

Before installing any accessory:

Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper vehicle operation orperformance.

Before installing any electronicaccessory, have the installercontact your dealer for assistance.If possible, have your dealerinspect the final installation.

Do not install accessories on theside pillars or across the rearwindows. Accessories installed inthese areas may interfere withproper operation of the sidecurtain airbags.

Your dealer has Honda accessoriesthat allow you to personalize yourvehicle. These accessories havebeen designed and approved for yourvehicle, and are covered by warranty.

Although non-Honda accessoriesmay fit on your vehicle, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your vehicle’shandling and stability.

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ) or interfere withproper operation of your vehicle.

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your vehicle’scomputer controlled systems, suchas your airbags, anti-lock brakes, andtire pressure monitoring system.

398

Accessories and Modifications

Accessories

302

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourvehicle’s handling, stability, andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

09/07/16 18:37:45 31SWA630_307

Raising your vehicle with anon-Honda suspension kit canaffect the handling and stability.

Removing parts from your vehicle,or replacing components, withnon-Honda components couldseriously affect your vehicle’shandling, stability, and reliability.

Here are some examples:

Lowering the vehicle with a non-Honda suspension kit thatsignificantly reduces groundclearance can allow theundercarriage to hit speed bumpsor other raised objects, whichcould cause the airbags to deploy.

Non-Honda wheels, because theyare a universal design, can causeexcessive stress on suspensioncomponents, and are notcompatible with the tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS).

Larger or smaller wheels and tirescan interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s anti-lock brakes andother systems.

Modifying your steering wheel orany other part of your vehicle’ssafety features can make thesystems ineffective.

If you plan to modify your vehicle,consult your dealer.

Accessories and Modifications

Modifying Your VehicleB

eforeD

riving

303

09/07/16 18:37:55 31SWA630_308

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

Your vehicle has several convenientstorage areas:

Lower glove boxUpper glove box

Console compartmentDoor pocketsSeat-back pocketsSeat-under tray (if equipped)Center pocketCargo area, including the rearseats when folded up or down.Upper and lower cargo areas withthe dual deck cargo shelf (ifequipped)

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour vehicle’s handling, stability,stopping distance, and tires, andmake it unsafe. Before carrying anytype of cargo, be sure to read thefollowing pages.

Roof-rack (if equipped)

Carrying Cargo

304

CENTER POCKET

LOWERGLOVE BOX

CARGO AREA

: If equipped

DOOR POCKETSDUAL DECK CARGO SHELF

SEAT-BACK POCKETS

CENTER CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

UPPER GLOVE BOX

SEAT UNDER TRAY

09/07/30 11:03:35 31SWA630_309

－ ×

－

The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity. Forexample, if the ‘‘XXX’’ amountequals 1,400 lbs. and there will befive 150 lb. passengers in yourvehicle, the amount of availablecargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs.(1,400 750 (5 150) = 650 lbs.)

Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo being loadedon the vehicle. That weight maynot safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer willbe transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kg or XXX lbs.

Determine the combined weightof the driver and passenger thatwill be riding in your vehicle.

Locate the statement ‘‘Thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXXkg or XXX lbs.’’ on your vehicle’splacard.

Steps for Determining Correct LoadLimit

The maximum load for your vehicleis 850 lbs (385 kg) for U.S. vehicles,and 395 kg for Canadian vehicles.This figure includes the total weightof all occupants, cargo, andaccessories, and the tongue load ifyou are towing a trailer.

See Tire And Loading Informationlabel attached to the driver’sdoorjamb.

This figure includes the total weightof all occupants, cargo, andaccessories, and the tongue load ifyou are towing a trailer.

Label Example (1)

(2)

(3)

(6)

(5)

(4)

CONTINUED

Load Limits

Carrying Cargo

Before

Driving

305

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

09/07/16 18:38:24 31SWA630_310

In addition, the total weight of thevehicle, all occupants, accessories,cargo, and trailer tongue load mustnot exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) or the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). Bothare on a label on the driver’sdoorjamb.

Example 1

Example 2

Example 3

Carrying Cargo

306

Max Load (850 lbs)

Max Load (850 lbs)

Max Load (850 lbs)

Passenger Weight(150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs)



Cargo Weight(550 lbs)



09/07/16 18:38:30 31SWA630_311

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunderneath and interfere with theproper operation of the seats, thesensors under the seats, or thedriver’s ability to operate thepedals.

Keep the lower glove box closedwhile driving. If it is open, apassenger could injure their kneesduring a crash or sudden stop.

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing thetailgate, exhaust gas can enter thepassenger area. To avoid thepossibility of

, follow the instructionson page .

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the cargo area, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible. Tiedown items that could be thrownabout the vehicle during a crash orsudden stop.

Do not stack items higher than theback of the rear seats. They canblock your view and be thrownaround the vehicle during a crash.

If you fold the rear seats up ordown, tie down items that could bethrown about the vehicle during acrash or sudden stop. Also, keepall cargo below the bottom of thewindows. If it is higher, it couldinterfere with the proper operationof the side curtain airbags.

Do not use the dual deck cargo shelfwith any rear seat folded up or down.

55

CONTINUED

If equipped

Carrying Cargo in the PassengerCompartment

carbon monoxidepoisoning

Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Areaor on a Roof Rack

Carrying Cargo

Before

Driving

307

09/07/16 18:38:43 31SWA630_312

If you carry any items on a roofrack, be sure the total weight ofthe rack and the items does notexceed 165 lbs (75 kg).

If you use an accessory roof rack,the roof rack weight limit may belower. Refer to the information thatcame with your roof rack.

Do not exceed the dual deck cargoshelf load limit of 20 lbs on U.S.models, and 10 kg on Canadianmodels.

Do not use the dual deck cargo shelfif the rear seats are folded down.

Do not put any items on the dualdeck cargo shelf that could blockyour view or be thrown around thevehicle during a crash.

If equipped

On U.S. model is shown

Carrying Cargo on the Dual DeckCargo Shelf

Carrying Cargo

308

09/07/16 18:38:52 31SWA630_313

The four hooks on the floor can beused to install a net for securingitems.

The separation net can be used tohold back soft, lightweight itemsstored in the cargo area. Heavyitems should be properly secured onthe floor of the cargo area. The netmay not prevent heavy items frombeing thrown forward in a crash or asudden stop.

Your vehicle also has cargo hooks onthe side panel in the cargo area.They are designed to hold lightitems. Heavy objects may damagethe hook. Make sure any items puton each hook weigh less than 6.5 lbs(3 kg).

If equipped

Cargo HooksOptional Separation Net

Carrying Cargo

Before

Driving

309

HOOKS

09/07/30 11:03:44 31SWA630_314

310

09/07/16 18:39:04 31SWA630_315

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate theautomatic transmission. It alsoincludes important information onparking your vehicle, the brakingsystem, the vehicle stability assist(VSA ) system, the tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS), andfacts you need if you are planning totow a trailer or drive off-highway.

........................Driving Guidelines . 312

........................Preparing to Drive . 313.......................Starting the Engine . 314

..............Automatic Transmission . 315...........................................Parking . 320

.............................Braking System . 321...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 322

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ),aka Electronic Stability

........Control (ESC), System . 324Tire Pressure Monitoring System

......................................(TPMS) . 326...........................Towing a Trailer . 329

Towing Your Vehicle Behind a................................Motorhome . 334

Off-Highway Driving..................................Guidelines . 336

Driving

Driving

311

09/07/16 18:39:09 31SWA630_316

Because your vehicle rides higheroff the ground, it has a high centerof gravity that can cause it to rollover if you make abrupt turns. Utilityvehicles have a significantly higherroll over rate than other types ofvehicles.

To prevent rollovers or loss ofcontrol:

Take corners at slower speedsthan you would with a passengervehicle.

Avoid sharp turns and abruptmaneuvers whenever possible.

Do not carry heavy cargo on theroof.

Do not modify your vehicle in anyway that would raise the center ofgravity.

You still need to exercise the samecare when accelerating, steering, andbraking that you would in a two-wheel drive vehicle.

Your vehicle has higher groundclearance that allows you to travelover bumps, obstacles, and roughterrain. It also provides goodvisibility so you can anticipateproblems earlier.

Your vehicle is equipped with a four-wheel drive (4WD) system. Whenthe system senses a loss of front-wheel traction, it automaticallytransfers some power to the rearwheels. This gives you bettertraction and mobility.

Four-wheel drive models

See page for off-highway drivingguidelines.

336

Driving Guidelines

312

09/07/16 18:39:19 31SWA630_317

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage ).

Check the steering wheeladjustment (see page ).

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

Make sure the doors and thetailgate are securely closed andlocked.

You should do the following checksand adjustments before you driveyour vehicle.

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

Check that the hood is fully closed.

Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure.

Check that any items you may becarrying are stored properly orfastened down securely.

When you start the engine, checkthe gauges and indicators in theinstrument panel (see pages to

).

Check the seat adjustment (seepages and ).

1.

2.

10.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

114

81

15

6861

97 98

Preparing to Drive

Driving

313

09/07/16 18:39:31 31SWA630_318

Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. Do not holdthe key in the START (III)position for more than 15 secondsat a time. If the engine does notstart right away, pause for at least10 seconds before trying again.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Starting the Engine

314

The immobilizer system protects yourvehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly-coded key (or other device) is used, theengine’s f uel system is disabled. Formore inf ormation, see page .

The engine is harder to start in coldweather. Also, the thinner air f ound ataltitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400meters) adds to this problem.

83

09/07/16 18:39:41 31SWA630_319

These indicators on the instrumentpanel show which position the shiftlever is in.

The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it flashes while driving (inany shift position), it indicates apossible problem in the transmission.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on along with the ‘‘D’’indicator, there is a problem with theautomatic transmission controlsystem. Avoid rapid acceleration, andhave the transmission checked byyour dealer as soon as possible.

To shift from any position, pressfirmly on the brake pedal and therelease button on the side of theshift lever. You cannot shift out ofPark when the ignition switch is inthe LOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I)position.

CONTINUED

Shift Lever Position Indicators Shifting

Automatic Transmission

Driving

315

SHIFT LEVER

RELEASEBUTTON


09/07/16 18:39:51 31SWA630_320

－－

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see onpage .

This position mechani-cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and have your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Press the releasebutton on the side of the shift leverto move it.

To avoid transmission damage, cometo a complete stop before shiftinginto Park. You must also press therelease button to shift into Park. Theshift lever must be in Park beforeyou can remove the key from theignition switch.

Press the brakepedal and the release button on theside of the shift lever to shift fromPark to reverse. To shift fromreverse to neutral, come to acomplete stop and then shift. Pressthe release button before shiftinginto reverse from neutral.

319

To shift from:

P to R

R to PN to RD to 22 to 11 to 22 to DD to NN to DR to ND to DD to D

Do this:Press the brake pedal andpress the shift lever releasebutton.

Press the shift lever releasebutton.

Move the shift lever.

Press the D button.3

3

3


Shift Lock Release

Park (P) Reverse (R)

316

09/07/16 18:39:58 31SWA630_321

－

－

Use neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to the Parkposition if you need to leave yourvehicle for any reason. Press on thebrake pedal when you are movingthe shift lever from neutral toanother gear.

Use this position foryour normal driving. Thetransmission automatically selects asuitable gear (1 through 5) for yourspeed and acceleration. You maynotice the transmission shifting up athigher engine speeds when theengine is cold. This helps the enginewarm up faster.

Press the D3 switch on the side ofthe shift lever to turn this mode onor off; the D3 mode indicator comeson whenever the D3 mode isselected.

D3 mode can be turned on or offonly when the ignition switch is inthe ON (II) position and the shiftlever is in the D position.

When the D3 mode is on, thetransmission selects only the firstthree gears. Use D3 mode whentowing a trailer, or to provide enginebraking when going down a steep hill.D3 mode can also keep thetransmission from cycling betweenthird and fourth gears in stop-and-godriving.

CONTINUED

Neutral (N)

Drive (D)


D3 ModeD

riving

317

D3 MODE INDICATORD3 SWITCH

09/07/16 18:40:08 31SWA630_322

－

－

Turning the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position turns this modeoff. When you restart the engine,select the D position and press theD3 mode switch again to use thismode.

The D3 mode indicator also comeson for a few seconds when you turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position.

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce therpm below the red zone.

Use second gear:For more power when climbing.

To increase engine braking whengoing down steep hills.

For starting out on a slipperysurface or in deep snow.

To help reduce wheel spin.

When driving downhill with atrailer.

To shift to second,press the release button on the sideof the shift lever. This position locksthe transmission in second gear. Itdoes not downshift to first gearwhen you come to a stop.

To shift from second tofirst, press the release button on theside of the shift lever. This positionlocks the transmission in first gear.By upshifting and downshiftingthrough 1, 2, D , and D, you canoperate the transmission much like amanual transmission without aclutch pedal.

Shifting out from the D position willcancel the D3 mode, and the D3indicator will go out. Selecting the Dposition again will resume the D3mode and the indicator comes on.

If you shift into first gear when thevehicle speed is above 31 mph (50km/h), the transmission shifts intosecond gear first to avoid suddenengine braking.

3


Engine Speed Limiter

Second (2)

First (1)

318

09/07/16 18:40:22 31SWA630_323

This allows you to move the shiftlever out of Park if the normalmethod of pushing on the brakepedal and pressing the releasebutton does not work.

Set the parking brake.

Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

Put a cloth on the edge of the shiftlock release slot cover. Using asmall flat-tipped screwdriver ormetal fingernail file, carefully pryon the edge of the cover to removeit.

Insert the key in the shift lockrelease slot.

Push down on the key while youpress the release button on theshift lever and move the shift leverout of Park to neutral.

If you need to use the shift lockrelease, it means your vehicle isdeveloping a problem. Have thevehicle checked by your dealer.

Remove the key from the shiftlock release slot, then reinstall thecover. Make sure the notch on thecover is on the right side. Insertthe key back into the ignitionswitch, press the brake pedal, andrestart the engine.

6.

1.

2.

3.4.

5.


Shift Lock ReleaseD

riving

319

SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT

RELEASE BUTTONCOVER

09/07/16 18:40:34 31SWA630_324

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your vehicle. Make surethe parking brake is set firmly, oryour vehicle may roll if it is parkedon an incline.

Make sure the moonroof (ifequipped) and the windows areclosed.

Turn off the lights.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.in the cargo area or take themwith you.

Set the parking brake before you putthe transmission in Park. This keepsthe vehicle from moving and puttingpressure on the parking mechanismin the transmission.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from thecurb.

If the vehicle is facing downhill,turn the front wheels toward thecurb.

Make sure the parking brake isfully released before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat ordamage the rear brakes.

Lock the doors and the tailgate.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The hot three waycatalytic converter could causethese materials to catch on fire.

Check the indicator on theinstrument panel to verify that thesecurity system is set.

If equipped

Parking Tips

Parking

320

09/07/16 18:40:47 31SWA630_325

Your vehicle is equipped with discbrakes at all four wheels. A powerassist helps reduce the effort neededon the brake pedal. The anti-lockbrake system (ABS) helps you retainsteering control when braking veryhard.

Check your brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Be extracautious and alert in your driving.

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

The front and rear disc brakes on allmodels have audible brake wearindicators.

If the brake pads need replacing, youwill hear a distinctive, metallicscreeching sound when you applythe brake pedal. If you do not havethe brake pads replaced, they willscreech all the time. It is normal forthe brakes to occasionally squeal orsqueak when you apply them.

Resting your foot on the pedal keepsthe brakes applied lightly, builds upheat, reduces their effectiveness andreduces brake pad life. In addition,fuel economy can be reduced. It alsokeeps your brake lights on all thetime, confusing drivers behind you.

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by taking your foot off theaccelerator and downshifting to alower gear.

Braking System

Braking System Design

Brake Pad Wear IndicatorsD

riving

321

09/07/16 18:40:57 31SWA630_326

The anti-lock brake system (ABS)helps prevent the wheels fromlocking up, and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly, much faster than aperson can do it.

The electronic brake distribution(EBD) system, which is part of theABS, also balances the front-to-rearbraking distribution according tovehicle loading.

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal: it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes. On drypavement, you will need to press onthe brake pedal very hard before theABS activates. However, you mayfeel the ABS activate immediately ifyou are trying to stop on snow or ice.

If this indicator comes on, the anti-lock function of the braking systemhas shut down. The brakes still worklike a conventional system, butwithout anti-lock. You should haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

If the ABS indicator comes on whiledriving, test the brakes as shown onpage .

Let the ABS work for you by alwayskeeping firm, steady pressure on thebrake pedal. This is sometimesreferred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’

396You should never pump the brake pedal.

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

ABS Indicator

322

09/07/16 18:41:04 31SWA630_327

If the ABS indicator and the brakesystem indicator come on together,and the parking brake is fullyreleased, the EBD system may alsobe shut down.

It only helps with thesteering control during braking.

such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safespeed for the road and weatherconditions.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your vehicle to veerinto oncoming traffic or off the road.

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock.

Test your brakes as instructed onpage . If the brakes feel normal,drive slowly and have your vehiclerepaired by your dealer as soon aspossible. Avoid sudden hard brakingwhich could cause the rear wheels tolock up and possibly lead to a loss ofcontrol.

The VSA system indicator may comeon along with the ABS indicator ifthere is a problem with the anti-lockbrake system.

396

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

ABS does not reduce the time ordistance it takes to stop thevehicle.

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability.

Important Safety Reminders A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stop

Driving

323

09/07/16 18:41:13 31SWA630_328

The vehicle stability assist (VSA)system helps to stabilize the vehicleduring cornering if the vehicle turnsmore or less than desired. It alsoassists you in maintaining tractionwhile accelerating on loose orslippery road surfaces. It does thisby regulating the engine’s output andby selectively applying the brakes.

When VSA activates, you may noticethat the engine does not respond tothe accelerator in the same way itdoes at other times. There may alsobe some noise from the VSAhydraulic system. You will also seethe VSA activation indicator blink.

The VSA system cannot enhance thevehicle’s driving stability in allsituations and does not control yourvehicle’s entire braking system. It isstill your responsibility to drive andcorner at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.

The main function of theVSA system is generally known asElectronic Stability Control (ESC).The system also includes a tractioncontrol function.

When VSA activates, you will see theVSA system indicator blink.

If this indicator comes on whiledriving, pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe, and turn off theengine. Reset the system byrestarting the engine. If the VSAsystem indicator stays on or comesback on while driving, have the VSAsystem inspected by your dealer.

If the indicator does not come onwhen the ignition switch is turned tothe ON (II) position, there may be aproblem with the VSA system. Haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

When VSA is off, the VSA offindicator comes on as a reminder.

If the low tire pressure indicator orTPMS indicator comes on, the VSAsystem automatically turns on even ifthe VSA system is turned off bypressing the VSA OFF switch (seepage ). If this happens, youcannot turn the VSA system off bypressing the VSA OFF switch again.

Without VSA, your vehicle will havenormal braking and cornering ability,but it will not have VSA traction andstability enhancement.

325

Vehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

VSA Off Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

324

NOTE:

09/07/16 18:41:27 31SWA630_329

VSA is turned on every time youstart the engine, even if you turned itoff the last time you drove thevehicle.

In certain unusual conditions whenyour vehicle gets stuck in shallowmud or fresh snow, it may be easierto free it with the VSA temporarilyswitched off. When the VSA systemis off, the traction control system isalso off. You should only attempt tofree your vehicle with the VSA off ifyou are not able to free it when theVSA is on.

Immediately after freeing yourvehicle, be sure to switch the VSA onagain. We do not recommend drivingyour vehicle with the VSA andtraction control systems switched off.

Driving with varying tire or wheelsizes may cause the VSA tomalfunction. When replacing tires,make sure they are the same sizeand type as your original tires (seepage ).

If you install winter tires, make surethey are the same size as those thatwere originally supplied with yourvehicle. Exercise the same cautionduring winter driving as you would ifyour vehicle was not equipped withVSA.This switch is under the driver’s side

vent. To turn the VSA system on andoff, press and hold it until you hear abeep.

When VSA is off, the VSA offindicator comes on as a reminder.Press and hold the switch again. Itturns the system back on.

374

VSA OFF Switch VSA and Tire Sizes

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

Driving

325

VSA OFF SWITCH

09/07/16 18:41:38 31SWA630_330

Your vehicle is equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that turns on every time you start theengine and monitors the pressure inyour tires while driving.

When the low tire pressure indicatoris on, one or more of your tires issignificantly underinflated. Youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure as indicated onthe vehicle’s tire information placard.

If you think you can safely drive ashort distance to a service station,proceed slowly, and inflate the tire tothe recommended pressure shownon the driver’s doorjamb.

If the tire is flat, or if the tirepressure is too low to continuedriving, replace the tire with thecompact spare tire (see page ).

If you cannot make the low tirepressure indicator go out afterinflating the tires to the specifiedvalues, have your dealer check thesystem as soon as possible.

Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Underinflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Because tire pressure varies bytemperature and other conditions,the low tire pressure indicator maycome on unexpectedly.

Each tire has its own pressuresensor (not including the spare tire).If the air pressure of a tire becomessignificantly low while driving, thesensor in that tire immediately sendsa signal that causes the low tirepressure indicator to come on.

382

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Low Tire PressureIndicator

326

09/07/16 18:41:47 31SWA630_331

For example, if you check and fillyour tires in a warm area, then drivein extremely cold weather, the tirepressure will be lower thanmeasured and could be underinflatedand cause the low tire pressureindicator to come on. Or, if youcheck and adjust your tire pressurein cooler conditions, and drive intoextremely hot conditions, the tiremay become overinflated. However,the low tire pressure indicator willnot come on if the tires areoverinflated.

Refer to page for tire inflationguidelines.

When you restart the vehicle withthe compact spare tire, the TPMSindicator may also come on and stayon after driving several miles(kilometers).

Although your tire pressure ismonitored, you must manually checkthe tire pressures monthly.

Each tire, including the spare, shouldbe checked monthly when cold, andset to the recommended inflationpressure as specified on the tire

information label and in the owner’smanual (see page ).

This indicator comes on and stays onif there is a problem with the tirepressure monitoring system.

If this happens, the system will shutoff and no longer monitor tirepressures. Have the system checkedby your dealer as soon as possible.

If the low tire pressure indicator orTPMS indicator comes on, the VSAsystem automatically turns on even ifthe VSA system is turned off bypressing the VSA OFF switch (seepage ). If this happens, youcannot turn the VSA system off bypressing the VSA OFF switch again.

370

371

325


Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) Indicator

Driving

327

09/07/16 18:41:59 31SWA630_332




If you have a flat tire, the low tirepressure indicator will come on.Replace the flat tire with thecompact spare tire (see page ).

Each wheel (except the compactspare tire wheel) is equipped with atire pressure sensor. You must useTPMS specific wheels. It isrecommended that you always haveyour tires serviced by your dealer orqualified technician.

The low tire pressure indicator orthe TPMS indicator will go off, afterseveral miles (kilometers) driving,when you replace the spare tire withthe specified regular tire equippedwith the tire pressure monitor sensor.

Never use a puncture-repairing agentin a flat tire. If used, you will have toreplace the tire pressure sensor.Have the flat tire repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible.

After you replace the flat tire withthe compact spare tire, the low tirepressure indicator stays on. This isnormal; the system is not monitoringthe spare tire pressure. Manuallycheck the spare tire pressure to besure it is correct. After several miles(kilometers) driving with thecompact spare tire, the TPMSindicator comes on and the low tirepressure indicator goes off.

382


Changing a Tire with TPMS

328

09/07/17 15:38:52 31SWA630_333

Your vehicle has been designedprimarily to carry passengers andtheir cargo. You can also use it totow a trailer if you carefully observethe load limits, use the properequipment, and follow the guidelinesin this section.

Themaximum allowable weight of thetrailer and everything in or on itmust not exceed 1,500 lbs (680 kg).Towing a load that is too heavy canseriously affect your vehicle’shandling and performance. It canalso damage the engine anddrivetrain.

Be sure to read thesection on page

if you plan to tow off pavedsurfaces.

Avoid towing a trailer during yourvehicle’s first 600 miles (1,000 km)(see page ).

336

294

CONTINUED

Towing a Trailer

Load Limits

Total Trailer Weight:Off-Highway

Driving Guidelines

Break-In Period

Driving

329

Exceeding any load limit orimproperly loading your vehicleand trailer can cause a crash inwhich you can be seriously hurtor killed.

Check the loading of yourvehicle and trailer carefullybefore starting to drive.

09/07/16 18:42:17 31SWA630_334

－

－

－

The best way to confirm that allloads are within limits is to checkthem at a public scale. For publicscales in your area, check your localphone book, or contact your trailerdealer or rental agency forassistance.

To achieve a proper tongue load,start by loading 60% of the loadtoward the front of the trailer and40% toward the rear, then re-adjustthe load as needed.

The maximumallowable weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, all accessories, all cargo,and the tongue load is 4,560 lbs(2,070 kg).

The weight that thetongue of a fully-loaded trailer putson the hitch should be approximately10% of the total trailer weight. Toomuch tongue load reduces front-tiretraction and steering control. Toolittle tongue load can make thetrailer unstable and cause it to sway.

The maximumallowable weight of the fully loadedvehicle and trailer is 6,060 lbs (2,750kg)

The maximumallowable weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, all accessories, all cargo,and the tongue load must not exceed2,310 lbs (1,050 kg) on the front axle,and 2,290 lbs (1,040 kg) on the rearaxle.

If you normally pull the same loadeach time you tow a trailer, you canuse a suitable scale or a specialtongue load gauge to check thetongue load the first time you set upa towing combination (a fully loadedvehicle and trailer), then recheck thetongue load whenever the conditionschange.

If you cannot get to a public scale,you can estimate the total trailerweight by adding the weight of yourtrailer (as quoted by themanufacturer) with everything in oron the trailer.

Towing a Trailer

Checking Loads

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR)

Tongue Load:

Gross Combined Weight Rating(GCWR)

Gross Axle Weight Ratings(GAWR)

330

09/07/16 18:42:28 31SWA630_335

Towing can require a variety ofequipment, depending on the size ofyour trailer, how it will be used, howmuch load you are towing, andwhere you tow.Discuss your needs with your trailersales or rental agency, and follow theguidelines in this section. Also makesure that all equipment is properlyinstalled and maintained, and that itmeets federal, state, province,territory, and local regulations.

See your trailer dealer or rentalagency for more information oninstalling electric brakes.

If you choose electric brakes, besure they are electronically actuated.Do not attempt to tap into yourvehicle’s hydraulic system. Nomatter how successful it may seem,any attempt to attach trailer brakesto your vehicles hydraulic systemwill lower braking effectiveness andcreate a potential hazard.

Always use safety chains when youtow a trailer. Make sure the chainsare secured to the trailer and hitch,and that they cross under the tongueand can catch the trailer if itbecomes unhitched. Leave enough

slack to allow the trailer to turncorners easily, but do not let thechains drag on the ground.

Any hitch used on your vehicle mustbe properly bolted to the underbody.

There are two common types oftrailer brakes: surge and electric.Surge brakes are common for boattrailers, since the brakes will get wet.

Trailer lights and equipment mustcomply with federal, state, province/territory, and local regulations.Check trailer light requirements forthe areas where you plan to tow, anduse only equipment designed foryour vehicle.

CONTINUED

Towing a Trailer

Trailer Lights

Trailer Brakes

Safety Chains

Hitches

Towing Equipment andAccessories

Driving

331

09/07/16 18:42:40 31SWA630_336

When preparing to tow, and beforedriving away, be sure to check thefollowing:

The vehicle has been properlyserviced, and the suspension andthe cooling system are in goodoperating condition.

The trailer has been properlyserviced and is in good condition.

All weights and loads are withinlimits.

The hitch, safety chains, and anyother attachments are secure.

All items in or on the trailer areproperly secured and cannot shiftwhile you drive.

Many states and Canadianprovinces/territories require specialoutside mirrors when towing a trailer.Even if they don’t, you should installspecial mirrors if you cannot clearlysee behind you, or if the trailercreates a blind spot.

Since lighting and wiring vary bytrailer type and brand, you shouldhave a qualified technician install asuitable connector between thevehicle and the trailer. Improperequipment or installation can causedamage to your vehicle’s electricalsystem and affect your vehiclewarranty.

Your vehicle has a trailer lightingconnector located behind the leftside panel in the cargo area. Refer tothe drawing above for the wiringcolor code and purpose of each pin.

If you use a non-Honda trailerlighting harness and converter, youcan get the connector and pins thatmate with the connector in yourvehicle from your dealer.

Ask your trailer sales or rentalagency if any other items arerecommended or required for yourtowing situation.

Towing a Trailer

Pre-Tow Checklist

Additional Towing Equipment

332

HAZARD(PINK)

TRAILER(WHITE)

TAILLIGHT(RED)

RIGHTTURNSIGNAL(BROWN)

BRAKELIGHT(LIGHTGREEN)

GROUND(BLACK)

LEFT TURNSIGNAL(ORANGE)

09/07/16 18:42:55 31SWA630_337

Crosswinds and air turbulencecaused by passing trucks can disruptyour steering and cause the trailer tosway. When being passed by a largevehicle, keep a constant speed, andsteer straight ahead. Do not try tomake quick steering or brakingcorrections.

If you must stop when facing uphill,use the foot brake or parking brake.Do not try to hold the vehicle inplace by pressing on the accelerator,as this can cause the automatictransmission to overheat.

When driving down hills, reduceyour speed and use the D3 position.Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, andremember it will take longer to slowdown and stop when towing a trailer.

When climbing hills, closely watchyour temperature gauge. If it nearsthe red (Hot) mark, turn the air

conditioning off, reduce speed and, ifnecessary, pull to the side of theroad to let the engine cool.

Make turns more slowly and widerthan normal. The trailer tracks asmaller arc than your vehicle, and itcan hit or run over something thevehicle misses. Allow more time anddistance for braking. Do not brake orturn suddenly as this could cause thetrailer to jackknife or turn over.

Drive slower than normal in alldriving situations, and obey postedspeed limits for vehicles with trailers.Use the D position when towing atrailer on level roads. D is theproper shift lever position to usewhen towing a trailer in hilly terrain.(See ‘‘ ’’ in thefollowing column for additional gearinformation.)

The lights and brakes on yourvehicle and the trailer are workingproperly.

Your vehicle tires and spare areproperly inflated, and the trailertires and spare are inflated asrecommended by the trailermaker.

The added weight, length, andheight of a trailer will affect yourvehicle’s handling and performance,so driving with a trailer requiressome special driving skills andtechniques.

For your safety and the safety ofothers, take time to practice drivingmaneuvers before heading for theopen road, and follow the guidelinesin this section.

3

CONTINUED

Towing a Trailer

Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting

Driving on Hills

Making Turns and Braking

Driving on Hills

Towing Speeds and Gears

Driving Safely With a Trailer

Driving

333

09/07/16 18:43:10 31SWA630_338

Your vehicle can be towed behind amotorhome at legal highway speedsup to 65 mph (100 km/h). Do notexceed 65 mph (100 km/h).Otherwise, severe transmissiondamage will occur. To avoid damageto the 4WD system, your vehiclemust be towed with all four wheelson the ground (flat towing).

When purchasing a tow bar, makesure you select a reputablemanufacturer and installer. Followthe manufacturer’s attachmentinstructions carefully.

Perform the following procedureevery day immediately before youbegin towing. Otherwise severeautomatic transmission damage willoccur.

Always drive slowly and havesomeone guide you when backing up.Grip the of the steering wheel,then turn the wheel to the left to getthe trailer to move to the left, andturn the wheel right to move thetrailer to the right.

Follow all normal precautions whenparking, including firmly setting theparking brake and putting thetransmission in Park. Also, placewheel chocks at each of the trailer’stires.

Leave the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) position so thesteering wheel does not lock.Make sure the radio and any itemsplugged into the accessory powersockets are turned off so you donot run down the battery.

Release the parking brake.

Shift to D position and hold for 5seconds, then to N. Let the enginerun for 3 minutes, then turn it off.

Press on the brake pedal. Movethe shift lever through all itspositions.

Check the transmission fluid level(see page ).Start the engine.

355

bottom

Do not overfill.

Towing a Trailer, Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome

Towing Your Vehicle Behind aMotorhome

Backing Up

Parking

334

09/07/16 18:43:24 31SWA630_339

If you tow more than 8 hours in oneday, you should repeat the aboveprocedure at least every 8 hours(when you stop for fuel, etc.)

Only remove the fuse after you haveperformed the transmission shiftingprocedure, and the key is in theACCESSORY (I) position. Store thefuse in an obvious location (centertray, coin pockets, etc) as a reminderto re-install the fuse before driving

the vehicle.When towing your vehicle for longperiods, remove the 7.5 A AccessoryRadio fuse to reduce drain on battery.This fuse is located in the interiorfuse box and is shown as number 34below.

If you tow a CR-V behind amotorhome, the transmission fluidmust be changed every 2 years or30,000 miles (48,000 km), whichevercomes first.

Extended Towing

Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome

Driving

335

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

ACCESSORY RADIO FUSE

The steering system can be damaged ifthe steering wheel is locked. Leave theignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)position, and make sure the steeringwheel turns f reely bef ore you begintowing.

Failure to f ollow the recommendedinstructions exactly will result in severeautomatic transmission damage. If youcannot shif t the transmission or startthe engine, your vehicle must betransported on a f lat-bed truck ortrailer.

Severe transmission damage will occurif the vehicle is shif ted f rom reverse toneutral and then towed with the drivewheels on the ground.

09/07/16 18:43:35 31SWA630_340

To avoid loss of control or rollover,be sure to follow all precautions andrecommendations.

If you decide to drive on unpavedroads, you will find that it requiressomewhat different driving skills.Your vehicle will also handlesomewhat differently than it does onpavement. So be sure to read thisowner’s manual, pay special attentionto the precautions and tips in thissection, and get acquainted withyour vehicle before you leave thepavement.

Your vehicle has been designedprimarily for use on pavement. Butits higher ground clearance allowsyou to occasionally travel on unpavedroads, such as campgrounds, picnicsites, and similar locations. It is notdesigned for trail-blazing, mountainclimbing, or other challenging off-road activities.

Be sure to store cargo properlyand do not exceed your cargo loadlimits (see page and ).

Wherever you drive, make sureyou and your passengers alwayswear seat belts.

Keep your speed low, and nevergo faster than the conditions allow.

It’s up to you to continually assessthe situation and drive within thelimits.

305 330

General Information Important Safety Precautions

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

336

Follow all instructions andguidelines in this owner’smanual.Keep your speed low, anddon’t drive faster thanconditions permit.

Improperly operating thisvehicle on or off pavement cancause an accident or rollover inwhich you and your passengerscould be seriously injured orkilled.

09/07/16 18:43:47 31SWA630_341

Before you leave the pavement, besure to do all scheduled maintenanceand service, and inspect your vehiclefor any problems. Pay specialattention to the condition of the tires,and check the tire pressures.

After you return to the pavement,carefully inspect your vehicle tomake sure there is no damage thatcould make driving it unsafe.Recheck the condition of the tiresand the tire pressures.

The route presents limits (too steepor bumpy roads). You have limits(driving skill and comfort). And yourvehicle has limits (traction, stability,and power).

Driving off-highway can behazardous if you fail to recognizelimits and take the properprecautions.

For better traction on all surfaces,accelerate slowly and gradually buildup speed. If you try to start too faston wet soil, mud, snow, or ice, youmight not have enough traction toget underway, and you may digyourself a hole. Starting with theshift lever in second (2) gear willhelp you have a smoother start onsnow or ice.

Keep in mind that you will usuallyneed more time and distance tobrake to a stop on unpaved surfaces.Avoid hard braking. Do not ‘‘pump’’the brakes; let the anti-lock brakingsystem pump them for you.

Debris in the road can damage yoursuspension or other components.Because your vehicle has a highcenter of gravity, driving over a largeobstacle, or allowing a wheel to dropinto a deep hole can cause yourvehicle to tip or roll over.

If you can’t clearly see all conditionsor obstacles on a slope, walk theslope before you drive on it. If youhave any doubt whether or not youcan safely drive on the slope, don’tdo it. Find another route.

If you are driving up a hill and findthat you cannot continue,

. Your vehicle could rollover. Slowly back down the hill,following the same route you took upthe hill.

do not try toturn around

Check Out Your Vehicle

Remember

Accelerating and Braking Avoiding Obstacles

Driving on Slopes


Driving

337

09/07/16 18:44:00 31SWA630_342

Avoid driving through deep water. Ifyou encounter water in your route (asmall stream or large puddle, forexample), evaluate it carefully beforegoing ahead. Make sure it is shallow,flowing slowly, and has firm groundunderneath. If you are not sure ofthe depth or the ground, turn aroundand find another route.

Driving through deep water can alsodamage your vehicle. The water canget into the transmission anddifferential, diluting the lubricantand causing an eventual failure. Itcan also wash the grease out of thewheel bearings.

Avoid driving on soft sand, deep mud,or other surfaces where you couldget stuck. If you do happen to getstuck because of inclement weatheror other conditions, choose a safeand appropriate course of action.

You should never use a jack to trygetting unstuck. A jack only workson firm, level ground. Also, yourvehicle could easily slip off the jackand hurt you or someone else.

If you spin the wheels excessivelytrying to get unstuck, you mayoverheat the components of the4-wheel drive system. If this happens,the 4-wheel drive system shuts offand only the front wheels receivepower. If this happens, stop andallow everything to cool down. The4-wheel drive system will work againafter its temperature drops.

If you slip the clutch for a long timewhile trying to get unstuck, you mayoverheat and damage it.

If You Get StuckCrossing a Stream 4-Wheel Drive Vehicles


338

09/07/16 18:44:10 31SWA630_343

This section explains why it isimportant to keep your vehicle wellmaintained and how to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

If you have the skills and tools toperform more complex maintenancetasks on your vehicle, you may wantto purchase the service manual. Seepage for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your dealer.

This section also includesinstructions on how to read themaintenance minder messages onthe information display, andinstructions for simple maintenancetasks you may want to take care ofyourself.

......................Maintenance Safety . 340....................Maintenance Minder . 341

..............................Fluid Locations . 348........................Adding Engine Oil . 349

Changing the Engine Oil and...........................................Filter . 350

..............................Engine Coolant . 352....................Windshield Washers . 354

....Automatic Transmission Fluid . 355.................Rear Differential Fluid . 357

....................................Brake Fluid . 357....................Power Steering Fluid . 358

.............................................Lights . 359................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 365

.....................................Floor Mats . 365..............................Audio Antenna . 366

..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 366.................................Wiper Blades . 367

...............................................Tires . 370...........................................Wheels . 376

...................Checking the Battery . 376.............................Vehicle Storage . 378

425

Maintenance

Maintenance

339

09/07/16 18:44:18 31SWA630_344

To eliminate potential hazards, readthe instructions before you begin,and make sure you have the toolsand skills required.

Make sure your vehicle is parkedon level ground, the parking brakeis set, and the engine is off.

To clean parts, use a commerciallyavailable degreaser or partscleaner, not gasoline.

To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,and flames away from the batteryand all fuel-related parts.

Wear eye protection andprotective clothing when workingwith the battery or compressed air.

Be sure there isadequate ventilation whenever youoperate the engine.

Let theengine and exhaust system cooldown before touching any parts.

Donot run the engine unlessinstructed to do so.

All service items not detailed in thissection should be performed by acertified technician or other qualifiedmechanic.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

Maintenance Safety


Potential Vehicle HazardsCarbon Monoxide poison fromengine exhaust.

Burns from hot parts.

Injury from moving parts.

340

Improperly maintaining thisvehicle, or failing to correct aproblem before driving cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations andschedules in this owner’smanual.

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner’smanual.

09/07/16 18:44:31 31SWA630_345

－－－－－－－－－－－－

CONTINUED

Calculated EngineOil Life (%)100 % 91 %90 % 81 %80 % 71 %70 % 61 %60 % 51 %50 % 41 %40 % 31 %30 % 21 %20 % 16 %15 % 11 %10 % 6 %5 % 1 %

0 %

DisplayedEngine Oil Life (%)

100 %90 %80 %70 %60 %50 %40 %30 %20 %15 %10 %5 %0 %

The remaining engine oil life isshown on the display according tothis table:

To see the current engine oil life,turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, then press and releasethe select/reset knob repeatedlyuntil the engine oil life indicatorappears (see page ).

Your vehicle displays engine oil lifeand maintenance service items onthe information display to show youwhen you should have your dealer doengine oil replacement and indicatedmaintenance service.

Based on the engine operatingconditions, the onboard computer inyour vehicle calculates the remainingengine oil life and displays it as apercentage.

68

Maintenance Minder

Engine Oil Life DisplayM

aintenance

341

SELECT/RESET KNOB

ENGINE OIL LIFE INDICATOR

09/07/16 18:44:42 31SWA630_346

When the remaining engine oil life is5 to 1 percent, you will see a‘‘SERVICE’’ message along with thesame maintenance item code(s),every time you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

If the remaining engine oil life is 15to 6 percent, you will see the engineoil life indicator every time you turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position. The maintenance minderindicator will also come on, and themaintenance item code(s) for otherscheduled maintenance itemsneeding service will be displayedbelow the engine oil life indicator.

The 15 and 10 percent oil lifeindicators remind you that yourvehicle will soon be due forscheduled maintenance.

Maintenance Minder

342

MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR

ENGINE OILLIFEINDICATOR

MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE(S)

09/07/16 18:44:50 31SWA630_347

If you do not perform the indicatedmaintenance, negative distancetraveled is displayed and begins toblink after the vehicle has beendriven 10 miles (10 km) or more.

Negative distance traveled meansyour vehicle has passed themaintenance required point.

When the remaining engine oil life is0 percent, the engine oil life indicatorwill blink. The display comes onevery time you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. Themaintenance minder indicator( ) also comes on and remainson in the instrument panel. Whenyou see this message, immediatelyhave the indicated maintenance doneby your dealer.

The maintenance item code or codesindicate the main and sub itemsrequired at the time of the oil change(see page ).

You can switch the informationdisplay from the engine oil lifedisplay to the odometer or theaverage fuel mileage, press andrelease the select/reset knob on theinstrument panel.

When the engine oil life is 15 to 1percent, the maintenance minderindicator ( ) comes on everytime you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, then it goes outif you switch the information display.

When you see this message, havethe indicated maintenanceperformed by your dealer as soon aspossible.

Immediately have the indicatedmaintenance done by your dealer.

347

CONTINUED

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance

343

NEGATIVE DISTANCE TRAVELED

09/07/16 18:45:03 31SWA630_348

Your dealer will reset the displayafter completing the requiredmaintenance service. You will see‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the informationdisplay the next time you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

If maintenance service is done bysomeone other than your dealer,reset the maintenance minder asfollows:

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

Press the select/reset knobrepeatedly until the engine oil lifeis displayed.

All maintenance items displayed onthe information display are in code.For an explanation of thesemaintenance codes, see page .

To change the information displayfrom the engine oil life display to theodometer or the average fuelmileage, press and release theselect/reset knob.

Immediately have the serviceperformed, and make sure to resetthe display as described as follows.

When the engine oil life is 0 percentor negative distance traveled, themaintenance minder indicator( ) remains on even if youchange the information display.

1.

2.347

Maintenance Minder

Resetting the Engine Oil LifeDisplay

Maintenance Main Items and SubItems

344

MAIN ITEM

SUB ITEM(S)

09/07/16 18:45:15 31SWA630_349

CONTINUED

If you have the required servicedone but do not reset the display, orreset the display without doing theservice, the system will not show thecorrect maintenance intervals. Thiscan lead to serious mechanicalproblems because you will no longerhave an accurate record of whenmaintenance is needed.

Your authorized Honda dealerknows your vehicle best and canprovide competent, efficient service.

Press the select/reset knob forabout 10 seconds. The informationdisplay shows the reset modeinitial display as shown.

Select the ‘‘OIL LIFE’’ indicator byturning the select/reset knob. Thedisplay begins to blink. Push thesame knob to enter this setting.

The engine oil life and themaintenance item code(s) willbegin to blink. Press the select/reset knob for another 5 seconds.

The maintenance item code(s) willdisappear, and the engine oil lifewill reset to ‘‘100.’’

4.

3. 5.

6.

Maintenance Minder

Important MaintenancePrecautions

Maintenance

345

EX, EX-L model is shown.

09/07/16 18:45:27 31SWA630_350

－

－

－

－

－

＃

－

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .

Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See page

.

Brakes Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page .

Tires Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the appropriatepage listed.

U.S. Vehicles:

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, allmaintenance services should beperformed in accordance with theintervals indicated by theinformation display.

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,and license plate light monthly.See page .

We recommend using Honda partsand fluids whenever you havemaintenance done. These aremanufactured to the same highquality standards as the originalcomponents, so you can be confidentof their performance and durability.

However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orperson who is skilled in this type ofautomotive service. Make sure tohave the service facility or personreset the display as previouslydescribed. Keep all receipts as proofof completion, and have the personwho does the work fill out yourHonda Service History or CanadianMaintenance Log. Check yourwarranty booklet for moreinformation.

355

357

359

298

298

370

Maintenance Minder

Owner’s Maintenance Checks

Maintenance,replacement, or repair ofemissions control devices andsystems may be done by anyautomotive repair establishmentor individual using parts that are‘‘certif ied’’ to EPA standards.

346

09/07/16 18:45:40 31SWA630_351

＊

＊

＊

＃

＃

＃

＊

＊

Maintenance Minder

347

: See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page .

Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy.

If the message ‘‘SERVICE’’ does not appear more than 12 months after thedisplay is reset, change the engine oil every year.

Independent of the maintenance items in the information display, replacethe brake fluid every 3 years.

NOTE:

1 :

2 : 4WD

346

Maintenance Sub ItemsRotate tiresReplace air cleaner element

If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every15,000 miles (24,000 km).

Replace dust and pollen filterIf you drive primarily in urban areas that have highconcentrations of soot in the air from industry andfrom diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000miles (24,000 km).

Inspect drive beltReplace transmission fluid

If you tow a CR-V behind a motorhome, thetransmission fluid must be changed every 2 yearsor 30,000 miles (48,000 km), whichever comes first.

Replace spark plugsInspect valve clearanceReplace engine coolantReplace rear differential fluid

Maintenance Main ItemsReplace engine oilReplace engine oil and oil filterInspect front and rear brakesCheck parking brake adjustmentInspect these items:

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and lines (including ABS/VSA)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connections

AB

Symbol Symbol12

3

4

56 2

1

1

Main

tenance

Min

der

09/07/16 18:45:50 31SWA630_352

Fluid Locations

348

ENGINE OILFILL CAP

POWER STEERINGFLUID(Red cap)

ENGINECOOLANTRESERVOIR

RADIATOR CAP

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

ENGINE OILDIPSTICK(Orange handle)

BRAKE FLUID(Black cap)

09/07/16 18:45:55 31SWA630_353

Unscrew and remove the engine oilfill cap on top of the valve cover.Pour in the oil slowly and carefully soyou do not spill any. Clean up anyspills immediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, andtighten it securely. Wait a fewminutes, and recheck the oil level onthe engine oil dipstick. Do not fillabove the upper mark; you could

damage the engine.

Oil is a major contributor to yourengine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-grade 0W-20detergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute’s latest requirements.

Honda Motor Oil is the preferred0W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It ishighly recommended that you useHonda Motor Oil in your vehicle foroptimum engine protection. Makesure the API Certification Seal says‘‘For Gasoline Engines’’.

The oil viscosity or weight isprovided on the container’s label.0W-20 oil is formulated for year-round protection of your vehicle toimprove cold weather starting andfuel economy.

Adding Engine Oil

Recommended Engine Oil

Maintenance

349

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

Ambient Temperature

API CERTIFICATION SEAL

09/07/16 18:46:08 31SWA630_354

Your vehicle does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect the engine or transmissionperformance and durability.

Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

Open the hood, and remove theengine oil fill cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.

You may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil: itdisplays the API certification seal,and it is the proper weight. You mustfollow the oil and filter changeintervals shown on the informationdisplay.

Always change the oil and filteraccording to the maintenancemessages shown on the informationdisplay. The oil and filter collectcontaminants that can damage yourengine if they are not removedregularly.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the vehicle. The vehicleshould be raised on a service station-type hydraulic lift for this service.Unless you have the knowledge andproper equipment, you should havethis maintenance done by a skilledmechanic.

1.

2.

Synthetic Oil

Engine Oil Additives

Changing the Engine Oil andFilter

Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Engine Oil and Filter

350

OIL DRAIN BOLT

WASHER

09/07/16 18:46:19 31SWA630_355

Remove the oil filter, and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from yourdealer) is required.

Make sure the oil filter gasket isnot stuck to the contacting surfaceof the engine. If it is, remove itbefore installing a new oil filter.

Let the engine run for severalminutes, then check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

Turn off the engine and let it sitfor several minutes, then checkthe oil level on the dipstick. Ifnecessary, add more oil.

Replace the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator should go out within 5seconds. If it does not, turn off theengine, and check your work.

Refill the engine with the recom-mended oil.

Engine oil change capacity(including filter):

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten the drain bolt to:

Install a new oil filter according tothe instructions that come with it.Make sure to clean off any dirtand dust on the contacting surfaceof a new oil filter.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Changing the Engine Oil and Filter

Maintenance

351

OIL FILTER

4.4 US qt (4.2 )

29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)

Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmf ul to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

09/07/16 18:46:31 31SWA630_356

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is notavailable, you may use anothermajor-brand non-silicate coolant as atemporary replacement. Make sure itis a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.Continued use of any non-Hondacoolant can result in corrosion,causing the cooling system tomalfunction or fail. Have the coolingsystem flushed and refilled withHonda antifreeze/coolant as soon aspossible.

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAX line.Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

Always use Honda Long-life Anti-freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolantis pre-mixed with 50 percentantifreeze and 50 percent distilledwater. Never add straight antifreezeor plain water.

Engine Coolant

Adding Engine Coolant

352

RESERVE TANK

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

09/07/16 18:46:39 31SWA630_357

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your vehicle’scooling system. They may not becompatible with the coolant orengine components.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Make sure the engine and radiatorare cool.

The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.

Pour the coolant slowly andcarefully so you do not spill any.Clean up any spill immediately; itcould damage components in theengine compartment.

Put the radiator cap back on, andtighten it fully.

Relieve any pressure in the coolingsystem by turning the radiator capcounterclockwise, withoutpressing down.

Remove the radiator cap bypushing it down and turning itcounterclockwise.

3.

4.

2.

1.

5.

6.

Engine Coolant

Maintenance

353

RADIATOR CAP

09/07/16 18:46:49 31SWA630_358

Check the fluid level in thewindshield washer reservoir at leastmonthly during normal use.

Check the fluid level by removingthe cap and looking at the levelgauge.

The low washerlevel indicator comes on when thelevel is low (see page ).

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.

When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition the blade edges.

67

On Canadian models:

Windshield Washers

354

LEVEL GAUGE

Do not use engine antif reeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir. Antif reezecan damage your vehicle’s paint, whilea vinegar/water solution can damagethe windshield washer pump. Use onlycommercially-available windshieldwasher f luid.

09/07/16 18:46:57 31SWA630_359

CONTINUED

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Park the vehicle on level ground.Start the engine, let it run until theradiator fan comes on, then shutoff the engine. For accurateresults, wait about 60 seconds (butno longer than 90 seconds) beforedoing step 2.

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If the level is below the lowermark, add fluid into the dipstickhole to bring it to the levelbetween the upper and lowermarks.

Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission, and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefullyso you do not spill any. Clean upany spill immediately; it coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Always use Honda GenuineATF-Z1 (automatic transmissionfluid).

1.

2.

3.

5.

4.

Automatic Transmission Fluid

Maintenance

355

DIPSTICK

UPPERMARK

LOWERMARK

09/07/16 18:47:09 31SWA630_360

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

Make sure the rubber cap on thedipstick fits in the dipstick guideand that you push the dipstick inall the way.

If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your dealer.

6.

Automatic Transmission Fluid

356

Use only Honda Genuine ATF-Z1(automatic transmission f luid). Do notmix with other transmission f luids.Using transmission f luid other thanHonda Genuine ATF-Z1 may causedeterioration in transmission operationand durability, and could result indamage to the transmission.Damage resulting f rom the use oftransmission f luid other than HondaGenuine ATF-Z1 is not covered by theHonda new vehicle warranty.

09/07/16 18:47:16 31SWA630_361

4WD model only

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your vehicle’sbraking system and can causeextensive damage.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid cancause corrosion and decrease the lifeof the system. Have the brakesystem flushed and refilled withHonda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 as soon as possible.

Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement.

The rear differential should bedrained and refilled with new fluidaccording to the maintenancemessages shown on the informationdisplay. Have your dealer replace therear differential fluid.

Replace the brake fluid according tothe maintenance messages shown onthe information display.

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

Check the fluid level in the brakefluid reservoir monthly.

Use Honda Dual Pump Fluid II only.Do not use automatic transmissionfluid (ATF).

Rear Differential Fluid Brake Fluid

Rear Differential Fluid, Brake Fluid

Maintenance

357

MAX

MIN

09/07/16 18:47:29 31SWA630_362

Check the level on the side of thereservoir when the engine is cold.The fluid should be between theUPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.If not, add power steering fluid to theUPPER LEVEL.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully soyou do not spill any. Clean up anyspills immediately; it could damagecomponents in the enginecompartment.

Always use Honda Power SteeringFluid. You may use another powersteering fluid as an emergencyreplacement, but have the powersteering system flushed and refilledwith Honda PSF as soon as possible.

A low power steering fluid level canindicate a leak in the system. Checkthe fluid level frequently, and havethe system inspected as soon aspossible.

Power Steering Fluid

358

LOWER LEVEL

UPPER LEVEL

Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef tor right lock and holding it there candamage the power steering pump.

09/07/16 18:47:37 31SWA630_363

CONTINUED

The headlights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thecargo area or pull a trailer,readjustment may be required.Adjustments should be done by yourdealer or another qualifiedtechnician.

Your vehicle has halogen headlightbulbs. When replacing a bulb, handleit by its base, and protect the glassfrom contact with your skin or hardobjects. If you touch the glass, cleanit with denatured alcohol and a cleancloth.

Open the hood.

To change the headlight bulb onthe driver’s side, remove theunder-hood fuse box from its stayby pulling it out.

1.

Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight Bulb

Lights

Maintenance

359

Halogen headlight bulbs get very hotwhen lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratchon the glass can cause the bulb tooverheat and shatter.

09/07/16 18:47:47 31SWA630_364

→

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pulling theconnector straight back.

Remove the rubber weather sealby pulling on the tab.

Unclip the end of the hold-downwire from its slot. Pivot it out ofthe way, and remove the bulb.

Install the new bulb into the hole,making sure the tabs are in theirslots. Pivot the hold-down wireback in place, and clip the end intothe slot.

Install the rubber seal over theback of the headlight assembly.Make sure one of the three arrowson the rubber seal is facing up; it ismarked ‘‘ .’’

Push the electrical connector ontothe new bulb. Make sure it isconnected securely. Turn on theheadlights to test the new bulb.

(Driver’s side)Reinstall the under-hood fuse box.

4.

2.

3.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Lights

360

BULB

WEATHER SEAL CONNECTOR

09/07/16 18:47:58 31SWA630_365

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Turn on the lights to make surethe new bulb is working.

(Driver’s side)Reinstall the coolant reserve tank.

Open the hood.

To change the turn signal bulb onthe driver’s side, remove theengine coolant reserve tank bypulling it out of its holder.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.

1. 2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Lights

Replacing a Front Turn SignalLight Bulb

Maintenance

361

HOLDER

BULB

SOCKET

09/07/16 18:48:09 31SWA630_366

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.


Reinstall the fuse box in placesecurely.

(Driver’s side)

Open the hood.

To change the parking light/frontside marker on the driver’s side,remove the fuse box from its stayby pulling out.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.


1. 2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Lights

Replacing a Parking Light/FrontSide Marker Light Bulb

362

FUSE BOX

On the passenger’s side

BULB

SOCKET

09/07/16 18:48:22 31SWA630_367

Determine which of the four bulbsis burned out: stop/taillight, back-up light, turn signal, or sidemarker.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Use a Phillips-head screwdriver toremove the taillight assemblymounting screw under each cover.

Pull the taillight assembly out ofthe rear pillar.

Open the tailgate. Place a cloth onthe edge of the cover to preventscratches. Remove the covers bycarefully prying on the edge with asmall flat-tip screwdriver.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1.

CONTINUED

Replacing Rear Bulbs

Lights

Maintenance

363

BULBSCOVER

SCREWS

BULBS

09/07/29 20:55:12 31SWA630_368

Reinstall the socket into the lightassembly by turning it clockwiseuntil it locks.

Align the clips on the taillightassembly with the holes in thebody, then push the taillightassembly into place. Tighten thetwo mounting screws securely andreinstall the covers.



Open the tailgate. Place a cloth on the side edge ofthe cover to prevent scratches.Remove the cover by carefullyprying on the edge with a smallflat-tip screwdriver and pulling thecover off.

Unlatch the top of the cover bypulling back on it with your hands.

Remove the socket from the lightassembly by turning it one-quarterturn counterclockwise.

1. 2.

6.

7.

8.

9.

3.

Replacing a High-mount BrakeLight Bulb

Lights

364

09/07/16 18:48:46 31SWA630_369

CONTINUED

Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

If your seat belts get dirty, use a softbrush with a mixture of mild soapand warm water to clean them. Donot use bleach, dye, or cleaningsolvents. Let the belts air-dry beforeyou use the vehicle.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.Press the brake pedal to makesure the new bulb is working.Put the socket back into the lightassembly, and turn it clockwise tolock it in place.Put the cover back on the lightassembly. Push it in until it locksin place.

The floor mats that came with yourvehicle hook over the floor matanchors. This keeps the floor matsfrom sliding forward, possiblyinterfering with the pedals, orbackwards, making the frontpassenger’s weight sensorsineffective.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Floor MatsCleaning the Seat Belts

Lights, Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor Mats

Maintenance

365

BULB

SOCKET LOOP

ANCHOR

09/07/16 18:48:59 31SWA630_370

If you remove a floor mat, make sureto re-anchor it when you put it backin your vehicle.

If you use a non-Honda floor mat,make sure it fits properly and that itcan be used with the floor matanchors. Do not put additional floormats on top of the anchored mats.

This filter removes the dust andpollen that is brought in from theoutside through the heating andcooling system/climate controlsystem.

Have your dealer replace this filterwhen this service is indicated by amaintenance message on theinformation display. It should bereplaced every 15,000 miles (24,000km) if you drive primarily in urbanareas that have high concentrationsof soot in the air, or if the airflowfrom the heating and coolingsystem/climate control systembecomes less than usual.

Dust and Pollen FilterAudio Antenna

Floor Mats, Audio Antenna, Dust and Pollen Filter

366

Your vehicle is equipped with anantenna at the rear of the roof . Bef oreusing a ‘‘drive-through’’ car wash,remove the antenna by unscrewing it byhand. This prevents the antenna f rombeing damaged by the car wash brushes.

09/07/16 18:49:07 31SWA630_371

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every six months.Replace them if you find signs ofcracking in the rubber, areas that aregetting hard, or if they leave streaksand unwiped areas when used.

To replace a front wiper blade:

Raise each wiper arm off thewindshield, lifting the driver’s sidefirst, then the passenger’s side.

Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm:

Press and hold the lock tab.

Slide the blade assembly towardthe lock tab until it releases fromthe wiper arm.

When replacing a wiper blade,make sure not to drop the wiperblade or wiper arm down on thewindshield.

Remove the blade from its holderby grasping the tabbed end of theblade. Pull firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

1.

2.3.

CONTINUED

Wiper Blades

Maintenance

367

LOCK TAB

WIPER ARMS

FRONT

BLADE

Do not open the hood when the wiperarms are raised, or you will damagethe hood and the wiper arms.

09/07/16 18:49:21 31SWA630_372

Place the top of the wiper blade onthe end of the blade assembly, andslide the blade onto the assemblyin the direction pointed to by thearrow.Make sure the blade is completelyinstalled.

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metalreinforcement along the backedge, remove the metalreinforcement strips from the oldwiper blade, and install them inthe slots along the edge of the newblade.

Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

Lower the wiper arm down againstthe windshield, the passenger’sside first, then the driver’s side.

Make sure the three rubber tabsinside the blade fit to each notchof the reinforcement, as shown.

5.

6.

7.

4.

Wiper Blades

368

REINFORCEMENT BLADE

TOP

09/07/16 18:49:31 31SWA630_373

Lower the wiper arm against thewindshield.

Install the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

Slide the new blade into the holder.Make sure it is engaged in the slotalong its full length.Insert both ends of the blade intothe holder. Make sure they aresecure.

Pull one end of the blade out fromthe holder.Slide the blade out of the holder.

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metalreinforcement along the backedge, remove the metalreinforcement strips from the oldwiper blade, and install them inthe slots along the edge of the newblade.

To replace a rear wiper blade:

Raise the wiper arm off the rearwindow.

Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm by pivoting theblade assembly upward.

3.

5.

4.

6.

7.

1.

2.

Wiper Blades

Maintenance

369

REAR

09/07/16 18:49:45 31SWA630_374

To safely operate your vehicle, yourtires must be the proper type andsize, in good condition with adequatetread, and correctly inflated.

The following pages give moredetailed information on how to takecare of your tires and what to dowhen they need to be replaced.

Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly,adversely affect handling and fueleconomy, and are more likely tofail from being overheated.

Overinflated tires can make yourvehicle ride more harshly, aremore prone to damage from roadhazards, and wear unevenly.

The tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) warns you when a tirepressure is low. See page formore information.

Even though your vehicle isequipped with TPMS, werecommend that you visually checkyour tires every day. If you think atire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

326

Inflation Guidelines

Tires

370

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

09/07/16 18:49:55 31SWA630_375

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure in each tire at least once amonth. Even tires that are in goodcondition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) permonth. Remember to check thespare tire at the same time.

If you check air pressures when thetires are hot (driven for severalmiles/kilometers), you will seereadings 4 to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3to 0.4 kgf/cm ) higher than the coldreadings. This is normal. Do not letair out to match the recommendedcold air pressure. The tire will beunderinflated.

You should get your own tirepressure gauge and use it wheneveryou check your tire pressures. Thiswill make it easier for you to tell if apressure loss is due to a tire problemand not due to a variation betweengauges.

While tubeless tires have someability to self-seal if they arepunctured, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tire starts losingpressure.

The following chart shows therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal and high-speed drivingconditions.

The compact spare tire pressure is:

For convenience, the recommendedtire sizes and cold tire pressures areon a label on the driver’s doorjamb.

For additional information aboutyour tires, see page .

Check the air pressures when thetires are cold. This means thevehicle has been parked for at least 3hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6km). Add or release air, if needed, tomatch the recommended cold tirepressures on this page.

410

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressurefor Normal Driving

Front/Rear:

Tires

Recommended Tire PressuresM

aintenance

371

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

225/65R17 102T 30 psi (210 kPa ,2.1 kgf/cm )

09/07/16 18:50:09 31SWA630_376

Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:

Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

Excessive tread wear.

Your tires have wear indicatorsmolded into the tread. When thetread wears down, you will see a 1/2inch (12.7 mm) wide band across thetread. This shows there is less than1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left onthe tire.

A tire this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tire if you can see threeor more tread wear indicators.

The service life of your tires isdependent on many factors,including, but not limited to, drivinghabits, road conditions, vehicleloading, inflation pressure,maintenance history, speed, andenvironmental conditions (evenwhen the tires are not in use).

Tires

Tire Inspection Tire Service Life

372

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR

09/07/16 18:50:20 31SWA630_377

In addition to your regularinspections and inflation pressuremaintenance, it is recommended thatyou have annual inspectionsperformed once the tires reach fiveyears old. It is also recommendedthat all tires, including the spare, beremoved from service after 10 yearsfrom the date of manufacture,regardless of their condition or stateof wear.

The last four digits of the TIN (tireidentification number) are found onthe sidewall of the tire and indicatethe date of manufacture (See

on page ).

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

Have your dealer check the tires ifyou feel a consistent vibration whiledriving. A tire should always berebalanced if it is removed from thewheel. When you have new tiresinstalled, make sure they arebalanced. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. For best results,have the installer perform a dynamicbalance.

To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, rotatethe tires according to themaintenance messages displayed onthe information display. Move thetires to the positions shown in thediagram each time they are rotated.If you purchase directional tires,rotate only front-to-back.When the tires are rotated, makesure the air pressures are checked.

412

Tires

TireLabeling

Tire Maintenance Tire RotationM

aintenance

373

(For Non-directionalTires and Wheels)

Front

(For DirectionalTires and Wheels)

Front

On vehicles with aluminum wheels,improper wheel weights can damageyour vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Useonly Honda wheel weights f orbalancing.

09/07/16 18:50:32 31SWA630_378

Replace your tires with radial tires ofthe same size, load range, speedrating, and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire’s sidewall).

Mixing radial and bias-ply tires onyour vehicle can reduce brakingability, traction, and steeringaccuracy. Using tires of a differentsize or construction can cause theABS and vehicle stability assistsystem (VSA) to work inconsistently.

The ABS and VSA system work bycomparing the speed of each wheel.When replacing tires, use the samesize originally supplied with thevehicle. Tire size and constructioncan affect wheel speed and maycause the system to activate.

It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, replace the two fronttires or two rear tires as a pair.Replacing just one tire can seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling.

If you ever replace a wheel, makesure that the wheel’s specificationsmatch those of the original wheels.

Also be sure you use only TPMSspecific wheels. If you do not, thetire pressure monitoring system willnot work on that tire.

Replacement wheels are available atyour dealer.

Wheels:

Tires:

See page for DOT tire qualitygrading information, and page

for tire size and labelinginformation.

410

412

Tires

Replacing Tires and Wheels

Wheel and Tire Specifications

374

17 x 6 1/2J

225/65R17 102T

Installing improper tires on yourvehicle can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.

09/07/16 18:50:46 31SWA630_379

＋

CONTINUED

Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘AllSeason’’ on the sidewall have an all-weather tread design suitable formost winter driving conditions.

For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

If you mount snow tires on yourvehicle, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas original tires. Mount snow tires onall four wheels. The tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay be lower than your original tires.Check with the tire dealer formaximum speed recommendations.

Mount tire chains on your tires whenrequired by driving conditions orlocal laws. Install them only on thefront tires.

Because your vehicle has limited tireclearance, Honda stronglyrecommends using the chains listedbelow, made by Security ChainCompany (SCC).

Cable-type: SCC Radial ChainTC2111MM

Tires

Winter Driving

Snow Tires

Tire ChainsM

aintenance

375

Using the wrong chains, or notproperly installing chains, candamage the brake lines andcause a crash in which you canbe seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding theselection and use of tire chains.

09/07/16 18:50:57 31SWA630_380

When installing cables, follow themanufacturer’s instructions, andmount them as tight as you can.Make sure they are not contactingthe brake lines or suspension. Driveslowly with them installed. If youhear them coming into contact withthe body or chassis, stop andinvestigate. Remove them as soon asyou begin driving on cleared roads.

Clean the wheels as you would therest of the exterior. Wash them withthe same solution, and rinse themthoroughly.

Aluminum alloy wheels have aprotective clear-coat that keeps thealuminum from corroding andtarnishing. Cleaning the wheels withharsh chemicals (including somecommercial wheel cleaners) or a stiffbrush can damage the clear-coat. Toclean the wheels, use a milddetergent and a soft brush or sponge.

Check the condition of the batterymonthly by looking at the testindicator window. The label on thebattery explains the test indicator’scolors.

The location of the test indicatorwindow varies betweenmanufacturers.

If equipped

Wheels Checking the Battery

Tires, Wheels, Checking the Battery

376

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

Traction devices that are the wrongsize or improperly installed candamage your vehicle’s brake lines,suspension, body, and wheels. Stopdriving if they are hitting any part ofthe vehicle.

09/07/16 18:51:07 31SWA630_381

－

Check the terminals for corrosion (awhite or yellowish powder). Toremove it, cover the terminals with asolution of baking soda and water. Itwill bubble up and turn brown. Whenthis stops, wash it off with plainwater. Dry off the battery with acloth or paper towel. Coat theterminals with grease to help preventfuture corrosion.

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damaging your vehicle’selectrical system. Always disconnectthe negative ( ) cable first, andreconnect it last.

Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.

If additional battery maintenance isneeded, see your dealer or aqualified technician.

CONTINUED

Checking the Battery

WARNING:

Wash your hands after handling.

Maintenance

377



The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledtechnician do the batterymaintenance.

09/07/16 18:51:17 31SWA630_382

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in Park.

Block the rear wheels.

If the vehicle is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (ifthe vehicle is being storedindoors).

Disconnect the battery.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected, or goes dead, the timesetting may be lost. To reset the time,see page .

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected, or goes dead, theaudio system will disable itself. Thenext time you turn on the radio, youmay see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in thefrequency display. Use the presetbuttons to enter the code (see page

).

The navigation system will alsodisable itself. The next time you turnon the ignition switch, the systemwill require you to enter a PINbefore it can be used. Refer to thenavigation system manual.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc., arecompletely dry.

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Fill the fuel tank.

If you need to park your vehicle foran extended period (more than 1month), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your vehicle back on the road. Ifpossible, store your vehicle indoors.

259

258

On vehicles without navigation system

On vehicles with navigation system

Checking the Battery, Vehicle Storage

Vehicle Storage

378

09/07/16 18:51:29 31SWA630_383

Support the front and rear wiperblade arms with a folded towel orrag so they do not touch thewindshield.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand tailgate seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand tailgate seals.

Cover the vehicle with a‘‘breathable’’ cover, one madefrom a porous material such ascotton. Non-porous materials, suchas plastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

If possible, periodically run theengine until it reaches fulloperating temperature (thecooling fans cycle on and offtwice). Preferably, do this once amonth.

Vehicle Storage

Maintenance

379

09/07/16 18:51:35 31SWA630_384

380

09/07/16 18:51:37 31SWA630_385

This section covers the morecommon problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your vehicle towed.

......................Compact Spare Tire . 382....................Changing a Flat Tire . 383

.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 388................................Jump Starting . 390

..............If the Engine Overheats . 392.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 394..........Charging System Indicator . 394

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 395...............Brake System Indicator . 396

..............................................Fuses . 397..............................Fuse Locations . 401

......................Emergency Towing . 403

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

381

09/07/16 18:51:42 31SWA630_386

Replace the tire when you can seethe tread wear indicator bars. Thereplacement should be the same sizeand design tire, mounted on thesame wheel. The spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the spare wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

Do not mount snow chains on thecompact spare tire.

Use the compact spare tire as atemporary replacement only. Getyour regular tire repaired or replaced,and put it back on your vehicle assoon as you can.

Check the air pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:

Follow these precautions:

Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some roadsurfaces. Use greater cautionwhile driving.

Do not use your compact sparetire on another vehicle unless it isthe same make and model.

The low tire pressure indicatorcomes on and stays on after youreplace the flat tire with thecompact spare tire. After severalmiles (kilometers) driving with thecompact spare tire, the TPMSindicator comes on and the lowtire pressure indicator goes off.

Compact Spare Tire

382

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

09/07/16 18:51:53 31SWA630_387

If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Drive slowly along the shoulder untilyou get to an exit or an area to stopthat is far away from the traffic lanes.

Park the vehicle on firm, level, andnon-slippery ground. Put thetransmission in Park. Apply theparking brake.If you are towing a trailer, unhitchthe trailer.

Turn on the hazard warning lights,and turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Have allpassengers get out of the vehiclewhile you change the tire.

Open the tailgate. Raise the cargoarea floor lid by lifting up with thestrap, and remove it from cargoarea by disengaging the tabs.

When you store the flat tire in thespare tire well, do not reinstall thecargo area floor lid forcibly. Thiswill damage the tabs on the lid.

Take the tool kit out of the sparetire.

1.

2. 3.

4.

CONTINUED

Changing a Flat Tire

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

383

JACK

SPARE TIRE

TOOLS

STRAP

FLOOR LID

The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack, seriously injuringanyone underneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the vehiclewhen it is supported only by thejack.

09/07/30 11:31:58 31SWA630_388

Take the jack out of the spare tirearea.

Turn the jack’s end bracketcounterclockwise to loosen it, thenremove the jack by lifting itstraight up.

Unscrew the wing bolt and takethe spare tire out of its well.

Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turnwith the wheel nut wrench.

Place the jack under the jackingpoint nearest the tire you need tochange. Turn the end bracketclockwise until the top of the jackcontacts the jacking point. Makesure the jacking point tab isresting in the jack notch.

6.

5. 7. 8.


384

JACK

WHEEL NUT WRENCH

JACKING POINT

09/07/16 18:52:13 31SWA630_389

CONTINUED

Use the extension and the wheelnut wrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tire is off theground.

Remove the wheel nuts, thenremove the flat tire. Handle thewheel nuts carefully; they may behot from driving. Place the flat tireon the ground with the outsidesurface facing up.

Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully; it may be hot fromdriving.

Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel nut wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tighten thewheel nuts fully.

Lower the vehicle to the ground,and remove the jack.

9.

10.

11.

13.

12.


Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

385

EXTENSION

BRAKE HUBWHEEL NUT WRENCH

09/07/16 18:52:23 31SWA630_390

Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Place the flat tire face down in thespare tire well.

Remove the spacer cone from thewing bolt, turn it over, and put itback on the bolt.

Remove the center cap beforestoring the flat tire.

14.15.

16.

17.

Except LX model


386

For sparetire

For normaltire

WING BOLT

CENTER CAP SPACER CONE

80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)

09/07/16 18:52:33 31SWA630_391

Your vehicle’s original tire has atire pressure monitoring systemsensor. To replace a tire, refer to

(seepage ).

Store the jack in its holder. Turnthe jack’s end bracket to lock it inplace. Store the tools, and placethe cover on the flat tire of thecargo area.

Store the center cap in the sparetire well. Make sure it does not getscratched or damaged.

Close the tailgate.

To remove the spacer cone, squeezethe tabs on the wing bolt todisengage it from the center of thespacer cone, then pull the boltdownward.

To install the wing bolt to the spacercone, reverse this procedure.

Secure the flat tire by screwingthe wing bolt back into its hole.

22.19.

20.

21.

18.

328


Changing a Tire with TPMS

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

387

TAB

SPACER CONE

Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and toolssecurely before driving.

09/07/16 18:52:44 31SWA630_392

Diagnosing why the engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position:

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe START (III) position, you do nothear the normal noise of the enginetrying to start. You may hear aclicking sound, a series of clicks, ornothing at all.Check these things:

Check the transmission interlock.The transmission must be in Parkor neutral or the starter will notoperate.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. Turn on theheadlights, and check theirbrightness. If the headlights arevery dim or do not come on at all,the battery is discharged. See

on page .

Turn the ignition switch to theSTART (III) position. If theheadlights do not dim, check thecondition of the fuses. If the fusesare OK, there is probablysomething wrong with theelectrical circuit for the ignitionswitch or starter motor. You willneed a qualified technician todetermine the problem. See

on page .

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery isdischarged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition of thebattery and terminal connections(see page ). You can then tryjump starting the vehicle from abooster battery (see page ).

390

403

390

376

Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

Jump Starting

Emergency Towing

If the Engine Won’t Start

388

09/07/16 18:52:55 31SWA630_393

In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position, but the engine does not run.

Are you using a properly codedkey? An improperly coded key willcause the immobilizer systemindicator in the instrument panelto blink rapidly (see page ).

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page .

Do you have fuel? Check the fuelgauge; the low fuel indicator maynot be working.

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See

on page .

397

403

314

63

The Starter Operates Normally

Starting theEngine

EmergencyTowing

If the Engine Won’t Start

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

389

09/07/16 18:53:04 31SWA630_394

＋

＋

Although this seems like a simpleprocedure, you should take severalprecautions.

Open the hood, and check thephysical condition of the battery.In very cold weather, check thecondition of the electrolyte. If itseems slushy or frozen, do not tryjump starting until it thaws.

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourbattery. Connect the other end tothe positive ( ) terminal on thebooster battery.

The numbers in the illustration showyou the order to connect the jumpercables.

You cannot start your vehicle bypushing or pulling it.

Put the transmission in Park, andset the parking brake.

Turn off all the electrical acces-sories: heater, A/C, climatecontrol, audio system, lights, etc.

1.

2.

3.

To Jump Start Your Vehicle:

Jump Starting

390

BOOSTER BATTERY

A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

09/07/16 18:53:14 31SWA630_395

－

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

Start your vehicle. If the startermotor still operates slowly, checkthat the jumper cables have goodmetal-to-metal contact.

Once your vehicle is running,disconnect the negative cable fromyour vehicle, then from thebooster battery. Disconnect thepositive cable from your vehicle,then from the booster battery.

Keep the ends of the jumper cablesaway from each other and any metalon the vehicle until everything isdisconnected. Otherwise, you maycause an electrical short.

Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the stud bolt on theengine side as shown. Do notconnect this jumper cable to anyother part of the engine.

6.

7.

5.

4.

Jump Starting

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

391

09/07/16 18:53:22 31SWA630_396

If the vehicle overheats, you shouldtake immediate action. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the hood.

The reading of the vehicle’stemperature gauge should stay inthe midrange. If it climbs to the redmark, you should determine thereason (hot day, driving up a steephill, etc.).

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running, andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading,the engine should start to cooldown almost immediately. If itdoes, wait until the temperaturegauge reading comes down to themidpoint, then continue driving.

If the temperature gauge readingstays at the red mark, turn off theengine.

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine. Wait until you seeno more signs of steam or spray,then open the hood.

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in Park, andset the parking brake. Turn off allthe accessories, and turn on thehazard warning lights.

1.

2.

3.

4.

If the Engine Overheats

392

Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

Driving with the temperature gaugereading at the red mark can causeserious damage to the engine.

09/07/16 18:53:32 31SWA630_397

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ).

Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap, and turn it until it comesoff.

If you don’t find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Add coolantif the level is below the MIN mark.

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may need to addcoolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the readingreaches the middle of thetemperature gauge or lowerbefore checking the radiator.

Start the engine, and set thetemperature to maximum heat(climate control to AUTO at‘‘ ’’). Add coolant to theradiator up to the base of the fillerneck. If you do not have theproper coolant mixture available,you can add plain water.Remember to have the coolingsystem drained and refilled withthe proper mixture as soon as youcan.

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine, and checkthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair (see

on page ).

9.

8.7.

6.

5.

10.

11.

403

403

EmergencyTowing

EmergencyTowing

If the Engine Overheats

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

393

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

09/07/16 18:53:45 31SWA630_398

Let the vehicle sit for a minute.Open the hood, and check the oillevel (see page ). An enginevery low on oil can lose pressureduring cornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

Safely pull off the road, and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning lights.

Start the engine, and watch the oilpressure indicator. If it does not goout within 10 seconds, turn off theengine. There is a mechanicalproblem that needs to be repairedbefore you can continue driving(see on page

).

This indicator should never come onwhen the engine is running. If itstarts flashing or stays on, the oilpressure has dropped very low orlost pressure. Serious enginedamage is possible, and you shouldtake immediate action.

If the charging system indicatorcomes on brightly when the engineis running, the battery is not beingcharged.

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories. Try not to use otherelectrically operated controls such asthe power windows. Keep the enginerunning; starting the engine willdischarge the battery rapidly.

Go to a service station or garagewhere you can get technicalassistance.

1.

2.

4.

3.

349

403

298

Emergency Towing

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Charging SystemIndicator

Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator

394

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn of fthe engine as soon as you can saf ely getthe vehicle stopped.

09/07/16 18:53:57 31SWA630_399

If the indicator comes onwhile driving, it means one

of the engine’s emissions controlsystems may have a problem. Eventhough you may feel no difference inyour vehicle’s performance, it canreduce your fuel economy and causeincreased emissions. Continuedoperation may cause serious damage.

If the indicator comes on repeatedly,even though it may turn off as youcontinue driving, have your vehiclechecked by your dealer as soon aspossible.

Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make surethese codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

The malfunction indicator lamp mayalso come on with the ‘‘D’’ indicator.

If the battery in your vehicle hasbeen disconnected or gone dead,these codes may be erased. It cantake several days of driving undervarious conditions to set the codesagain.

If you have recently refueled yourvehicle, the indicator coming oncould be due to a loose or missingfuel fill cap. Tighten the cap until itclicks at least once. Tightening thecap will not turn the indicator offimmediately; it can take several daysof normal driving.

To check if they are set, turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position, without starting the engine.The malfunction indicator lamp willcome on for 20 seconds. If it thengoes off, the readiness codes are set.If it blinks five times, the readinesscodes are not set. If possible, do nottake your vehicle for an emissionstest until the readiness codes are set.Refer to formore information (see page ).419

Readiness Codes

Emissions Testing

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

395

If you keep driving with themalf unction indicator lamp on, you candamage your vehicle’s emissionscontrols and engine. Those repairs maynot be covered by your vehicle’swarranties.

09/07/16 18:54:07 31SWA630_400

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. A problem in onepart of the system’s dual circuitdesign will still give you braking attwo wheels. You will feel the brakepedal go down much farther beforethe vehicle begins to slow down, andyou will have to press harder on thepedal.

If you must drive the vehicle a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and carefully.

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of the longdistance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the vehicle. Youshould have it towed and repaired assoon as possible (see

on page ).

If the ABS indicator and the VSAsystem indicator come on with thebrake system indicator, have yourvehicle inspected by your dealerimmediately.

The brake system indicator normallycomes on when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position, and asa reminder to check the parkingbrake. It will stay on if you do notfully release the parking brake.

If the brake system indicator comeson while driving, the brake fluid levelis probably low. Press lightly on thebrake pedal to see if it feels normal.If it does, check the brake fluid levelthe next time you stop at a servicestation (see page ).

If the fluid level is low, take yourvehicle to a dealer, and have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

357

403Emergency

Towing

Brake System Indicator

396

CanadaU.S.

09/07/16 18:54:18 31SWA630_401

The interior fuse box is locatedunder the dashboard on the driver’sside. The fuse label is attachedunder the steering column.

The under-hood fuse box is on thedriver’s side. To open it, push thetabs as shown.

The vehicle’s fuses are contained inthree fuse boxes.

The auxiliary fuse box is locatednext to the interior fuse box.

To open the fuse box lid, pull the tabin the direction as shown in theillustration.

Fuses

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

397

TABINTERIOR UNDER-HOOD

FUSE LABEL

TAB

FUSE

LID

FUSES

INTERIOR (Auxiliary)

09/07/16 18:54:27 31SWA630_402

If something electrical in yourvehicle stops working, check for ablown fuse first. Determine from thechart on pages and , or thediagram on the fuse box lid, whichfuse or fuses control that device.Check those fuses first, but check allthe fuses before deciding that ablown fuse is the cause. Replace anyblown fuses, and check if the deviceworks.

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Make sure theheadlights and all otheraccessories are off.

Remove the cover from the fusebox.

Check each of the large fuses inthe under-hood fuse box bylooking through the side windowat the wire inside. Removing thesefuses requires a Phillips-headscrewdriver.

1.

2.

3.

401 402

Fuses

Checking and Replacing Fuses

398

FUSE BLOWN

09/07/16 18:54:36 31SWA630_403

Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse box and all thefuses in the interior fuse box bypulling out each one with the fusepuller provided on the back of theunder-hood fuse box cover.

Look for a blown wire inside thefuse. If it is blown, replace it withone of the spare fuses of the samerating or lower.

Your vehicle has spare fuses onthe back of the under-hood fusebox cover.

4. 5.

CONTINUED

Fuses

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

399

BLOWN

FUSE PULLER

BLOWNFUSE

09/07/16 18:54:45 31SWA630_404

If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem in your vehicle.Leave the blown fuse in thatcircuit and have your vehiclechecked by a qualified technician.

If the radio fuse is removed, theaudio system will disable itself. Thenext time you turn on the radio youmay see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in thefrequency display. Use the presetbuttons to enter the digit code (seepage ).On vehicles with a navigation system,touch the appropriate icon to enterthe code number (see page ).

If you cannot drive the vehiclewithout fixing the problem, and youdo not have a spare fuse, take a fuseof the same rating or a lower ratingfrom one of the other circuits. Makesure you can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the accessorypower socket or radio).If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.

6.

258

258

Fuses

400

Replacing a f use with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have areplacement f use with the proper ratingf or the circuit, install one with a lowerrating.

09/07/16 18:54:52 31SWA630_405

－－

－－

－－

－

＊

＊

＊

＊

No. Amps.

No. Amps. Circuits Protected

Circuits Protected

Circuits Protected

No. Amps. Circuits Protected

No. Amps.

1234567

7.5 A15 A10 A7.5 A(15 A)

89

1011121314151617181920212223242526

10 A7.5 A

7.5 A10 A10 A10 A

7.5 A7.5 A10 A10 A20 A15 A

7.5 A20 A

(20 A)20 A20 A

Rear WiperODS (Occupant DetectionSystem)MeterSRSRight Headlight High BeamLeft Headlight High BeamSmall Light (Interior)Small Light (Exterior)Right Headlight Low BeamLeft Headlight Low BeamMain Headlight High BeamSmall Lights MAINTPMSMain Headlight Low BeamNot usedNot usedMoonroofDoor LockFront Left Power Window

Power Window RelayFuel PumpACGABS/VSAHeated SeatsNot usedNot used

Not usedRear Accessory Power SocketFront Accessory Power SocketFront Right Power WindowAccessory Power Socket(in the Console Compartment/on the Center Table)Rear Right Power WindowRear Left power windowACC RadioACC Key lockHACDaytime Running LightsFront Wiper

AB

10 A VB SOL

27282930

31

32333435363738

15 A15 A20 A

(15 A)

20 A20 A

7.5 A7.5 A10 A

7.5 A30 A

: If equipped

Fuse Locations

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

401

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

AUXILIARY

Auxiliary

09/07/16 18:55:05 31SWA630_406

－

－

－

＊

＊

＊

＊

No. Amps. Circuits Protected Circuits ProtectedNo. Amps.1

2

3

4

56789

101112

100 A

80 A50 A20 A40 A50 A40 A

20 A20 A30 A40 A15 A15 A15 A

BatteryNot usedOption MainIgnition Switch MainABS/VSA FSRABS/VSA MotorHeadlight MainPower Window MainNot usedSub Fan MotorMain Fan MotorRear DefoggerBlowerHazardLAFStop and Horn

Power Seat DR RR HI/RecliningPower Seat DR FR HI/SlidingIGPS OIL LEVELNot usedHigh Power Sound /Windshield DefrosterIG CoilFI MainMG ClutchDBWInterior LightBack Up

13

14151617

181920212223

(20 A)

(20 A)7.5 A

(15 A)

15 A15 A

7.5 A15 A

7.5 A10 A

: If equipped

Fuse Locations

402

UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

09/07/16 18:55:14 31SWA630_407

－

－

If your vehicle needs to be towed,call a professional towing service ororganization. Never tow your vehiclewith just a rope or chain. It is verydangerous.

Any other method of towing willdamage the drive system. When youcontact the towing agency, informthem a flat-bed is required.

The operator will loadyour vehicle on the back of a truck.

There are two ways to tow yourvehicle:

The operatorloads your vehicle on the back of atruck.

The towtruck uses two pivoting arms that gounder the front tires and lift them offthe ground. The rear tires remain onthe ground.

If, due to damage, your vehicle mustbe towed with the front wheels onthe ground, do this:

Start the engine.Shift to D position and hold for 5seconds, then to N.Turn off the engine.Leave the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) position so thesteering wheel does not lock.Release the parking brake.

On 4WD models

On 2WD models

CONTINUED

Emergency Towing

The only way you can safely towyour vehicle is with flat-bedequipment.

This is the best way totransport your vehicle.

This is an acceptableway to tow your vehicle.

Flat-bed Equipment

Wheel-lif t Equipment

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

403

Towing with only two tires on theground will damage parts of the 4WDsystem. It should be transported on af lat-bed truck or trailer.

Improper towing preparation willdamage the transmission. Follow theabove procedure exactly. If you cannotshif t the transmission or start theengine, your vehicle must betransported with the all f our wheels of fthe ground.

09/07/16 18:55:30 31SWA630_408

With the front wheels on the ground,it is best to tow the vehicle no fartherthan 50 miles (80 km), and keep thespeed below 35 mph (55 km/h).

Refer toon page

for non-emergency towinginformation.334

Emergency Towing

Towing Your VehicleBehind a Motorhome

404

The steering system can be damaged ifthe steering wheel is locked. Leave theignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)position, and make sure the steeringwheel turns f reely bef ore you begintowing.

09/07/16 18:55:36 31SWA630_409

－

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour vehicle and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle’s tires andemissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 406................................Specifications . 408

DOT Tire Quality Grading..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 410

.................................Tire Labeling . 412Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) Required Federal............................Explanation . 414

.......................Emissions Controls . 416..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 418

........................Emissions Testing . 419

Technical Information

TechnicalInform

ation

405

09/07/16 18:55:40 31SWA630_410

Your vehicle has several identifyingnumbers located in various places.

The vehicle identification number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourdealer uses to register your vehiclefor warranty purposes. It is alsonecessary for licensing and insuringyour vehicle. The easiest place tofind the VIN is on a plate fastened tothe top of the dashboard. You cansee it by looking through thewindshield on the driver’s side. It isalso on the certification labelattached to the driver’s doorjamb,and is stamped on the enginecompartment bulkhead. The VIN isalso provided in bar code on thecertification label.

To access the VIN in the enginecompartment, pull down the lid onthe back of the engine compartment.Make sure to close the lid beforeclosing the hood.

Identif ication Numbers

406

CERTIFICATION LABEL

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)

09/07/16 18:55:47 31SWA630_411

The engine number is stamped intothe front of the engine block.

You can see the engine numberthrough the window next to the ‘‘H’’logo.

The transmission number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

Identif ication Numbers

TechnicalInform

ation

407

ENGINE NUMBER

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

09/07/16 18:55:51 31SWA630_412

＊＊

＊

＊

Specifications

408

Dimensions

Weights

Engine

Capacities

Capacities

179.3 in (4,555 mm)LengthWidthHeightWheelbaseTrack

66.1 in (1,680 mm)103.1 in (2,620 mm)61.6 in (1,565 mm)61.6 in (1,565 mm)

Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attachedto the driver’s doorjamb.

Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratioSpark plugs

Water cooled 4-stroke DOHCi-VTEC 4-cylinder gasoline engine

3.43 x 3.90 in (87.0 x 99.0 mm)144 cu-in (2,354 cm )

10.5 : 1ILZKR7B-11SSXU22HCR11S

Fuel tank

Engine oil15.3 US gal (58 )

4.4 US qt (4.2 )4.2 US qt (4.0 )5.6 US qt (5.3 )

1.56 US gal (5.9 )1.85 US gal (7.0 )

EnginecoolantAutomatictransmissionfluid

Reardifferentialfluid (4WD)Windshieldwasherreservoir

2.6 US qt (2.5 )

7.4 US qt (7.0 )

2.6 US qt (2.5 )

1.3 US qt (1.2 )1.5 US qt (1.4 )

6.71 US qt (6.35 )

Excluding the oil remaining in the engineIncluding the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengineReserve tank capacity:0.16 US gal (0.6 )

2.6 US qt (2.5 )4.8 US qt (4.5 )

Approx.

FrontRear

1 :2 :

71.6 in (1,820 mm)

ChangeIncluding filterWithout filter

Total

(NGK)(DENSO)

ChangeTotalChange

4WD2WD

Total4WD2WD

ChangeTotal

U.S. VehiclesCanadianVehicles

1

2

09/07/16 18:56:11 31SWA630_413

－－

－

－－－－

＊

＊

Specifications

TechnicalInform

ation

409

Air Conditioning

Seating Capacities

Fuses

Alignment

Tires

Battery

Lights

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant type SP-10

15.5 17.3 oz (440 490 g)HFC-134a (R-134a)

523

TotalFrontRear

Interior

Under-hood

Toe-in

Camber

Caster 2°44’1°00’0°

0.08 in (2.0 mm)0.0 in (0 mm)

Size

Pressure

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )

T155/90R17 101MT155/90D17 101M225/65R17 102T

Capacity 12 V12 V12 V12 V

36 AH/5 HR38 AH/5 HR45 AH/20 HR47 AH/20 HR

HeadlightsFront turn signal lightsParking lights/side markerlightsRear turn signal lightsStop/TaillightsBack-up lightsTaillight/Rear side markerlightsHigh-mount brake lightLicense plate lightCeiling lightSpotlightsCargo area lightVanity mirror Lights

60/55 W21 W3 CP

21 W21/5 W21 W5 W

21 W5 W8 W8 W8 W2 W

See page 401 or the fuse labelattached under the steeringcolumn.See page 402 or the fuse boxcover.

FrontRearFrontRearFront

High/Low (HB2)(Amber)

(Amber)

Front/RearSpare

FrontRearSpare

: EX, EX-L

09/07/16 18:56:32 31SWA630_414

The tires on your vehicle meet allU.S. Federal Safety Requirements.All tires are also graded fortreadwear, traction, and temperatureperformance according toDepartment of Transportation(DOT) standards. The followingexplains these gradings.

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween tread shoulder andmaximum section width. Forexample:

The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

All passenger car tires must conformto Federal Safety Requirements inaddition to these grades.

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear Traction

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

410

09/07/16 18:56:42 31SWA630_415

Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading,either separately or in combination,can cause heat buildup and possibletire failure.

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger cartires must meet under the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

Temperature

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

TechnicalInform

ation

411

09/07/16 18:56:47 31SWA630_416

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

The tires that came on your vehiclehave a number of markings. Thoseyou should be aware of are describedbelow.

Load index (a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry).

Speed symbol (analphabetical code indicatingthe maximum speed rating).

The tire identification number (TIN)is a group of numbers and lettersthat look like the following example.TIN is located on the sidewall of thetire.

This indicates that the tiremeets all requirements ofthe U.S. Department ofTransportation.

Whenever tires are replaced, theyshould be replaced with tires of thesame size. Below is an example oftire size with an explanation of whateach component means.

Tire width in millimeters.

Aspect ratio (the tire’s sectionheight as a percentage of itswidth).

Tire construction code (Rindicates radial).

Rim diameter in inches.

Manufacturer’sidentification mark.

R

DOT

B97R

65

T

102

225

17

Tire Labeling

Tire Identif ication Number (TIN)

Tire Size

412

(1)

(1)

(3) (2)

TIRE LABELING EXAMPLE

(1)(2)(3)(4)

Tire SizeTire Identification Number (TIN)Maximum Tire PressureMaximum Tire Load

(4)

DOT B97R FW6X 2202

225/65R17 102T

09/07/16 18:56:59 31SWA630_417

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

Tire type code.

Date of manufacture.YearWeek

Cold Tire Pressure The tire airpressure when the vehicle has beenparked for at least three hours ordriven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Load Rating Means the maximumload that a tire is rated to carry for agiven inflation pressure.

Maximum Inflation Pressure Themaximum tire air pressure that thetire can hold.

Maximum Load Rating Means theload rating for a tire at the maximumpermissible inflation pressure forthat tire.

Recommended Inflation PressureThe cold tire inflation pressurerecommended by the manufacturer.

Treadwear Indicators (TWI)Means the projections within theprincipal grooves designed to give a

visual indication of the degrees ofwear of the tread.

FW6X

2202

Tire Labeling

Glossary of Tire TerminologyTechnicalInform

ation

413

09/07/16 18:57:10 31SWA630_418

－

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label.

(If your vehicle has tires of adifferent size than the size indicatedon the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label, you shoulddetermine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressuretelltale

when one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation

414

09/07/16 18:57:17 31SWA630_419

－

Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicatorto indicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is provided bya separate telltale, which displays thesymbol ‘‘TPMS’’ when illuminated.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated,

the system may not be able to detector signal low tire pressure asintended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for avariety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement oralternate tires or wheels on thevehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation

TechnicalInform

ation

415

09/07/16 18:57:23 31SWA630_420

＊

＊

The burning of gasoline in yourvehicle’s engine produces several by-products. Some of these are carbonmonoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).Gasoline evaporating from the tankalso produces hydrocarbons. Con-trolling the production of NOx, CO,and HC is important to the environ-ment. Under certain conditions ofsunlight and climate, NOx and HCreact to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’Carbon monoxide does not contri-bute to smog creation, but it is apoisonous gas.

The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.

In Canada, Honda vehicles complywith the Canadian emissionrequirements, as specified in anagreement with EnvironmentCanada, at the time they aremanufactured.

Your vehicle has a positivecrankcase ventilation system. Thiskeeps gasses that build up in theengine’s crankcase from going intothe atmosphere. The positivecrankcase ventilation valve routesthem from the crankcase back to the

intake manifold. They are thendrawn into the engine and burned.

As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

The onboard refueling vaporrecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

The Clean Air Act

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem

Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery

Emissions Controls

416

09/07/16 18:57:33 31SWA630_421

The PGM-FI system uses sequentialmultiport fuel injection.It has three subsystems: air intake,engine control, and fuel control. Thepowertrain control module (PCM)uses various sensors to determinehow much air is going into theengine. It then controls how muchfuel to inject under all operatingconditions.

This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO, and NOx produced.

The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your vehicle. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.

The emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to work to-gether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newHonda replacement parts or theirequivalent for repairs. Using lowerquality parts may increase theemissions from your vehicle.

The three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen(N ), and water vapor.

The exhaust emissions controlsinclude three systems: PGM-FI,ignition timing control, and threeway catalytic converter. These threesystems work together to control theengine’s combustion and minimizethe amount of HC, CO, and NOx thatcomes out the tailpipe. The exhaustemissions control systems areseparate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

2

2

Exhaust Emissions Controls

Replacement Parts

PGM-FI System

Ignition Timing Control System

Three Way Catalytic Converter

Emissions Controls

TechnicalInform

ation

417

09/07/16 18:57:44 31SWA630_422

The three way catalytic convertercontains precious metals that serveas catalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Honda partor its equivalent.

Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

Keep the engine well maintained.

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire anycombustible materials that comenear it. Park your vehicle away fromhigh grass, dry leaves, or otherflammables.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine’s per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your vehicle’s three waycatalytic converter.

Have your vehicle diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

Three Way Catalytic Converter

418

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERS

09/07/16 18:57:53 31SWA630_423

If you take your vehicle for anemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle retested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for retesting bydoing the following.

Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely, full (around3/4).

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine, and let itidle for 20 seconds.

Keep the vehicle in Park. Increasethe engine speed to 2,000 rpm, andhold it there until the temperaturegauge rises to at least 1/4 of thescale (about 3 minutes).

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 6hours or more.

Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 40° and95°F (4° and 35°C).

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, let the engine idle for 20seconds.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

CONTINUED

Testing of Readiness Codes

Emissions Testing

TechnicalInform

ation

419

09/07/16 18:58:02 31SWA630_424

Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe vehicle coast for severalseconds without using theaccelerator pedal or the brakepedal.

If the testing facility determines thereadiness codes are still not set, seeyour dealer.

Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20minutes. Drive on the highway inD. Do not use the cruise control.When traffic allows, drive for 90seconds without moving theaccelerator pedal. (Vehicle speedmay vary slightly; this is okay.) Ifyou cannot do this for acontinuous 90 seconds because oftraffic conditions, drive for at least30 seconds, then repeat it twomore times (for a total of 90seconds).

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 30minutes.

7. 8.

9.

Emissions Testing

420

09/07/16 18:58:08 31SWA630_425

....Customer Service Information . 422....................Warranty Coverages . 423

Reporting Safety Defects..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 424

.....................Authorized Manuals . 425

Warranty and Customer Relations

Warranty

andC

ustomer

Relations

421

09/07/16 18:58:13 31SWA630_426

Honda dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. Theservice manager or general managercan help. Almost all problems aresolved in this way.

U.S. Owners:

Canadian Owners: When you call or write, please giveus this information:

Vehicle Identification Number(see page )

Name and address of the dealerwho services your vehicle

Date of purchase

Odometer reading of your vehicle

Your name, address, and tele-phone number

A detailed description of theproblem

Name of the dealer who sold thevehicle to you

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact HondaCustomer Service.

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. VirginIslands:

406

Customer Service Information

422

American Honda Motor Co., Inc.Automobile Customer ServiceMail Stop 500-2N-7A1919 Torrance BoulevardTorrance, California 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 999-1009

Honda Canada Inc.

Visit www.honda.ca for contactinformation

Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9Fax: 1-877-939-0909

Vortex Motor Corp.Bella InternationalP.O. Box 190816San Juan, PR 00919-0816

Tel: (787) 620-7546

Customer Relations

09/07/16 18:58:22 31SWA630_427

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

Your new vehicle is covered by thesewarranties:

provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from your dealer.

covers your new vehicle, except forthe battery, emissions controlsystems, and accessories againstdefects in materials andworkmanship.

these twowarranties cover your vehicle’semissions control systems. Time,mileage, and coverage areconditional. Please read yourwarranty booklet for exactinformation.

providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns thevehicle.

this warranty gives upto 100% credit toward a replacementbattery.

a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered by a limited warranty.Please read your warranty bookletfor details.

covers all Hondareplacement parts against defects inmaterials and workmanship.

Honda accessories are coveredunder this warranty. Time andmileage limits depend on the type ofaccessory and other factors. Pleaseread your warranty booklet fordetails.

all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2010 Honda warranty informationbooklet that came with your vehiclefor precise information on warrantycoverages. Your vehicle’s originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warrantyinformation is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2010 warrantymanual that came with your vehicle.

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty

Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty

Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

Warranty Coverages

Warranty

andC

ustomer

Relations

423

09/07/16 18:58:33 31SWA630_428

If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, orAmerican Honda Motor Co., Inc.

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in additionto notifying American Honda MotorCo., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call theVehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to

; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 NewJersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC20590.You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from .

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

424

http://www.saf ercar.gov

http://www.saf ercar.gov

09/07/16 18:58:38 31SWA630_429

Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only)Go online at

The publications shown below can be purchased from HelmIncorporated. You can order by phone or online:

If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.at 1-800-782-4356.

Covers maintenance and recommended procedures forrepair to engine and chassis components. It is writtenfor the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enoughfor most mechanically inclined owners to understand.

Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depthtroubleshooting information for each electrical circuitin your vehicle.

Describes the procedures involved in the replacementof damaged body parts.

Authorized Manuals

Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual:

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)A

uthorizedM

anuals

425

Publication

Form Number

61SWA03

61SWA03EL

61SWA30

31SWA630

31SWA830

31SWAM30

31SWAQ30

HON-R

Form Description

2007-2010 Honda CR-V Service Manual

2007-2010 Honda CR-V

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

2007 Honda CR-V Body Repair Manual

2010 Honda CR-V Owner’s Manual

2010 Honda CR-V

Navigation System Owner’s Manual

2010 Honda CR-V Honda Service History

2010 Honda CR-V Technology Reference Guide

Order Form for Previous Years-Indicate

Year and Model Desired

www. helminc. com

09/07/16 18:58:48 31SWA630_430

426

09/07/16 18:58:51 31SWA630_431

CONTINUED

BatteryCharging System

...........................Indicator . 62, 394............................Jump Starting . 390

..............................Maintenance . 376............................Specifications . 409

..............................Before Driving . 293....................................Belts, Seat . 9, 19

.........................Beverage Holders . 119......Hands Free Link . 269

..................................Booster Seats . 52Brakes

...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 322

.............Break-in, New Linings . 294....................Bulb Replacement . 363

...........................................Fluid . 357.........................................Parking . 81

.................System Indicator . 62, 396..........................System Design . 321........................Wear Indicators . 321

.............................Braking System . 321.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 294

..Brightness Control, Instruments . 79Bulb Replacement

..........................Back-up Lights . 363..............................Brake Lights . 363

................Front Parking Lights . 362........Front Side Marker Lights . 362

.................................Headlights . 359.........High-mount Brake Light . 364.........Rear Side Marker Lights . 363

............................Specifications . 409............Turn Signal Lights . 361, 363

..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 359

....................................Accessories . 302ACCESSORY (Ignition Key

.......................................Position) . 84............Accessory Power Sockets . 123

..................Active Head Restraint . 103....................Additives, Engine Oil . 350

.......Adjusting the Steering Wheel . 81...........................Advanced Airbags . 28

.............................Airbag (SRS) . 10, 23......Air Conditioning System . 130, 135

.................................Usage . 131, 136.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 371.......................Alcohol in Gasoline . 294

......................................Antifreeze . 352Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

...............................Indicator . 63, 322...................................Operation . 322

..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 258.Anti-theft Steering Column Lock . 84

................................Audio System . 143.....Auto Door Locking/Unlocking . 86

..........Automatic Climate Control . 135...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 21

.............Automatic Speed Control . 266

..............Automatic Transmission . 315..........................Capacity, Fluid . 408

...............Checking Fluid Level . 355.....................................D Mode . 317

.......................................Shifting . 315Shift Lever Position

...............................Indicators . 315................Shift Lever Positions . 316

....................Shift Lock Release . 319......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 257

Bluetooth

3

Index

A

B

IND

EX

I

09/07/16 18:58:56 31SWA630_432

＊

...............DANGER, Explanation of . iii.........................Dashboard . 3, 4, 60, 74

................Daytime Running Lights . 78Daytime Running Lights

.......................................Indicator . 65.................................Dead Battery . 390

............Defects, Reporting Safety . 424................Defogger, Rear Window . 80......Defrosting the Windows . 134, 139

.......................Detachable Anchor . 109....................................Dimensions . 408

...............Dimming the Headlights . 76

............................Capacities Chart . 408.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 55

..............................................Cargo . 304...........................Cargo area Light . 127

.................................Cargo Hooks . 309.............................Carrying Cargo . 304

....................Cargo, How to Carry . 304.............CAUTION, Explanation of . iii

.........................................CD Care . 252..........................CD Changer . 166, 215

CD Changer Error...........................Messages . 176, 221

.............CD Error Messages . 156, 214..............................CD Player . 149, 206

...............................Center Pocket . 116..................................Center Table . 120

........................Certification Label . 406.................................Chains, Tires . 375

....................Changing a Flat Tire . 383.................................Changing Oil . 350

........................................How to . 350......................................When to . 341

....Charging System Message . 62, 394............Check Fuel Cap Indicator . 296

............Checklist, Before Driving . 313.....................................Child Safety . 35

..............................Booster Seats . 52.............................Child Seats . 42, 43

Important Safety..........................Reminders . 35-54

..........................................Infants . 40..........................Larger Children . 51

.........................................LATCH . 44......................Risks with Airbags . 36

.............................Small Children . 41.........................................Tethers . 49

...........................Warning Labels . 37.........Where Should a Child Sit? . 36

.......................................Child Seats . 35.........................................LATCH . 44

..........Tether Anchorage Points . 49..................Childproof Door Locks . 91

.......................Cleaning Seat Belts . 365..............Climate Control Sensors . 135

..............................................Clock . 259..................CO in the Exhaust . 55, 416

............Cold Weather, Starting in . 314.........................................Compass . 260

...............Consumer Information . 421.............Controls, Instruments and . 59

....................Conversation Mirror . 123Coolant

........................................Adding . 352....................................Checking . 298

.........................Proper Solution . 352...................Temperature Gauge . 71

Crankcase Emissions Control........................................System . 416

................Cruise Control Indicator . 64............Cruise Control Operation . 266

.........................Customer Service . 422

Index

D

C

II

09/07/16 18:59:02 31SWA630_433

CONTINUED

Dipstick..........Automatic Transmission . 355

..................................Engine Oil . 298..........................Directional Signals . 76

........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 321.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 351

Doors..........................Auto Door Lock . 86

.......................Auto Door Unlock . 89..............Childproof Door Locks . 91..............Locking and Unlocking . 85

......................Power Door Locks . 85..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 410

...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5...........................................Driving . 311

....................................Economy . 299........................Driving Guidelines . 312

.........................................D Mode . 317...................................Dual Button . 137

................Dual Deck Cargo Shelf . 117..........Dual Temperature Control . 140

..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 366

..............................Economy, Fuel . 299

..................................Emergencies . 381.............Battery, Jump Starting . 390...........Brake System Indicator . 396

................Changing a Flat Tire . 383.....Charging System Indicator . 394

..................Checking the Fuses . 398.........Hazard Warning Flashers . 79

............................Jump Starting . 390.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 394...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 395

..................Overheated Engine . 392.......................................Towing . 403

...........................Emergency Brake . 81......................Emergency Flashers . 79

......................Emergency Towing . 403.......................Emissions Controls . 416........................Emissions Testing . 419

Engine............Adding Engine Coolant . 352

....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 71.........................If It Won’t Start . 388

Malfunction Indicator................................Lamp . 62, 395

........Oil Pressure Indicator . 62, 394

..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 349...............................Overheating . 392

............................Specifications . 408

............................Speed Limiter . 318.......................................Starting . 314

......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 294.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 416

...............................Exhaust Fumes . 55Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat

........................................Belts by . 17

..........................Fan, Interior . 131, 137.........................................Features . 129

....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 295Filters

.........................Dust and Pollen . 366...............................................Oil . 350

.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 79...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 383

Fluids..........Automatic Transmission . 355

..........................................Brake . 357..........................Power Steering . 358

..................Windshield Washer . 354

3

Index

E

F

IND

EX

III

09/07/16 18:59:08 31SWA630_434

.................Folding Rear Seat . 105, 107..........................Four-way Flashers . 79

............................Front Airbags . 10, 26Front Seat

................................Adjusting . 97, 98.......................................Heaters . 111...................................Airbags . 10, 26

.................................................Fuel . 294........Check Fuel Cap Message . 296

......................Fill Door and Cap . 295.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 65

...........................................Gauge . 71................Octane Requirement . 294

...............................Oxygenated . 294........................Tank, Refueling . 295

...............................Fuel Economy . 299.....................Fuses, Checking the . 398

.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 359...........................HandsFreeLink . 269

..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 79Headlights

........................................Aiming . 359............Daytime Running Lights . 78

..................High Beam Indicator . 65.........................Reminder Chime . 77

........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 359...................................Turning on . 76

............................Head Restraints . 101.............................Heated Mirrors . 115

...................................Heater, Seat . 111.....................Heating and Cooling . 130

............................High Beam Lever . 76.......................Hood, Opening the . 297

..............................................Horn . 4, 74

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 406Ignition

..............................................Keys . 82...........................................Switch . 84

............Timing Control System . 417........................Immobilizer System . 83

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6

...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 299.........................................Gasoline . 294

.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 65...........................................Gauge . 71

................Octane Requirement . 294........................Tank, Refueling . 295

................Gas Station Procedures . 295Gauges

...Engine Coolant Temperature . 71...............................................Fuel . 71

Gearshift Lever Positions..........Automatic Transmission . 315

..............................Glove Box . 120, 121Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

.............................(GVWR) . 306, 330

Index

G

H

I

IV

09/07/16 18:59:14 31SWA630_435

CONTINUED

.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 384.......................................Jack, Tire . 383

................................Jump Starting . 390

..................................................Keys . 82

Indicators......ABS (Anti-Lock Brake) . 63, 322

Brake (Parking and Brake............................System) . 62, 396

................Charging System . 62, 394.............................Cruise Control . 64

DRL (Daytime Running......................................Lights) . 65

...................................High Beam . 65........Key (Immobilizer System) . 63

......................................Low Fuel . 65................Low Oil Pressure . 62, 394..............Low Tire Pressure . 66, 326

..........Maintenance Minder . 67, 341Malfunction Indicator

................................Lamp . 62, 395.................Passenger Airbag Off . 33

...........................Side Airbag Off . 63...............................................SRS . 63

...................................TPMS . 66, 326Turn Signal and Hazard

.............................Warning . 76, 79......................................VSA Off . 325

VSA (Vehicle Stability................Assist) System . 64, 324

..............................Washer Level . 67

.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 62...............................Infant Restraint . 40

......................................Infant Seats . 40............Tether Anchorage Point . 49

...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 370........Recommended Pressures . 371

.................................Inside Mirror . 114.............................Inspection, Tire . 372

....................Installing a Child Seat . 43............................Instrument Panel . 61

........Instrument Panel Brightness . 79..............Instruments and Controls . 59

...............................Interior Lights . 126........................................Introduction . i

.........................................iPod . 177, 235

.......................Label, Certification . 406.................Lane Change, Signaling . 76

..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 15, 20...........LATCH Anchorage System . 44

Lights....................Bulb Replacement . 359

.......................................Indicator . 66.........................................Parking . 76

..................................Turn Signal . 76....................................Load Limits . 305

......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 84Locks

.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 84..........................Childproof Door . 91

............................Fuel Fill Door . 295..........................Glove Box . 120, 121

.................................Power Door . 85........................................Tailgate . 95

........................Low Coolant Level . 298.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 65

...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 62, 394................................Lower Anchors . 44

Index

L

K

J

IND

EX

V

09/07/16 18:59:21 31SWA630_436

...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 408...........Luggage, Storing (Cargo) . 304...........Luggage Net (Cargo Net) . 309

..................................Maintenance . 339................................Minder . 341-347

......Main Items and Sub Items . 347Owner’s Maintenance

...................................Checks . 346.........................Minder Indicator . 67

..........................................Safety . 340.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 62, 395

.........................Meters, Gauges . 61, 68...................Methanol in Gasoline . 294

........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 114...............Modifying Your Vehicle . 303

.......................................Moonroof . 113................................MP3 . 150, 168, 207

...................Neutral Gear Position . 317..................New Vehicle Break-in . 294

...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i

...............Numbers, Identification . 406

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 294.........................................Odometer . 71

....................Off-Highway Driving . 336Oil

........................Change, How to . 350......................Change, When to . 341......................Checking Engine . 298..............Pressure Indicator . 62, 394

Selecting Proper Viscosity......................................Chart . 349

...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 84Onboard Refueling Vapor

....................................Recovery . 416............................Outside Mirrors . 115

....Outside Temperature Indicator . 71....................Overheating, Engine . 392

....Owner’s Maintenance Checks . 346.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 294

..............Panel Brightness Control . 79

........................Park Gear Position . 316...........................................Parking . 320

.................................Parking Brake . 81Parking Brake and Brake

.................System Indicator . 62, 396.................................Parking Lights . 76

..Parking Over Things that Burn . 320

....Passenger Airbag Off Indicator . 33...........................................PC card . 222

.............PC card Error Messages . 234.............................PGM-FI System . 417

...................................Pollen Filter . 366..........................Power Door Locks . 85

.....................................Power Seats . 97...............Power Socket Locations . 123

....................Power Steering Fluid . 358............................Power Windows . 112

.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 17........................Preparing to Drive . 313

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 12...Additional Safety Precautions . 18

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 17

Index

O

P

N

M

VI

09/07/16 18:59:28 31SWA630_437

＊

＊＊

CONTINUED

........................Protecting Children . 35.......................Protecting Infants . 40

.......Protecting Larger Children . 51.........Protecting Small Children . 41

Using Child Seats with.....................................Tethers . 49

.............................Using LATCH . 44..................Protecting Your Discs . 252

...................Radiator Overheating . 392Radio/Disc Sound

.......................System . 145, 157, 194.................Radio Theft Protection . 258

...........................Readiness Codes . 419.................Rear Differential Fluid . 357

..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 363................Rear Seat, Folding . 105, 107

..........................Rear View Mirror . 114.................Rear Window Defogger . 80

.Rear Window Wiper and Washer . 76...Reclining the Seat Backs . 97, 98, 99

........................................Refueling . 295.......................Reminder Indicators . 67.......................Remote Transmitter . 92

Replacement Information..............Dust and Pollen Filter . 366

................Engine Oil and Filter . 350..........................................Fuses . 397

................................Light Bulbs . 359....................................Schedule . 341

...........................................Tires . 374.............................Wiper Blades . 367

Replacing Seat Belts After a............................................Crash . 22

..........Reporting Safety Defects . 424Reserve Tank, Engine

...............................Coolant . 298, 352...............................Restraint, Child . 35

..................Reverse Gear Position . 316......................................Roof Rack . 307

................................Rotation, Tire . 373

..................................Safety Belts . 9, 15.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 424

.................................Safety Features . 8.........................................Airbags . 10

.......................................Seat Belts . 9.............Safety Labels, Location of . 56

..............................Safety Messages . iii.....................................Seat Belts . 9, 15

...............Additional Information . 19.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 17

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 21

.....................................Cleaning . 365...................Detachable Anchor . 109

................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 15, 20................................Maintenance . 22

Reminder Indicator and................................Beeper . 19, 62

...................System Components . 19...............Use During Pregnancy . 17

...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 15..................................Seat Heaters . 111

..................Seat Power Adjustment . 97...................Seats, Adjusting the . 97-99.........................Select/Reset Knob . 68

...............................Serial Number . 406...........................Service Intervals . 341...........................Service Manual . 425

.........Service Station Procedures . 295..........................Setting the Clock . 259

Index

IND

EX

S

R

VII

09/07/16 18:59:35 31SWA630_438

＊

－

...Shift Lever Position Indicators . 315........................Shift Lock Release . 319

..............................Side Airbags . 10, 29...How Your Side Airbags Work . 29

How the Side Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 32................Side Curtain Airbags . 10, 31

How Your Side Curtain Airbags.........................................Work . 31

Side Marker Lights, Bulb......................Replacement . 362, 363...............................Signaling Turns . 76

.....................................Snow Tires . 375................................Sound System . 143

......................................Spare Tire . 382....................................Spark Plugs . 408

........................Specifications . 408, 409

................................Speed Control . 266

................................Speed Limiter . 318..........SRS, Additional Information . 23

...Additional Safety Precautions . 34.............................Airbag Service . 34

......Airbag System Components . 23How the Side Airbag Off

......................Indicator Works . 32..How the SRS Indicator Works . 32

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 26

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 29How Your Side Curtain Airbags

.........................................Work . 31.............................SRS Indicator . 32, 63

....START (Ignition Key Position) . 84.......................Starting the Engine . 314

In Cold Weather at High..................................Altitude . 314

................With a Dead Battery . 390........Steam Coming from Engine . 392

Steering Wheel..................................Adjustment . 81

.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 84Steering Wheel

......................Buttons . 255, 266, 269...................Stereo Sound System . 143....................Storing Your Vehicle . 378

........................................Sun Visor . 122........................Sunglasses Holder . 122

Supplemental Restraint................................System . 10, 23......................................Servicing . 34

.........................SRS Indicator . 32, 63...................System Components . 23

..................................Synthetic Oil . 350

Table........................................Center . 120

Tailgate............................Open Indicator . 65

.................................Opening the . 95..........Taillights, Changing Bulbs . 363

.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 381Technical Descriptions

....DOT Tire Quality Grading . 410.....Emissions Control Systems . 416

.....................Oxygenated Fuels . 294Three Way Catalytic

...............................Converter . 418Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) Required Federal............................Explanation . 414

.......................Temperature Gauge . 71....................Temperature, Outside . 71

..............Tether Anchorage Points . 49................Theft Protection, Radio . 258

..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 418..................Tilt the Steering Wheel . 81

Index

T

VIII

09/07/16 18:59:39 31SWA630_439

CONTINUED

..........................Time, Setting the . 259....................................Tire Chains . 375

.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 383...........................Tire Information . 410

...............................................Tires . 370..............................Air Pressure . 371

........................................Chains . 375.........................Checking Wear . 372

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 410......................................Inflation . 370

..................................Inspection . 372.....................................Labeling . 412

Low Tire Pressure...........................Indicator . 66, 326

..............................Maintenance . 370..Pressure Monitoring System . 326

...................................Replacing . 374......................................Rotating . 373

...........................................Snow . 375............................Specifications . 409

...................Tools, Tire Changing . 383Towing

.....................................A Trailer . 329...............Behind a Motorhome . 334................Emergency Wrecker . 403

....Equipment and Accessories . 331

....................Pre-Tow Checklist . 332.............................Weight Limit . 329

TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring..................................System) . 326

...............................Indicator . 66, 327Required Federal

............................Explanation . 414.....................Trailer Loading . 329, 330

......................Trailer Towing Tips . 333Transmission

Checking Fluid Level,..............................Automatic . 355

...........................Fluid Selection . 355..............Identification Number . 407.............Shifting the Automatic . 315

.....................................Treadwear . 372

.......................................Trip Meter . 69....................................Turn Signals . 76

Unexpected, Taking Care..........................................of the . 381

....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 410........................Unleaded Gasoline . 294..............USB Adapter Cable . 237, 245

.USB Flash Memory Device . 184, 242.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 351

.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 305......................Vehicle Dimensions . 408

....Vehicle Identification Number . 406Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)

....................................System . 324.....................................Indicators . 64

.............................Vehicle Storage . 378.............................Ventilation . 131, 136

.................................................VIN . 406..................................Viscosity, Oil . 349

...........Voice Control System . 136, 195

............WARNING, Explanation of . iii.........Warning Labels, Location of . 56

....................Warranty Coverages . 423

Index

V

U

W

IND

EX

IX

09/07/16 18:59:46 31SWA630_440

＊Washers, Windshield........Checking the Fluid Level . 354

.....................................Operation . 75Wheels

...............Adjusting the Steering . 81............Alignment and Balance . 373

..............................Wrench, Nut . 386Windows

.............................Auto Reverse . 112................Operating the Power . 112

...........................Rear, Defogger . 80Windshield

.......................................Cleaning . 75...........................Defroster . 134, 139

.......................................Washers . 75Wipers, Windshield

.......................Changing Blades . 367.....................................Operation . 75

..............................WMA . 151, 168, 207....................................Worn Tires . 372

.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 403

..............XM Satellite Radio . 161, 200

U.S. only:

Index

X

X

09/07/16 20:27:57 31SWA630_441

09/07/16 18:59:53 31SWA630_442

09/07/16 18:59:55 31SWA630_443

09/07/16 18:59:58 31SWA630_444

On 4WD model only

Service Information Summary

Gasoline:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Recommended Engine Oil:

Automatic Transmission Fluid:

Brake Fluid:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):

Power Steering Fluid:

Rear Differential Fluid:

15.3 US gal (58 )

30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )

4.4 US qt (4.2 )

Unleaded gasoline, pump octanenumber of 87 or higher.

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

Honda Genuine ATF-Z1(automatic transmission fluid)(see page ).

Front/Rear:

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )Compact Spare Tire:

Honda Power Steering Fluidpreferred, or another brand ofpower steering fluid as atemporary replacement. Do notuse ATF (see page ).

1.3 US qt (1.2 )Capacity:

Honda Dual Pump Fluid II. Do notuse ATF.

API Premium grade 0W-20detergent oil (see page ).349

355

358

357

09/07/16 19:00:15 31SWA630_445

Documents

Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) - Hondatechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/WA1010/WA1010OM.pdf2010 CR-V Owner’s Manual (Unlinked) This document does not contain hyperlinks and may be